Home

G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual

1. Input Setting Communication Number FM AM FP Comm Monitor Can Function Resolution Unit Input Display Input Cerne Number seit Number 2000 FD00 3000 FE00 Output Frequency 0 01 Hz 2002 FD02 3002 FE02 Frequency Reference 0 01 Hz 2003 FD03 3003 FE03 Output Current 0 01 2004 FD04 3004 FE04 DC Bus Voltage 0 01 2005 FD05 3005 FE05 Output Voltage 0 01 2015 FD15 3015 FE15 Compensated Frequency 0 01 Hz 2016 FD16 3016 FE16 Speed Feedback Realtime See Note 1 0 01 Hz 2017 FD17 3017 FE17 Speed Feedback 1 Sec Filter See Note 1 0 01 Hz 2018 FD18 3018 FE18 Torque See Note 2 0 01 2019 FD19 3019 FE19 Torque Command See Note 2 0 01 2020 FD20 3020 FE20 Torque Current See Note 2 0 01 2021 FD21 3021 FE21 Excitation Current 0 01 2022 FD22 3022 FE22 PID Feedback Value 0 01 Hz 2023 FD23 3023 FE23 Motor Overload Ratio 0 01 2024 FD24 3024 FE24 ASD Overload Ratio 0 01 2025 FD25 3025 FE25 DBR Overload Ratio 1 2028 FD28 3028 FE28 DBR Load Ratio 1 2029 FD29 3029 FE29 Input Power 0 01 kW 2030 FD30 3030 FE30 Output Power 0 01 kW 3031 FE31 Pattern Operation Group Number 0 1 3032 FE32 Pattern Operation Cycles Remaining 1 3033 FE33 Pattern Operation Preset Speed Number 1 3034 FE34 Pattern Operation Preset Speed Time Remaining 0 1 2050 FD50 Light Load High Speed Load Torque Monitor 1 0 01 2051 FD51 Light Load High Speed Load
2. Terminal Input Output Default Function Circuit Confi Name p P Also See Terminal Descriptions on pg 22 g ST Standby Multifunctional programmable discrete input Activation required for normal ASD operation RES Reset Multifunctional programmable discrete input Resets the ASD F Disciste Input Forward Multifunctional programmable discrete input R Connect to CC to Reverse Multifunctional programmable discrete input Figure 10 on pg 25 S1 activate Sink Preset Speed 1 Multifunctional programmable discrete input 2 mode Preset Speed 2 Multifunctional programmable discrete input s3 Preset Speed 3 Multifunctional programmable discrete input S4 Preset Speed 4 Multifunctional programmable discrete input O1A B OUT1 Low Speed Multifunctional programmable discrete output f Figure 16 on pg 25 O2A B OUT2 Reach Frequency Multifunctional programmable discrete output FLA Switched Output Fault relay N O FLB Fault relay N C Figure 19 on pg 25 FLC Fault relay common RR Multifunction programmable analog input 0 0 to 10 VDC input Figure 11 on pg 25 RX Multifunctional programmable analog input 10 to 10 VDC input Figure 12 on pg 25 Aialos inoi Unassigned V Multifunctional programmable isolated analog voltage input na og input CO to 10 VDC input V I Frequency M
3. Figure 17 FP Output zs ae aA I Ay ey ee 59 na 2 r Lt K Figure 18 AM FM Output AM 0 1 mA or 0 79 VDC see F670 FM 0 20 mA or 0 10 VDC Csee F681 01 uf AM Programmable Low Pass Filter lt Circuit 100 Q 68 Q 0 20mA gt 120 0 10VDC gt Figure 19 Fault Relay Shown Not Faulted 2As120VAC X 24 30VDC TERE FLA FLB B Programmable a fi G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 25 26 Typical Connection Diagram Figure 20 The G9 ASD Typical Connection Diagram Note When connecting multiple wires to any of ASD terminals do not connect a solid wire and a stranded wire to the same terminal AN Optional Remove the jumper if installing l a DC reactor DCL vaghe 1S L NS DBR DBR is external User supplied O O OF oc Breaker Po PC PA PB 5 A w Tl vial o A ae V T2 g A T Q i High g ag W T3 6 High Voltage a Voltage o Motor 2 M a ane 3
4. Torque Limit 32 33 Switching Terminal Torque Limit Selection 1 2 0 0 T The 1 4 settings of the torque limit switching selections are performed at parameters F440 0 1 2 F449 1 0 3 34 35 1 1 4 1 Terminal Activated 36 37 PID Off Turns off PID control 38 39 Pattern Operation Group 1 Initiates the Pattern 1 Pattern Run 40 41 Pattern Operation Group 2 Initiates the Pattern 2 Pattern Run 42 43 Pattern Operation Continuation Initiates a continuation of the last Pattern Run from its stopping point Pattern Operation Trigger Initiates the first Preset Speed of a Pattern Run and initiates each subsequent si sy enabled Preset Speed with continued activations 46 47 External Over Heat Causes an Over Heat Trip OH Local Priority cancels serial priority Overrides any serial control and returns the Command and Frequency sa bisa control to the settings of F003 and F004 50 51 Hold 3 Wire Stop Decelerates the motor to a stop 52 53 PID Differentiation Integration Clear Clears the PID value PID Forward Reverse Switching Toggles the gradient characteristic of the feedback response of the VI II V D 54 55 terminal during PID controlled operation 56 57 Forced Continuous Operation Ignore PID control settings for the duration of activation 58 59 Specified Speed Oper
5. Factory Default Linear Changeable During Run Yes Acceleration Deceleration Switching Frequency 3 Program gt Special gt Accel Decel Special This parameter sets the frequency at which the acceleration control is switched from the Accel 3 profile to the Accel 4 profile during a multiple acceleration profile configuration F517 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz Pattern Operation Selection Program gt Pattern Run gt Pattern Run Pattern Run operation is enabled by selecting Seconds or Minutes as a unit of measure for the Operation Time setting for the selected Preset Speeds See Parameter F523 for more information on Selections and Group Speeds setup Settings 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Seconds 2 Enabled Minutes F520 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled Direct Access Number Changeable During Run No Pattern Operation Mode Program gt Pattern Run gt Pattern Run This parameter sets the start condition of subsequent Pattern Runs after the initial Pattern Run has been terminated or has completed its programming Settings 0 Reset After Stop 1 Continue After Stop 170 F521 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default Reset After Stop Changeabl
6. Input Function Command 2 Direct Access Number F950 Program My Function gt My Function Unit 6 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 NOP This parameter is used to assign a user selected logical operator to two user selected Input Function Target variables enable a counter timer function or perform a hold reset function Table 11 on pg 243 lists the available selections Their use and selection requirements are described in an example at F977 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 223 F951 F954 Input Function Target 3 Direct Access Number F951 Program gt My Function My Function Unit 6 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 Disabled This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 3 terminal Changeable During Run Yes This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target 3 terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 7 on pg 238 Table 8 on pg 239 or Table 10 on pg 241 See F977 for more information on this parameter Output Function Assigned Direct Access Number F952 Program gt My Function gt My Function Unit 6 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 Disabled This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the Output Function
7. Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 0 Maximum 100 0 Speed Loop Proportional Gain Program gt Feedback gt PG Settings During closed loop operation this parameter sets the response sensitivity of the drive when monitoring the output speed for control The larger the value entered here the larger the change in the output speed for a given received feedback signal F460 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD Dependent Direct Access Number Changeable During Run No Minimum 1 Maximum 9999 Speed Loop Stabilization Coefficient Program gt Feedback gt PG Settings During closed loop operation this parameter sets the response sensitivity of the drive when monitoring the output speed for control The larger the value entered here the quicker the response to changes in the received feedback F461 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 1 Maximum 9999 Load Moment of Inertia 1 Program gt Feedback gt PG Settings This parameter is used for calculating accel decel torque when compensating for load inertia while operating in the Drooping Control mode F462 Parameter Type Numerical Direct Access Number Factory Default 35 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Second Speed Loop Proportional Gain Program gt Fe
8. Table 7 My Function Input Function Target Selections Selection Comm Terminal Assignment physical terminals or memory Selection Comm Terminal Assignment physical terminals or memory Number locations where virtual internal Mamoe locations where virtual internal 0 Unassigned 17 B12 1 Forward 18 B13 2 Reverse 19 B14 3 Standby 20 B15 4 Reset 21 Virtual Input Terminal 1 5 S1 22 Virtual Input Terminal 2 6 S2 23 Virtual Input Terminal 3 7 S3 24 Virtual Input Terminal 4 8 S4 25 Internal Terminal 1 9 Lil 26 Internal Terminal 2 10 LI2 27 Internal Terminal 3 11 LI3 28 Internal Terminal 4 12 LI4 29 Internal Terminal 5 13 LIS 30 Internal Terminal 6 14 LI6 31 Internal Terminal 7 15 LI7 32 Internal Terminal 8 16 LI8 238 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Table 8 Output Terminal assignments My Function Input Setting Input Function Target assignments and Parameter Input Setting numbers for the FLA B C 01A 01B OUT1 O2A O2B OUT2 OUT3 OUTE and R1 R4 terminals Discrete Output Terminal Assignment Selections G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Input Param A Input Param z Function i Function Setting Setting Setting Setting 1000 0 Lower Limit Frequency 1086 86 Error Code
9. 50 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 250 00 Maximum 250 00 Units Switching Load Torque During Regenerative Braking Program gt Special gt Crane Hoist Settings During regenerative braking this parameter establishes the threshold torque level that is used to determine if the Light Load High Speed F328 operation may engage or remain engaged if active If the Light Load High Speed operation is terminated normal operation resumes F338 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 50 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 250 00 Maximum 250 00 Units Direct Access Number Braking Mode Selection Program gt Torque gt Torque Control This parameter is primarily used with lifting systems to allow for enough torque to be produced after receiving a Run command before releasing the brake Without this feature the load would drop for a period once the brake was released This parameter enables this function by setting the system operating mode Settings 0 Disabled 1 Forward Direction 2 Reverse Direction 3 Same Direction 142 F341 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F342 F346 Torque Bias Input Selection Program gt Torque gt Torque Control Once enabled at paramete
10. ASD EOI HH G9 Display Module Docking Station Used to flash the 9 series display module ASD MTG KIT9 9 Series EOI Remote Mounting Kit Hardware used to mount 9 series ASD EOI remotely ASD TB1 SIM9 ASD Input Output Signal Simulator Used to simulate the ASD I O monitor and control signals Allows the ASD to communicate via DeviceNet with DEV002Z DeviceNet Module other DeviceNet supported equipment including a host computer ETB003Z Expansion I O Board 1 Expands the Input Output functionality of the ASD ETBO004Z Expansion I O Board 2 Expands the Input Output functionality of the ASD PDP002Z ProfiBus DP Module Allows the ASD to communicate via ProfiBus with other ProfiBus supported equipment including a host computer Allows for the USB port of a computer to be used as a USB001Z USB to Serial Converter communications port for monitoring and controlling the ASD VEC007Z PG Vector Feedback Board Allows for the use of Vector Control using a sensor for use with a 5 volt encoder VEC004Z PG Vector Feedback Board Allows for the use of Vector Control using a sensor for use with a 12 volt encoder VEC005Z PG Vector Feedback Board Allows for the use of Vector Control using a sensor for use with a 15 volt encoder VEC006Z PG Vector Feedback Board Allows for the use of Vector Control using a sensor for use with a 24 volt encoder Note See the user manual of the applicable
11. Conduit e TRAE 3 OO I SA WE T e 5 4 13 7 lt 5 0 12 7 gt i 5 6 4 16 3 z lt _ lt 5 4 13 7 I lt 5 0 12 7 _ 9 5 24 1 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Figure 36 See Table 16 and Table 17 for the associated d evice Dimensions are in in cm 25 3 64 3 gt i o o roe 2 TE o S JTC W Current Voltage Specifications Table 18 230 Volt UL Type 1 IP 20 Chassis Standard Ratings Table Output Current Hite Coins UR eee ey aa ee VT130G9U gt 60 HP i Seconds Seconds 2 Hz Frequency 2010 3 5 4 0 A 5 3 A 0 75 2015 4 2 4 8 A 6 3 A 1 0 2025 6 9 7 9 A 10 4 A 2 0 2035 10 0 11 5 A 15 0 A 3 0 2055 15 2 17 5 A 22 8 A 5 0 2080 23 8 27 4 A 35 7 A TS 2110 28 6 32 9 A N A 42 9 A 10 2160 46 8 53 8 A 70 2 A 200 240 VAC Input Voltage 15 2220 57 2 65 8 A 85 8 A 10 Level Max 20 2270 76 3 87 8 A 114 5 A 25 2330 90 0 103 5 A 135 0 A 30 2400 104 0 119 6 A 156 0 A 40 2500 152 5 175 4 A 228 8 A 50 2600 176 0 193 6 A 264 0 A 60 2750 221 0 243 1 A 331 5 A N A TO 210K 285 0 313 5 A 427 5 A 100 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 263 Tab
12. Numerical Factory Default 100 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 100 00 Units Direct Access Number F345 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 05 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 2 50 Units Seconds Creeping Frequency Program gt Torque gt Torque Control Once enabled at parameter F302 and while running upon receiving a Stop command this parameter sets an output frequency to be provided for the duration of the time setting of parameter F302 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F346 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 3 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum F302 Setting Maximum 20 0 Units Hz 143 F347 F349 Creeping Time Direct Access Number F347 Program gt Torque gt Torque Control Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 10 Once the Creep function of F346 is activated this parameter determines the duration of activation of the Creep function Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 2 50 Units Seconds Braking Time Learning Function Direct Access Number F348 Program Torque gt Torque Control Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled This parameter is used to establish approximate settings for parameters F343 F345 F346 and F347 Changeable Dur
13. Numerical Factory Default 512 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 1 Maximum 1280 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F672 F674 MON1 Terminal Meter Selection Program gt Terminal gt Analog Output Terminals This parameter is used to set the output function of the MON1 analog output terminal The available assignments for this output terminal are listed in Table 6 on pg 237 The MONI analog output terminal produces an output voltage or current that is proportional to the magnitude of the function assigned to this terminal Note The Expansion IO Card Option 2 option board P N ETB004Z is required to use this terminal See the Expansion IO Card Option 2 Instruction Manual P N 58686 for more information on the function of this terminal MON1 Terminal Setup Parameters F672 MONI Output Function F673 MONI Terminal Meter Adjustment F688 MONI Voltage Current Output Switching F689 MONI Output Gradient Characteristic F690 MONI Bias Adjustment Set Zero Level F672 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default Output Voltage Changeable During Run Yes MON1 Terminal Adjustment Program gt Terminal gt Analog Output Terminals This parameter is used to set the gain of the MON1 output terminal and is used in conjunction with the settings of parameter F672 See parameter F672 for more information on this setting F673 P
14. EPHI Input Phase Failure 3 phase input to the ASD is low or missing at the R S or T input terminals EPHO Output Phase Failure 3 phase output from the ASD is low or missing at the U V or W output terminals or at the input to the motor ERR2 RAM Fault Internal RAM malfunction Make a service call ERR3 ROM Fault Internal ROM malfunction Make a service call ERR4 CPU Fault CPU malfunction Control board malfunction Make a service call ERRS5 Communication Error Communication time out error Communication malfunction Improper or loose connection Improper system settings ERR6 Gate Array Fault Main Gate Array is defective ERR7 Low Current Improper Low Current detection level settings at F609 F612 ERR8 Option Device Fault Check installation connections and option device manual ERR9 Flash Memory Fault Flash memory malfunction G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Make a service call 249 LED Screen LCD Screen Possible Causes ETN ETN1 ETN2 ETN3 Autotune Error Autotune readings that are significantly inconsistent with the configuration information A non 3 phase motor is being used Incorrect settings at F400 or F413 Using a motor that has a significantly smaller rating than the ASD ASD output cabling is too small too long or is being housed in a cable tray with other cables that are producing an interfering EMF Motor is running during the Autotune function
15. Factory Default None Changeable During Run Yes 211 F875 F877 Block Read Data 1 Direct Access Number F875 Program gt Communications Communication Settings Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 None This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by establishing the type of data to be read from the ASD using the communications link Changeable During Run Yes The communications network includes other ASDs and Host Control computers that monitor the status of the ASD s transfers commands and loads or modifies the parameter settings of the ASD Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled off then on for the changes to take effect Settings 0 None 1 Status Information 2 Output Frequency 3 Output Current 4 Output Voltage 5 Alarm Information 6 PID Feedback Value 7 Input Terminal Status 8 Output Terminal Status 9 VII V I 10 RR 11 RX 12 DC Voltage 13 PG Feedback 14 Torque 15 My Monitor 1 16 My Monitor 2 17 My Monitor 3 18 My Monitor 4 19 Free Memo Block Read Data 2 Direct Access Number F876 Program gt Communications Communication Settings Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default None This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by establishing the type of data to be read from the
16. Manual Torque Limit Settings This parameter is used to set the positive torque Upper Limit for the 4 motor profile when multiple motors are controlled by a single drive or when a single motor is to be controlled by multiple profiles Direct Access Number F448 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 250 0 Disabled Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 250 0 Disabled Units Regenerative Braking Torque Limit 4 Level Program gt Torque Manual Torque Limit Settings This parameter is used to set the negative torque Upper Limit for the 4 motor profile when multiple motors are controlled by a single drive or when a single motor is to be controlled by multiple profiles Direct Access Number F449 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 250 0 Disabled Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 250 0 Disabled Units Accel Decel Operation After Torque Limit Program gt Torque gt Torque Limit Settings In a Crane Hoist application that is operating using a mechanical brake this parameter is used to minimize the delay between the brake release and the output torque reaching a level that can sustain the load This setting may reference time or the operating speed of the motor Settings 0 In Sync with Accel Decel 1 In Sync with Minimum Time Direct Access Number F451 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default In
17. Torque Limit Settings This parameter determines the source of the Regenerative Torque Limit control signal If Setting is selected the value set at F443 is used for this parameter Settings 1 VII V D 2 RR 3 RX 4 F443 Setting Direct Access Number F442 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default F443 Setting Changeable During Run Yes Regenerative Braking Torque Limit 1 Level Program gt Torque gt Torque Limit Settings This parameter provides a value to be used as the Regeneration Torque Limit 1 if F443 Setting is selected at parameter F442 Set this parameter to 250 to disable this function Direct Access Number F443 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 250 0 Disabled Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 249 9 Units Power Running Torque Limit 2 Level Program gt Torque gt Manual Torque Limit Settings This parameter is used to set the positive torque Upper Limit for the 2 motor profile when multiple motors are controlled by a single drive or when a single motor is to be controlled by multiple profiles Direct Access Number F444 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 250 0 Disabled Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 250 0 Disabled Units Regenerative Braking Torque Limit 2 Level Program gt Torque Manual Torque Limit Settings This parameter is used to set the n
18. 0 Maximum 200 Units Motor Constant 4 Rated Slip Program gt Motor gt Vector Motor Model This parameter is used to set the secondary resistance of the motor An increase in this parameter setting results in an increase of compensation for motor slip Direct Access Number F413 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD Dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 01 Minimum 25 00 Units Exciting Strengthening Coefficient Program gt Special gt Special Parameters This parameter is used to increase the magnetic flux of the motor at low speed This feature is useful when increased torque at low speeds is required G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F415 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 100 Maximum 130 Units 153 F416 F423 Stall Prevention Factor 1 Program gt Protection gt Stall This parameter is to be adjusted in the event that the motor stalls when operated above the base frequency If a momentary heavy load occurs the motor may stall before the load current reaches the stall prevention level setting of F601 A drop in the supply voltage may cause fluctuations of the load current or may cause motor vibration A gradual adjustment of this parameter may alleviate this condition Start with a setting of 85 at these parameters and g
19. 148 PID Feedback 44 PID Feedback Delay Filter 148 PID Feedback Differential D Gain 149 PID Feedback Integral I Gain 148 PID Feedback Proportional P Gain 148 PID Feedback Signal 148 PID Output Lower Limit 150 PID Output Upper Limit 149 PM Motor 164 PO 16 POFF 247 Point 1 Frequency 205 Point 1 Setting 205 Point 2 Frequency 206 Point 2 Setting 206 Power Connections 16 Power Factor Correction 11 Power Running 142 Power Running Stall Continuous Trip Detection Time 159 Pattern Group 1 Selection 3 173 Pattern Group 1 Selection 4 173 Pattern Group 1 Selection 5 173 Pattern Group 1 Selection 6 174 Pattern Group 1 Selection 7 174 Power Running Torque Limit 1 157 Power Running Torque Limit Level 157 Power Running Torque Limit 2 Level 158 Power Running Torque Limit 3 Level 158 Power Running Torque Limit 4 Level 159 Pattern Group Selection 8 174 PP 21 23 Pattern Group 2 Selection 1 175 PP Output 25 Pattern Group 2 Selection 2 175 Preset Speed 1 83 Pattern Group 2 Selection 3 175 Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode 180 Pattern Group 2 Selection 4 175 Preset Speed 10 132 Pattern Group 2 Selection 5 176 Preset Speed 10 Operation Mode 181 Pattern Group 2 Selection 6 176 Preset Speed 11 132 Pattern Group 2 Selection 7 176 Preset Speed 11 Operation Mode 181 Pattern Group 2 Selection 8 176 Preset Speed 12 132 Pattern Group Cycle 44 Preset Speed 12 Operation Mode 181 Pa
20. 188 Braking Mode Selection 142 Braking Resistance Overload Time 10x rated torque 190 Braking Time Learning Function 144 C Cable Terminal Specifications 265 Carrier Frequency 56 Carrier Frequency Control Mode 138 CC 21 CCA 21 Change Step Selection 1 198 Change Step Selection 2 198 Changed From Default 51 74 Changed From Default Screen 74 Charge LED 9 16 Circuit Breaker Configuration 15 Circuit Breaker Part Number 269 Clearing a Trip 253 Clock Setup 50 CM1 246 CM2 246 Command Control Selections 39 Command Mode 77 Command Mode and Frequency Mode Control 36 Command Source 72 Commercial Power Switching Freq Hold Time 147 Commercial Power Switching Wait Time 147 Commercial Power ASD Output Switching 146 Commercial Power ASD Switching Frequency 147 Communication Adjustments 64 Communication Error 249 Communication Settings 64 Communications 64 Communications Option DeviceNet Profibus Setting 1 207 Communications Option DeviceNet Profibus Setting 2 208 Communications Option DeviceNet Profibus Setting 8 209 Communications Option Speed Switch Monitor 272 DeviceNet CC Link 211 Communications Option Station Address Monitor 210 Communications Setting Changes 74 Compensation Frequency 43 Conduit Plate Information 254 Connect IICC to CCA 105 Connecting the ASD 16 Connection Diagram 26 Continuous Dynamic Braking Capacity 137 Contrast 51 Con
21. 3 Time and Date 10 Discrete Input Status 17 Torque Reference 24 Motor Load 4 Frequency at Trip 11 OUT1 OUT2 FL Status 18 Torque Current 25 ASD Load 5 Output Current 12 Timer 19 Excitation Current 26 DBR Load 6 Output Voltage 13 Post Compensation Frequency 20 PID Value 27 Input Power 7 Direction 14 Feedback inst 21 Motor Overload 28 Output Power Trip records are comprised of the full list of monitored parameters 28 Clearing a Trip Once the cause of the trip has been corrected performing a Reset re enables the ASD for normal operation The trip may also be cleared using either of the following methods e Cycling power trip info may be saved via F602 if desired e Pressing the Stop Reset key twice e Remotely via the communications channel e Momentarily connecting terminal RES to CC of the Terminal Board or e Via Program gt Utilities gt Type Reset gt Clear Past Trip clears Monitor Screen records only G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 253 Enclosure Dimensions and Conduit Plate Information The G9 ASD part numbering convention is shown below The enclosure dimensions for the available models typeforms are listed in Table 16 and Table 17 The conduit plates referenced are shown in Figure 34 Figure 35 and Figure 36 G9 Part Numbering Convention VT 150 G9U 4 7 5K Houston Built Designator we KVA Rating
22. Fundamental gt Standard Mode Selection gt Command Mode Selection gt Terminal Block Provide a Run command F and or R Once set as the RR input voltage changes the output frequency of the ASD will vary in accordance with the above settings This parameter value is entered as 0 to 100 of the RR input signal range Direct Access Number F210 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Units Frequency Settings RR Input Point 1 Frequency Program gt Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RR input terminal when the RR terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode This parameter sets RR Input Point 1 Frequency and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of RR Input Point 1 Setting when operating in the Speed Control mode See RR Input Point 1 Setting F210 for more information on this setting 110 Direct Access Number F211 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F212 F213 RR Input Point 2 Setting Program gt Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RR input terminal when the RR terminal is used as
23. G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 265 Table 21 460 Volt G9 ASD Cable Terminal Torque Specifications Typical Wire Cable Terminal ybisa ka Lug Size Range aae Torque Model MCP Rating AWG or kemil Number Amps VT130G9U Wire Size Lug Capaci g Capacity for B 7 7 Input Output Power Input Output Power TB1 4 Terminals 3 Input 30 Output Recommended Maximum 3 Input 3 Output In Lbs Nm 4015 4025 15 14 10 14 to 8 11 5 1 3 4035 4055 4080 20 12 8 12 to8 17 7 2 0 4110 10 30 4160 8 4 10 to 4 4220 50 21 2 4 6 3 8 to 3 4270 75 4330 T9 j 20 4400 2 12 to 1 0 4 to 1 0 Score shield 50 57 53 6 0 100 4500 3 Torque to 5 3 0 6 4600 125 1 4750 175 1 0 4 0 6 to 250 1 to 300 275 31 168 19 410K 200 3 0 412K 250 1 0 4 0 415K 300 2 0 6 to 250 275 31 250 420K 400 4 0 425K 500 250 350 4 to 350 430K 600 3 0 375 42 4 350 0 to 500 6 to 350 435K 700 4 0 Note Indicates that the item is one of a set of two parallel cables Note Indicates that the item is one of a set of three parallel cables 266 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Dynamic Braking Resistor Wire Cable Specifications Thermal protection for the DBR circuit see Figure 37 on pg 268 or an input contactor that will open the 3 phase power input circuit see Figure 38 on pg 268 to the G9 ASD
24. My Function gt My Function Data This parameter is used to set the trigger threshold level of the analog signal of the My Function Frequency Data 2 The analog signal is selected using the Input Setting number from Table 8 on pa 239 Direct Access Number F924 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 200 00 Units My Function Frequency Data 3 Program gt My Function gt My Function Data This parameter is used to set the trigger threshold level of the analog signal of the My Function Frequency Data 3 The analog signal is selected using the Input Setting number from Table 8 on pg 239 218 Direct Access Number F925 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 200 00 Units G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F926 F930 My Function Frequency Data 4 Program gt My Function gt My Function Data This parameter is used to set the trigger threshold level of the analog signal of the My Function Frequency Data 4 The analog signal is selected using the Input Setting number from Table 8 on pg 239 Direct Access Number F926 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 200 00 Units My Function Frequency Data 5 Program My Function gt My Functio
25. No Minimum 0 0 Maximum 2 5 Units Seconds PTC1 Thermal Selection Program gt Special gt Special Parameters gt PTC1 Thermal Selection This parameter Enables Disables the optional external thermal detection circuit of the Expansion IO Card Option 1 A thermistor is connected from TH1 to TH1 of TB3 on the Expansion IO Card Option 1 Should the thermistor resistance reading fall below 50Q because of an over temperature condition or exceed 3000Q because of an open circuit an External Thermal Fault OH2 will be incurred Note While this parameter is Enabled the system cannot be restarted until the thermistor value recovers to the level of 1 8kQ from an over temperature condition An Auto Restart will not be initiated subsequent to an External Thermal Trip OH2 A manual restart will be required in the event of an OH2 trip Settings 0 Disabled 1 Detect Disconnect G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F637 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled Direct Access Number Changeable During Run No 189 F638 F641 PTC2 Thermal Selection Program gt Special gt Special Parameters gt PTC2 Thermal Selection This parameter Enables Disables the optional external thermal detection circuit of the Expansion IO Card Option 2 A thermistor is connected from TH1 to TH1 of TB4 on the Expansion IO Card Option 2 Should the thermistor resistance reading fa
26. Over speeding a motor decreases its ability to deliver torque and may result in damage to the motor and or the driven equipment G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Not all ASDs are equipped with internal primary power input fuses typeform dependent When connecting two or more drives that have no internal fuse to the same power line as shown in Figure 1 it will be necessary to select a circuit breaking configuration that will ensure that if a short circuit occurs in ASD 1 only MCCB2 trips not MCCB1 If it is not feasible to use this configuration insert a fuse between MCCB2 and ASD 1 Figure 1 Circuit Breaker Configuration Mounting the ASD CAUTION The following thermal specifications apply to the 230 and the 460 volt ASDs ONLY Install the unit securely in a well ventilated area that is out of direct sunlight The process of converting AC to DC and then back to AC produces heat During normal ASD operation up to 5 of the input energy to the ASD may be dissipated as heat If installing the ASD in a cabinet ensure that there is adequate ventilation DO NOT operate the ASD with the enclosure door open The ambient operating temperature rating of the G9 ASD is 14 to 104 F 10 to 40 C When installing adjacent ASDs horizontally Toshiba recommends at least 5 cm of space between adjacent units However horizontally mounted ASDs ma
27. Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 10V Changeable During Run Yes MON 2 Output Gradient Characteristic Program gt Terminal gt Analog Output Terminals This parameter sets the output response polarity of the MON2 output terminal The MON2 output terminal response may be set to respond inversely or directly to the input signal See parameter F672 for more information on this setting Settings 0 Minus Negative Gradient 1 Plus Positive Gradient Direct Access Number F692 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Plus Changeable During Run Yes MON 2 Bias Adjustment Program gt Terminal gt Analog Output Terminals This parameter setting is used to ensure that a zero level input signal produces a zero level output at the MON2 terminal Set the assigned function of parameter F674 to zero and then set this parameter to a zero output See parameter F674 for more information on this setting F693 Parameter Type Numerical Direct Access Number Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 10 0 Maximum 100 0 Units Parameter Write Lockout Program gt Utilities Prohibition This parameter Enables Disables the Run and Stop keys Settings 0 Enabled 1 Disabled 196 F700 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default Enabled Changeable Du
28. ST to CC required Speed Reference gt Ready to Run Indicator Speed Reference Hz SET 0 00 Hz a Appears When ST is Connecte User Selected i to CC Monitored Parameters gt DC Voltage aika e see Main Monitor Selections Output Current gt on pg 45 Q Shows Discrete I O Terminal FR H Stes ae S4 Reverse Run Active m Status or Alarm Condition Figure 23 Monitor Screen see pg 43 for more on the Monitor Screen items Item Number 1 of 43 Monitored items Screen Name gt Monitor Only 5 Items Listed Freq At Trip 0 00HZ Speed at Trip If Applicable Active Frequency gt Freq Ref 0 00Hz Command Output Current 0 00 Active output Current Active DC Bus Voltage DC Voltage 0 00 Output Voltage 0 00 ASD Output Voltage Figure 24 Program Menu Screen see pg 46 for more on the Program Menu Screen 01 15 lt Item Number of 15 Prog ram Program Menu items Startup Wizard Only 5 Items Listed Fundamental Terminal Direct Access Utilities Screen Name gt Primary Menu Items G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 31 32 LED LCD Screen Installation Note When installing the LED LCD Screen module of the EOI ensure that the left side of the display is inserted first with the top and bottom catches see Phillips screws at underside of display securely in plac
29. maintenance or disposing of this equipment This manual and the accompanying drawings should be considered a permanent part of the equipment and should be readily available for reference and review Dimensions shown in the manual are in metric and or the English equivalent Because of our commitment to continuous improvement Toshiba International Corporation reserves the right without prior notice to update information make product changes or to discontinue any product or service identified in this publication Toshiba International Corporation TIC shall not be liable for direct indirect special or consequential damages resulting from the use of the information contained within this manual This manual is copyrighted No part of this manual may be photocopied or reproduced in any form without the prior written consent of Toshiba International Corporation Copyright 2009 Toshiba International Corporation TOSHIBA is a registered trademark of Toshiba Corporation All other product or trade references appearing in this manual are registered trademarks of their respective owners TOSHIBA Leading Innovation is a registered trademark of Toshiba International Corporation All rights reserved Printed in the U S A Contacting Toshiba s Customer Support Center Toshiba s Customer Support Center can be contacted to obtain help in resolving any Adjustable Speed Drive system problem that you may experience or to provide appli
30. the ASD will follow the control of the discrete input terminal assigned the function of Frequency Priority The discrete terminal Frequency Priority will toggle control to and from Frequency Mode 1 and Frequency Mode 2 with each activation deactivation If FMOD F208 is selected here the ASD will follow the control of the Frequency Mode 1 setting for the duration that the commanded frequency of the Frequency Mode 1 setting is greater than the setting of F208 If the commanded frequency of the Frequency Mode 1 setting is less than or equal to the setting of F208 the ASD will follow the setting of Frequency Mode 2 104 Direct Access Number F200 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default FMOD changed by TB Changeable During Run Yes Frequency Source 1 i Source 2 F208 Lo x ri S Time a oe Sage Se Frequency If the frequency command of Frequency Mode 1 is greater than the F208 setting Frequency Mode 1 has priority over Frequency Mode 2 f the frequency command of Frequency ode 1 is equal to or less than the F208 setting Frequency Mode 2 has priority G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F201 F201 VI II V I Input Point 1 Setting Direct Access Number F201 Program Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints Parameter Type Numerical This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the isolated V I input terminal when the V I terminal is used as
31. 100 and adjusting this setting to provide an output of 100 from the ASD Direct Access Number F477 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 128 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Al2 Option V I Input Bias Program gt Frequency gt Speed Reference Setpoints This parameter is used to fine tune the bias of the Optional AI2 input terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode or the Torque Control mode This setting may be used to ensure that the zero level of the input source pot pressure transducer flow meter etc is also the zero level setting of the ASD system This is accomplished by setting the input source to zero and adjusting this setting to provide a zero output from the ASD Al2 Option V I Input Gain Program gt Frequency gt Speed Reference Setpoints This parameter is used to fine tune the gain of the Optional AI2 input terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode or the Torque Control mode This setting may be used to ensure that the 100 level of the input source pot pressure transducer flow meter etc is also the 100 level setting of the ASD system This is accomplished by setting the input source to 100 and adjusting this setting to provide an output of 100 from the ASD G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F
32. 21 Electronic Operator Interface sscsccscssessssssssssssscssssesessesssesscssecsesesecsssesssssessesssessesees 28 EOL OperatiOns s 0 csecscesscseesh s aeaaeae e E a aa e aas 28 EOL RemoteMounting crsecanieraniiiirieneniriien an n a a i n i 28 EOI Feat r g rinn o shoei snes E EK EE RET ETR E E O EE a 29 Keypad Remote Mounting cccesccesesssessceseeesceeeceeeseeeeecaeeseecaecsaecasesaeeeeeeseeeeseseeereneeenes 33 Command Mode and Frequency Mode Control e sessseseesooscoesoesooscossoeseosoossessesssossessessseseese 36 Command Control F003 rasiaan E E S T E tenses 36 Frequency Control F004 eesesesessesesesesseserseseeseoseseresserssseereesererssesessesersreonseesesereorerseseeseeee 37 Override Operation spense en ieii i EEE E AA E E EA EE EE AER Eeo 38 System Configuration and Menu Options s ssesesseeseseesesesoesesseeoeseroesesoreorseeoeseseorereoroeseeeeseeee 41 ROOt MENUS a a a E a T 41 System Operation scssccsscsscssscssssesssssssessessesssssssssssssessesesesssssesesessssnseesssesseessessossseeees 70 mita Seti ss ccsveiacc scons Sides ties ct E O eae esd vi Soaked teins STR RE Re ote 70 Startup Wizard Parameters cccecceeseescesseesecsecsceesecsseseceeceseeaeceseeeeeeeeseeesecaeeeseceeeaeentens 70 Operation Local sve ccicececse gaiscecsck ceces ok Micke Hates RN hee Ae A eA R 73 Default Setting Changes seios iren ine en reeeo naiomest uecndosiesaansanrhdeaenbaeGibawcenes 74 Save User Settings cha
33. 234 See the My Function Instruction Manual P N E6581335 for more information on the function of this terminal Input Terminal 18 B13 Function Direct Access Number F165 Program gt Terminal gt Input Terminals Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Unassigned This parameter is used to set the functionality of the B13 discrete input terminal Changeable During Run No In addition this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This setting assigns the function of the programmable B13 terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 5 on pg 234 See the My Function Instruction Manual P N E6581335 for more information on the function of this terminal 96 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F166 F169 Input Terminal 19 B14 Function Program gt Terminal gt Input Terminals This parameter is used to set the functionality of the B14 discrete input terminal In addition this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This setting assigns the function of the programmable B14 terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 5 on pg 234 See the My Function Instruction Manual P N E6581335 for more information on the function of this terminal F166 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default Unassigned Changeable During Run No
34. 263 Also the Stall Prevention Level may be adjusted to help with nuisance over current trips see F601 When using the ASD for an application to control a motor that is rated significantly less than the maximum current rating of the ASD the over current limit Thermal Overload Protection setting will have to be changed to match the FLA of the motor For further information on this parameter see Motor Overload Protection Level 1 on pg 182 ASD Capacity The ASD must not be used with a motor that has a larger capacity than the ASD even if the motor is operated under a small load An ASD being used in this way will be susceptible to a high output peak current which may result in nuisance tripping Do not apply a level of input voltage to an ASD that is beyond that which the ASD is rated The input voltage may be stepped down when required with the use of a step down transformer or some other type of voltage reduction system Using Vector Control Using Vector Control enables the system to produce very high torque over the entire operating range even at extremely low speeds Vector Control may be used with or without feedback However using feedback increases the speed accuracy for applications requiring precise speed control See F015 on pg 81 for further information on using Vector Control G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 13 Installation and Connections The G9 True Torque Control Adjustable Speed Drive may be set up ini
35. 4 Accel time 4 F514 setting 5 Decel time 4 F515 setting 6 Decel time 3 F511 setting 7 Decel time 2 F501 setting 8 Decel time 1 F510 setting Accel Decel Switching Frequency 1 Program gt Special gt Accel Decel Special This parameter sets the frequency at which the acceleration control is switched from the Accel 1 profile to the Accel 2 profile during a multiple acceleration profile configuration G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F505 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz 167 F506 F510 S Pattern Acceleration Lower Limit Adjustment Program gt Special Accel Decel Special During an S Pattern 1 or 2 sequence this parameter setting modifies the acceleration rate for the lower part of the acceleration curve by the percentage set here This function is commonly used with transportation and lifting applications See parameter F502 on pg 165 for more information on this setting Direct Access Number F506 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 10 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 50 Units S Pattern Acceleration Upper Limit Adjustment Program gt Special gt Accel Decel Special During an S Pattern 1 or 2 sequence this parameter setting modifies the acceleration rate for the upp
36. 4 Enabled At Startup And During Run 5 Enabled Detects an ALL PHASE Failure ONLY Will Not Trip Restarts At Reconnect G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F605 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled Direct Access Number Changeable During Run No 183 F606 F610 Overload Reduction Starting Frequency Program gt Protection Overload This parameter is primarily used with V f motors It is used to reduce the starting frequency at which the Overload Reduction function begins and is useful during extremely low speed motor operation During very low speed operation the cooling efficiency of the motor decreases Lowering the start frequency of the Overload Reduction function aides in minimizing the generated heat and precluding an Overload trip This function is useful in loads such as fans pumps and blowers that have the square reduction torque characteristic Set parameter F607 to the desired Overload Time Limit F606 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 6 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 30 00 Units Hz Motor 150 Overload Time Limit Program gt Protection gt Overload This parameter establishes a time that the motor may operate at 150 of its rated current before tripping This setting applies the time 150 reference to the individual settings of each motor e g this setting r
37. 480 68 5 1740 67 0 1701 13 8 351 Figure 35 L 430K 13 25 6 650 70 0 1778 68 5 1740 21 3 541 Figure 36 M 435K 256 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Figure 31 See Table 16 and Table 17 for Actual Dimensions a E 2B 2p I L Za a i j E U i r j L ET j ee ghon y pn G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 257 258 Figure 32 See Table 16 and Table 17 for Actual Dimensions p Ip 1 aN I _ i Ba G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Figure 33 See Table 16 and Table 17 for Actual Dimensions G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 259 260 Conduit Plate Dimensions Figure 34 See Table 16 and Table 17 for the associated device Dimensions are in in cm X Concentric Knockous for Diameter Sizes 0 5 0 75 and 1 0
38. 5 Point Setting Frequency 3 103 V f 5 Point Setting Frequency 4 103 V f 5 Point Setting Frequency 5 104 V f 5 Point Setting Voltage 1 102 V f 5 Point Setting Voltage 2 103 V f 5 Point Setting Voltage 3 103 V f 5 Point Setting Voltage 4 103 V f 5 Point Setting Voltage 5 104 V f Control Error 248 V f Pattern 81 V I 21 44 54 V I V 23 V I Analog Input Broken Wire Detection Level 189 V I Input 25 V I Input Bias 161 V I Input Gain 161 V I Input Point 1 Frequency 106 V I Input Point 1 Rate 107 V I Input Point 1 Setting 105 V I Input Point 2 Frequency 106 V I Input Point 2 Rate 108 V I Input Point 2 Setting 106 V I Settings 54 V I Terminal 44 V T2 16 17 Vector Control 13 Vector Motor Model 59 Version read only 51 VI II Terminal 44 Viewing Trip Information 253 Virtual Input Terminal 1 Selection 230 Virtual Input Terminal 2 Selection 230 Virtual Input Terminal 3 Selection 230 Virtual Input Terminal 4 Selection 230 Voltage and Frequency Rating of the Motor 71 Volts Per Hertz Setting 72 V Phase Over Current 251 W W T3 16 17 Warranty Card 2 Wizard Finish 73 W Phase Over Current 251 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual TOSHIBA TOSHIBA INTERNATIONAL CORPORATION INDUSTRIAL DIVISION 13131 West Little York Road Houston TX 77041 TEL 713 466 0277 FAX 713 937 9349 Printed in the U S A
39. 50 0 Units 233 Table 5 Discrete Input Terminal Assignment Selections And Descriptions Sel No Terminal Selection Descriptions NO INC i 0 1 Unassigned No operation 2 3 Forward Provides a Forward run command 4 5 Reverse Provides a Reverse run command 6 7 Standby Enables the Forward and Reverse operation commands 8 9 Reset Resets the device and any active faults 10 11 Preset Speed 1 Preset Speed 1 is used as the LSB of the 4 bit nibble that is used to select a Preset Speed 12 13 Preset Speed 2 Preset Speed 2 is used as the second bit of the 4 bit nibble that is used to select a Preset Speed 14 15 Preset Speed 3 Preset Speed 3 is used as the third bit of the 4 bit nibble that is used to select a Preset Speed 16 17 Preset Speed 4 Preset Speed 4 is used as the MSB of the 4 bit nibble that is used to select a Preset Speed Jog Run This terminal activates a Jog for the duration of the activation The Jog settings may be configured at 18 19 F260 F262 Emergency Off Terminates the output signal from the drive and may apply a brake if so configured The braking 20 21 method may be selected at F603 23 DC Braking Upon activation the drive outputs a DC current that is injected into the windings of the moto
40. 76 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F003 F004 Command Mode Program gt Fundamental Standard Mode Selection The Command Mode Selection establishes the source of the command input for the ASD Command inputs include Run Stop Forward etc The Override feature may supersede the Command Mode Selection setting see Command Mode and Frequency Mode Control on pg 36 Settings 0 Terminal Block 1 Not Used 2 EOI Keypad 3 RS485 4 Communication Option Board Direct Access Number F003 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Terminal Block Changeable During Run No Frequency Mode 1 Program gt Fundamental Standard Mode Selection The Frequency Mode 1 setting establishes the source of the frequency control input for the ASD The Frequency Mode 2 setting or the Override feature may supersede the Frequency Mode 1 setting Note Only Bolded items from the Settings list below may be placed in the Override mode See the section titled Command Mode and Frequency Mode Control on pg 36 for more information on the Override feature Settings 1 VII V D 2 RR 3 RX 5 EOI Keypad 6 RS485 7 Communication Option Board 8 RX2 Option AI1 9 Option V I 10 UP DOWN Frequency 11 Pulse Input Option 12 Pulse Input Motor CPU 13 Binary BCD Input Option G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F0
41. ASD Installation and Operation Manual F955 F958 Input Function Target 2 Direct Access Number F955 Program gt My Function My Function Unit 7 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 Disabled This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 2 terminal Changeable During Run Yes This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target 2 terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 7 on pg 238 Table 8 on pg 239 or Table 10 on pg 241 See F977 for more information on this parameter Input Function Command 2 Direct Access Number F956 Program gt My Function gt My Function Unit 7 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 NOP This parameter is used to assign a user selected logical operator to two user selected Input Function Target variables enable a counter timer function or perform a hold reset function Table 11 on pg 243 lists the available selections Their use and selection requirements are described in an example at F977 Input Function Target 3 Direct Access Number F957 Program My Function gt My Function Unit 7 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 Disabled This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function T
42. Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz 155 F427 F431 Reverse Speed Limit Input Program gt Torque gt Torque Control This parameter Enables Disables the Reverse Speed Limit Input control function When enabled and operating in the Torque Control mode the reverse speed limit is controlled by the terminal selected here If Setting is selected the value set at F428 is used as the Reverse Speed Limit input Settings 0 Disabled 1 VII V D 2 RR 3 RX 4 Setting F428 F427 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Reverse Speed Limit Input Level Program gt Torque gt Torque Control This parameter provides a value to be used as the Reverse Speed Limit setting if Setting is selected at F427 Direct Access Number F428 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 80 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz Speed Limit torque 0 Center Value Reference Program gt Torque gt Torque Speed Limiting The system has the ability to limit the amount that the speed may vary as a function of a changing load while operating in the Torque Control mode This parameter sets the input terminal that will be used to control the allowable speed variance Settings 0 Disabl
43. Assigned terminal Changeable During Run Yes This setting assigns the function of the programmable Output Function Assigned data location to one of the functions listed in the Input Setting field of Table 8 on pg 239 Settings 0 3099 See the My Function Instruction Manual P N E6581335 and F977 for more information on this parameter Input Function Target 1 Direct Access Number F953 Program My Function gt My Function Unit 7 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 Disabled This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 1 terminal Changeable During Run Yes This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target 1 terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 7 on pg 238 Table 8 on pg 239 or Table 10 on pg 241 See F977 for more information on this parameter Input Function Command 1 Direct Access Number F954 Program gt My Function gt My Function Unit 7 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 NOP This parameter is used to assign a user selected logical operator to two user selected Input Function Target variables enable a counter timer function or perform a hold reset function Table 11 on pg 243 lists the available selections Their use and selection requirements are described in an example at F977 224 G9
44. Communications Option DeviceNet Profibus Setting 10 Program Communications Communication Settings Same as F841 See F841 for information on this parameter Direct Access Number F843 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0000h Changeable During Run Yes Communications Option DeviceNet Profibus Setting 11 Program gt Communications Communication Settings Same as F841 See F841 for information on this parameter G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F844 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0000h Changeable During Run Yes 209 F845 F853 Communications Option DeviceNet Profibus Setting 12 Program Communications gt Communication Settings Same as F841 See F841 for information on this parameter F845 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0000h Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Communications Option DeviceNet Profibus Setting 13 Program Communications gt Communication Settings Same as F841 See F841 for information on this parameter F846 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0000h Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Disconnection Detection Extended Time Program Communications Communication Settings This parameter is used to set the length of time that no communications activity may exist before the communications link
45. DC bus R L1 S L2 and T L3 are the 3 phase input supply terminals for the ASD U T1 V T2 and W T3 are the output terminals of the ASD that connect to the motor The location of the Charge LED for the smaller typeform ASD is provided in Figure 2 The Charge LED is located on the front door of the enclosure of the larger ASDs Figure 2 Typical G9 ASD Input output Terminals and the Grounding Capacitor Switch ayy Grounding Capacitor Switch Pull for Small capacitance push for Large capacitance 16 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Power Connection Requirements Connect the 3 phase input power to the input terminals of the ASD at R L1 S L2 and T L3 see Figure 3 for the typical electrical connection scheme Connect the output of the ASD to the motor from the ASD terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 The input and output conductors and terminal lugs used shall be in accordance with the requirements listed in the section titled Current Voltage Specifications on pg 263 If multiple conductors are used in parallel for the input or output power and it is necessary to use separate conduits each parallel set shall have its own conduit and not share its conduit with other parallel sets i e place U1 V1 and W1 in one conduit and U2 V2 and W2 in another refer to NEC Article 300 20 and Article 310 4 National and local electrical codes should be referenced if three or more power conductors are run in the same conduit refer to 20
46. Delays Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 8 0 This parameter delays the response of the drive to any change in the 5 12 terminal inputs by the programmed value see waveforms at F140 Changeable Dunne Rune No The delay may be increased to provide additional electrical noise immunity or ie to prevent the ASD from responding to contact bounce or chatter Maximum 200 0 Units mS Input Terminal 13 20 Response Time Direct Access Number F145 Program gt Terminal gt Input Terminal Delays Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 8 0 This parameter delays the response of the drive to any change in the 13 20 terminal inputs by the programmed value see waveforms at F140 Changeable During Run No The delay may be increased to provide additional electrical noise immunity or oe to prevent the ASD from responding to contact bounce or chatter Maximum 200 0 Units mS Input Terminal 17 B12 Function Direct Access Number F164 Program gt Terminal gt Input Terminals Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Unassigned This parameter is used to set the functionality of the B12 discrete input terminal Changeable During Run No In addition this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This setting assigns the functionality of the programmable B12 terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 5 on pg
47. Dependent Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 50 0 Maximum 660 0 Units Volts G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F410 F415 Motor Constant 1 Torque Boost Program gt Motor gt Vector Motor Model This parameter sets the primary resistance of the motor Increasing this value can prevent a drop in the torque of the motor at low speeds Increasing this value excessively can result in nuisance overload tripping Direct Access Number F410 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD Dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 30 0 Units Motor Constant 2 No Load Current Program gt Motor gt Vector Motor Model This parameter is used to set the current level required to excite the motor Specifying a value that is too high for this parameter may result in hunting erratic motor operation Direct Access Number F411 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD Dependent Changeable During Run No Minimum 10 Maximum 90 Units Motor Constant 3 Leak Inductance Program gt Motor gt Vector Motor Model This parameter is used to set the leakage inductance of the motor A larger setting here results in higher output torque at high speeds Direct Access Number F412 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD Dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum
48. During Run Yes Maximum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz 121 F234 F235 PG Input Point 1 Setting Program gt Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the PG input terminal of the option board when a shaft mounted encoder is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode Note See PG Option Board Instruction Manual P N 58687 for more information PG Input Speed Control Setup Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Speed control input at the PG input terminal Program Fundamental Standard Mode Selection gt Frequency Mode 1 gt Pulse Input option Program gt Fundamental gt Standard Mode Selection gt Command Mode Selection gt any setting e Provide a Run command F and or R Speed Control Perform the following setup to allow the system to perform Speed control from the PG input terminals e Set PG Point 1 Frequency F235 e Set the PG input value F234 that represents PG Point 1 Frequency Set PG Point 2 Frequency F237 e Set the PG input value F236 that represents PG Point 2 Frequency Once set as the PG input pulse count rate changes the output frequency of the drive will vary in accordance with the above settings This parameter sets the PG input pulse count that represents Reference Setpoint 1 frequency The range of values for this parameter is 0 to 1
49. E E 246 248 E 10 248 E 11 248 E 12 248 E 13 248 E 17 248 E 18 248 E 19 248 E 20 248 E 21 248 E 22 248 E 23 248 E 24 248 E 25 249 E 26 249 E 50 249 EEP1 249 EEP2 249 EEP3 249 EEPROM Data Fault 249 EEPROM Fault 249 EF1 249 EF2 249 Electronic Operator Interface 28 Electronic Operator Interface Features 29 Emergency Off 30 248 Emergency Off DC Injection Application Time 183 Emergency Off Mode Settings 183 Emergency Off Settings 52 Enclosure Dimensions 254 End Frequency 124 EOI Command Mode 42 EOI Operation 28 EOI Remote Mounting 28 EPHI 249 EPHO 249 Equipment Inspection 3 ERR2 249 ERR3 249 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual ERR4 249 ERRS 249 ERR6 249 ERR7 249 ERR8 249 ERR9 249 ESC Key 29 ETN 250 ETN1 250 ETN2 250 ETN3 250 ETYP 250 Excitation Current 44 Exciting Strengthening Coefficient 153 Extender Cables 33 External Over Heat 251 F F 21 22 Fan Control 186 Fault 244 Fault Relay Shown Faulted 25 Faults 244 Feedback 60 Feedback 1 second 43 Feedback inst 43 Feedback Settings 60 FLA 21 24 FLA B and C Switching Relationship 24 Flash Memory Fault 249 FLB 24 FLC 21 24 FM 21 23 FM Bias Adjustment 195 FM Output 43 FM Output Gradient Characteristic 194 FM Output Terminal Adjustment 78 FM Output Terminal Function 78 FM Voltage Current Output Switchin
50. F402 adjustment required Motor temperature is too high F410 adjustment required Motor Constant 1 improperly set F412 adjustment required Motor Constant 3 improperly set Autotune setting F400 is set to Auto Calculation and there is a problem with the Motor Constant readings ETYP Typeform Error Firmware information typeform loaded into the Gate Driver board is inconsistent with the device in which the firmware is being used The Gate Driver board has been replaced The Gate Driver board is defective None No Errors No active faults OCI1 Over Current During Acceleration Improper V f setting Restart from a momentary power outage The ASD is starting into a rotating motor ASD Motor not properly matched Phase to phase short U V or W Accel time too short Voltage Boost setting is too high Motor machine jammed Mechanical brake engaged while the ASD is running ASD current exceeds 340 of the rated FLA on ASDs that are 100 HP or less during acceleration On ASDs that are greater than 100 HP this fault occurs when the ASD current exceeds 320 of the rated FLA during acceleration OCI1P Over Heat During Acceleration Cooling fan inoperative Ventilation openings are obstructed Internal thermistor is disconnected Acceleration time is too short Improper V f setting ASD or the motor is improperly matched to the application 250 G9 ASD Installatio
51. F462 Second Speed Loop Proportional Gain F463 Second Speed Loop Stabilization Coefficient F464 Load Moment of Inertia 2 F465 My FUNCTION My Function Selection My Function Operating Mode F977 Input Function Target 1 F900 Input Function Command 1 F901 Input Function Target 2 F902 My Function Unit 1 Input Function Command 2 F903 Input Function Target 3 F904 Output Function Assigned F905 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 61 Program Mode Menu Navigation Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Peramedar Number My FUNCTION Input Function Target 1 F906 Input Function Command 1 F907 Input Function Target 2 F908 My Function Unit 2 Input Function Command 2 F909 Input Function Target 3 F910 Output Function Assigned F911 Input Function Target 1 F912 Input Function Command 1 BOI Input Function Target 2 F914 My Function Unit 3 Input Function Command 2 F915 Input Function Target 3 F916 Output Function Assigned F917 Input Function Target 1 F935 Input Function Command 1 F936 Input Function Target 2 F937 My Function Unit 4 Input Function Command 2 F938 Input Function Target 3 F939 Output Function Assigned F940 Input Function Target 1 F941 Input Function Command 1 F942 Input Function Target 2 F943 My Function Unit 5 Input Function Command 2 F944 Input Function Target 3 F945 Output Function Assigned F946 Input Function Target 1 F9
52. F674 for more information on this setting F675 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 512 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 1 Maximum 1280 Pulse Output Function FP Program gt Terminal gt Analog Output Terminals This parameter sets the functionality of the FP output terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 8 on pg 239 and is enabled at parameter F669 As the assigned function changes in magnitude or frequency the pulse count of the FP output terminal pulse train changes in direct proportion to changes in the assigned function Note The duty cycle of the output pulse train remains at 65 5 0 uS This parameter is used in conjunction with parameter F669 and F677 F676 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default Output Frequency Changeable During Run Yes Pulse Output Frequency FP Program gt Terminal gt Analog Output Terminals This parameter scales the FP output terminal by setting the pulses per second output signal of the FP terminal See F676 for more information on this parameter F677 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 3 84 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 1 00 Maximum 43 20 Units Pulses Second FM Voltage Current Output Switching Program gt Terminal gt Analog Output Terminals This parame
53. Factory Default 60 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 60 00 Units Hz PID Feedback Differential D Gain Program gt Feedback gt Feedback Settings This parameter determines the degree that the Differential function affects the output signal The larger the value entered here the more pronounced the affect of the differential function for a given feedback signal level Process Upper Limit Program gt Feedback gt Feedback Settings Selecting Process PID at parameter F359 allows for this parameter setting to function as the Upper Limit while operating in the PID Control mode F366 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 2 55 F367 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 60 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run No Minimum Lower Limit F013 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz Process Lower Limit Program gt Feedback gt Feedback Settings Selecting Process PID at parameter F359 allows for this parameter setting to function as the Lower Limit while operating in the PID Control mode PID Control Wait Time Program gt Feedback gt Feedback Settings This parameter is used to delay the start of PID control at start up During the wait time set here the ASD will follow the frequency control input o
54. Fault is incurred The User Notification codes are displayed as an indication that a system function or system condition is active i e ATN DB and DBON The code is displayed on the EOI for the duration of the activation If a user setting or a ASD parameter has been exceeded or if a data transfer function produces an unexpected result a condition that is referred to as a Fault is incurred An Alarm is an indication that a Fault is imminent if existing operating conditions continue unchanged An Alarm may be associated with an output terminal to notify the operator of the condition remotely close a contact or engage a brake At the least an Alarm will cause an alarm code to appear on the EOI display Table 13 on pg 246 lists the Alarm codes that may be displayed during operation of the ASD In the event that the condition that caused the Alarm does not return to its normal operating level within a specified time the ASD Faults and a Trip is incurred Fault and Trip are sometimes used interchangeably A Trip is a safety feature the result of a Fault that disables the ASD system and removes the 3 phase power to the motor in the event that a subsystem of the ASD is malfunctioning or one or more of the variables listed below exceeds its normal range time and or magnitude e Current e Voltage e Speed Temperature e Torque or e Load See Table 14 on pg 248 for a listing of the potential Trips and the associated probable caus
55. Function feature by selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 1 terminal This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target 1 terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 7 on pg 238 Table 8 on pg 239 or Table 10 on pg 241 See F977 for more information on this parameter 220 F935 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 Disabled Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F936 F940 Input Function Command 1 Program gt My Function gt My Function Unit 4 This parameter is used to assign a user selected logical operator to two user selected Input Function Target variables enable a counter timer function or perform a hold reset function Table 11 on pg 243 lists the available selections Their use and selection requirements are described in an example at F977 Direct Access Number F936 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 NOP Input Function Target 2 Program My Function gt My Function Unit 4 This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 2 terminal This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target 2 terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 7 on pg 238 Table 8 on pg 239
56. Hz 111 F214 F215 RR Input Point 1 Rate Program gt Torque gt Setpoints This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RR input terminal when the RR terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Torque Control mode RR Input Torque Control Setup Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Torque Control input at the RR input terminal Program gt Fundamental Standard Mode Selection gt Frequency Mode gt RR Program gt Fundamental gt Standard Mode Selection gt Command Mode Selection gt Terminal Block Torque Control Perform the following setup to allow the system to perform Torque Control from the RR input terminal Set RR Input Point 1 Rate F214 Set RR Input Point 1 Setting F210 the input analog signal level that corresponds to the torque setting at RR Input Point 1 Rate Set RR Input Point 2 Rate F215 Set RR Input Point 2 Setting F212 the input analog signal level that corresponds to the frequency setting at RR Input Point 2 Rate Provide a Run command F and or R Torque Control is accomplished by establishing an associated V f output pattern for a given RR input level Once set as the RR input voltage changes the output torque of the ASD will vary in accordance with the above settings This parameter sets RR Input Point 1 Rate and is the output torque value that is associated with the setting of RR
57. Input Terminal 20 B15 Function Program gt Terminal gt Input Terminals This parameter is used to set the functionality of the B15 discrete input terminal In addition this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This setting assigns the function of the programmable B15 terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 5 on pg 234 See the My Function Instruction Manual P N E6581335 for more information on the function of this terminal F167 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default Unassigned Changeable During Run No Output Terminal 10 R3 Function Program gt Terminal gt Output Terminals This parameter sets the functionality of the R3 output terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 8 on pg 239 In addition the output terminals must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed See the 16 bit BIN BCD Option Instruction Manual for more information on the function of this terminal F168 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default OFF Direct Access Number Changeable During Run No Output Terminal 11 R4 Function Program gt Terminal gt Output Terminals This parameter sets the functionality of the R4 output terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 8 on pg 239 In addition the output terminals must be specified
58. Key This key has three functions 1 Issues the Off command decelerates to Stop at the programmed rate if pressed once while in the Local mode in accordance with the setting of F721 2 Initiates an Emergency Off Fault if pressed twice quickly from the Local or Remote modes The Emergency Off function terminates the G9 ASD output and stops the motor in accordance with the setting of F603 3 Resets active Faults if pressed twice quickly The source of the Fault must be determined and corrected before normal ASD operation can resume LED LCD Screen The LED Screen is used to display the output frequency active alarms and or active faults or Off If there are no active alarms or faults the output frequency is displayed During an active alarm the display toggles to and from the running frequency and the active alarm During an active fault the fault is displayed Loss of the ST to CC connection flashes Off G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual LCD Screen The LCD Screen is the primary user input output information center Parameter settings may be viewed or changed using the LCD Screen module of the EOI To view or change a parameter setting using the LCD Screen press the Mode key until the Program menu is displayed Turn the Rotary Encoder until the desired Primary Menu item see pg 46 is within the cursor block Press the Rotary Encode
59. Maintenance Precautions 9 Option V I Terminal Voltage Current Selection 88 Optional Devices 270 Options 270 OT 247 252 OUT Terminal 192 OUT 21 23 Out Out2 FL 45 OUT1 OUT2 Output 25 OUT2 21 23 Output Current 43 Output Disconnect 8 Output Function Assigned 214 216 217 221 223 224 225 Output Phase Failure 249 Output Phase Failure Detection 183 Output Power 44 Output Terminal 1 OUT 1 Function 92 Output Terminal 10 R3 Function 97 Output Terminal 11 R4 Function 97 Output Terminal 2 OUT2 Function 92 Output Terminal 3 FL Function 93 Output Terminal 4 OUT3 Function 93 Output Terminal 5 OUT4 Function 93 Output Terminal 6 R1 Function 94 Output Terminal 7 OUTS Function 94 Output Terminal 8 OUT6 Function 94 Output Terminal 9 R2 Function 95 Output Terminals 49 Output Voltage 43 Over Current 246 Over Current During Acceleration 250 Over Current During Deceleration 251 Over Current During Run 251 Over Current Protection 13 Over Heat 246 251 Over Heat During Acceleration 250 Over Heat During Deceleration 251 Over Heat During Run 251 Overload 52 53 Overload Protection 10 Overload Reduction Starting Frequency 184 Override Control 61 Override mode 38 Override Operation 38 Over Speed Detection Frequency Lower Band 187 Over Speed Detection Frequency Upper Band 187 Over Torque 247 252 G9 ASD Installation and Operation M
60. Normal Avg value as selected at parameter F970 Select the Monitor Display Input Setting number from Table 10 on pg 241 to output the corresponding function Use the Communication Number if operating using communications See the My Function Instruction Manual P N E6581335 for a complete description of the setup requirements and operational information of the Monitor Output Function parameter 228 F969 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 2000 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F970 F972 Monitor Output Function Command 31 Program gt My Function My Function Monitor This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by allowing the user to select the Peak Minimum or Normal Avg value of the parameter F969 selection to be recorded and output as a monitored function See the My Function Instruction Manual P N E6581335 for a complete description of the setup requirements and operational information of the Monitor Output Function parameter Settings 0 Normal 1 Peak 2 Minimum F970 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default Normal Changeable During Run Yes Monitor Output Function 41 Program My Function gt My Function Monitor This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by establishing the function that is to
61. Number Comm Number Trace Monitor Function Resolution Unit 0 FD00 Output Frequency 0 01 Hz 1 FDO02 Frequency Reference 0 01 Hz 2 FD03 Output Current 0 01 3 FD04 DC Bus Voltage 0 01 4 FD05 Output Voltage 0 01 5 FD15 Compensated Frequency 0 01 Hz 6 FD16 Speed Feedback Realtime 0 01 Hz 7 FD17 Speed Feedback 1 Sec Filter 0 01 Hz 8 FD18 Torque 0 01 9 FD19 Torque Command 0 01 11 FD20 Torque Current 0 01 12 FD21 Excitation Current 0 01 13 FD22 PID Feedback Value 0 01 Hz 14 FD23 Motor Overload Ratio 0 01 15 FD24 ASD Overload Ratio 0 01 16 FD25 DBR Overload Ratio 1 17 FD28 DBR Load Ratio 1 18 FD29 Input Power 0 01 kW 19 FD30 Output Power 0 01 kW 23 FE39 V I Option AI2 1 24 FE35 RR Input 0 01 25 FE36 VIII V D Input 0 01 26 FE37 RX Input 0 01 27 FE38 RX2 Option AI1 1 28 FE40 FM Output 0 01 29 FE41 AM Output 0 01 30 FE51 Signed 100 Meter Adjust Value 1 31 FA51 Communication Data N A 32 FE50 Signed 185 Meter Adjust Value 1 33 FE67 Signed 250 Meter Adjust Value 1 34 FE76 Input Watt Hour 0 01 kWh 35 FE77 Output Watt Hour 0 01 kWh 45 0006 0671 FM AM Gain Display 1 46 FE60 My Function Monitor 1 Unsigned Value 1 47 FE61 My Function Monitor 2 Unsigned Value 1 48 FE62 My Function Monitor 3 Signed Value 1 49 FE63 My Function Monitor 4 Signed Value 1 240 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Table 10 Input Function Target selections and the associated Communications Number
62. Operation Manual General Safety Information DO NOT attempt to install operate maintain or dispose of this equipment until you have read and understood all of the product safety information and directions contained in this manual Safety Alert Symbol The Safety Alert Symbol is comprised of an equilateral triangle enclosing an exclamation mark This indicates that a potential personal injury hazard exists A Signal Words Listed below are the signal words that are used throughout this manual followed by their descriptions and associated symbols When the words DANGER WARNING and CAUTION are used in this manual they will be followed by important safety information that must be carefully adhered to The word DANGER preceded by the safety alert symbol indicates that an imminently hazardous situation exists that if not avoided will result in serious injury to personnel or loss of life DANGER The word WARNING preceded by the safety alert symbol indicates that a potentially hazardous situation exists that if not avoided could result in serious injury to personnel or loss of life A WARNING The word CAUTION preceded by the safety alert symbol indicates that a potentially hazardous situation exists that if not avoided may result in minor or moderate injury A CAUTION The word CAUTION without the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation exists that if not avoided may result in equipment and pro
63. Output ic o F197 g EOI may be set to display Fal or Volts 701 gt Fm5 4 S EDI Display Q 50 or 100 Volts 5 aS Volt ASD Output F193 F191 F190 F192 F194 F196 F198 utput Frequency Direct Access Number F191 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 0 Maximum 100 0 Units V or F701 Vif 5 Point Setting Frequency 2 Program gt Special gt V f 5 Point Setting The V f 5 Point Setting Frequency 2 sets the frequency to be associated with the voltage setting of parameter F193 V f 5 Point Setting Voltage 2 See F190 and F191 for additional information on this setting 102 Direct Access Number F192 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F193 F197 Vif 5 Point Setting Voltage 2 Program gt Special gt V f 5 Point Setting The V f 5 Point Setting Voltage 2 establishes the output voltage level that is to be associated with the frequency setting of F192 V f 5 Point Setting Frequency 2 The F701 parameter setting will determine if the selection for this parameter appears in the form of a Voltage V or as a Percentage of the ASD rating The default setting is See F190 and F191 for additional information on this setting F193 Parameter Type N
64. Over Voltage DC bus voltage exceeds ASD attempting to start into a spinning motor after a specifications momentary power loss Incoming utility power is above the specified range Decel time is too short Voltage spikes at the 3 phase input install inductive filter DBR required DBR resistance value is too high DBR function is turned off Over Voltage Stall feature is turned off System is regenerating Load instability Disable the Ridethrough function F302 OT Over Torque Torque requirement in excess of ASD is not correctly matched to the application the setting of BIS or Fal fora pele or F617 setting is too low time longer than the setting of F618 Obstructed load POFF Control Under voltage condition at the 5 Defective Control board Under Voltage 15 or the 24 VDC supply Excessive load on power supply Low input voltage PtSt Reference Point Two speed reference frequency Two speed reference frequency setpoints are too close to setpoint values are too close to each other increase the difference each other UC Under Current With the Low Current Trip F610 parameter enabled the output current of the ASD is below the level defined at F611 and remains there for a time longer than the setting of F612 Reset ignored if active G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 247 Trips Faults A Trip is a ASD response to a Fault though Fault and Trip are sometimes used interchangeably A Tr
65. Over Voltage During Deceleration time is too short Degeleranon DBR value is too high DBR required DBR setup required Stall protection is disabled 3 phase input voltage is out of specification Input reactance required OP3 Over Voltage During Run Load fluctuations 3 Phase input voltage out of specification DBR required DBR setup required OT Over Torque A torque requirement by the load in excess of the setting of F616 or F617 for a time longer than the setting of F618 The ASD is improperly matched to the application The load is obstructed SOUT Step Out Motor shaft is locked for PM Motor Only Output phase is open Operating a reciprocating load UPI Main Power Input 3 phase voltage is too low Under Voltage Momentary power failure longer than the time setting of F628 UP2 Control Power This fault is caused by an under voltage condition at the 5 15 or the 24 VDC Under Voltage supply Loss of the SU voltage while operating in the Backup Power mode 3 phase input voltage low 252 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Viewing Trip Information In the event that the condition causing an Alarm does not return to the normal operating level within a specified time the ASD Faults and a Trip is incurred When a trip occurs the resultant error information may be viewed either from the LED Screen LCD Fault screen Table 14 on pg 248 Monitor screen or the Trip History screen Program gt Utilities gt Trip History Tr
66. Program Terminal gt Input Terminals Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Unassigned This parameter is used to set the functionality of the Virtual Input Terminal 3 As a virtual terminal it exists only in memory and is considered to always be in its True connected to CC state Changeable During Run No It is often practical to assign a function to this terminal that the user desires to be maintained regardless of external conditions or operations This parameter sets the programmable Virtual Input Terminal 3 terminal to one of the functions listed in Table 5 on pg 234 In addition the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed Virtual Input Terminal 4 Selection Direct Access Number F976 Program gt Terminal gt Input Terminals Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Unassigned This parameter is used to set the functionality of the Virtual Input Terminal 4 As a virtual terminal it exists only in memory and is considered to always be in its True connected to CC state Changeable During Run No It is often practical to assign a function to this terminal that the user desires to be maintained regardless of external conditions or operations This parameter sets the programmable Virtual Input Terminal 4 terminal to one of the functions listed in Table 5 on pg 234 In addition the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Cl
67. Program gt Torque Setpoints This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX input terminal when the RX terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Torque Control mode Torque Control is accomplished by establishing an associated V f output pattern for a given RX input level This parameter sets RX Input Point 2 Rate and is the output torque value that is associated with the setting of RX Input Point 2 Setting when operating in the Torque Control mode This value is entered as 250 to 250 of the rated torque See RX Input Point 1 Rate F220 for more information on this setting G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F221 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 250 00 Maximum 250 00 Units 115 F222 F222 RX2 Al1 Input Point 1 Setting Program gt Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX2 AI1 input terminal when the RX2 AI1 terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode or the Torque Control mode Note The Expansion IO Card Option 1 option board P N ETB003Z is required to use this terminal This parameter sets the RX2 AI1 input level that is associated with RX2 AI1 Input Point 1 Frequency when operating in the Speed Control mode or is associated with the RX2 AI1 Input Point 1 Rate whe
68. Proportional Select the Monitor Display Input Setting number from Table 10 on pg 241 to output the corresponding function Use the Communication Number if operating using communications See the My Function Instruction Manual P N E6581335 for a complete description of the setup requirements and operational information of the Monitor Output Function parameter F965 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 2000 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Monitor Output Function Command 11 Program gt My Function gt My Function Monitor This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by allowing the user to select the Peak Minimum or Normal Avg value of the parameter F965 selection to be recorded and output as a monitored function Settings 0 Normal 1 Peak 2 Minimum See the My Function Instruction Manual P N E6581335 for a complete description of the setup requirements and operational information of the Monitor Output Function parameter G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F966 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default Normal Changeable During Run Yes 227 F967 F969 Monitor Output Function 21 Program gt My Function gt My Function Monitor This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by establishing the function that is to be recorded and output as the P
69. Run from the Terminal Board perform the following 1 2 126 Using the setup above set the Input Terminal Priority F106 function from step 6 to Enable to receive Jog commands from the Terminal Board using the Jog Run terminal without regard to the Local Remote setting Use the Jog Run terminal of step 3 above to activate the Jog function G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F261 F262 Jog Stop Pattern Program gt Frequency gt Jog Settings This parameter sets the stopping method used while operating in the Jog mode Note This parameter setting is used for the Jog operation only The Emergency Off stopping method setting of parameter F603 has priority over this setting and changes made here do not affect the function or setting of parameter F603 Settings 0 Deceleration Stop 1 Coast Stop 2 DC Injection Braking Stop Direct Access Number F261 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Deceleration Stop Changeable During Run Yes Panel Operation Jog Mode Program gt Frequency gt Jog Settings This parameter enables the Jog command to be received from the EOI When disabled the Jog command received from the EOI is ignored Jog commands may also be received from the Terminal Board Priority as to which is allowed to override the other is selected at F106 The priority selection at F106 enables the selected source for Jog control and disables the other
70. See Table 8 on pg 239 for a complete listing of available settings 5 Set Input Function Target 2 F902 to 1026 Low Current Alarm See Table 8 on pg 239 for a complete listing of available settings 6 Set Input Function Command 1 F901 to AND 3 This setting assigns an operator to the Input Function Target 1 and the Input Function Target 2 settings 7 Set Output Function Assigned F905 to 1222 This setting will transfer the results of the logical AND to My Function Output 1 OUT1 8 Enable the My Function parameter at F977 by selecting My Function Always On With the aforementioned setup completed in the example once the Low Speed Signal AND the Low Current Alarm are active the OUT1 terminal is activated for the duration of the Low Speed Low Current condition See the My Function Instruction Manual P N E6581335 for a complete description of the setup requirements and operational information of the My Function parameter 232 F977 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default None Disabled Direct Access Number Changeable During Run No DANGER This parameter must always be set to None at the start of the My Function setup and remain set to None until all of the My Function parameter settings have been confirmed as being correct If enabled for normal operation using settings 1 or 2 the motor may start and engage the driven equipment unexpectedly upon receiving a Run signal during
71. Series Identifier t If all characters are numbers then this value is divided by 10 Voltage Family 1 If the last character is K 2 230 Volt Class then the preceding two digits 4 460 Volt Class are multiplied by 10 Note The Type 1 enclosed versions of these drives meet or exceed the specification UL 50 1995 the Standard for Heating and Cooling Equipment and complies with the applicable requirements for installation in a compartment handling conditioned air Note All Toshiba ASD enclosures carry an IP20 rating 254 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Enclosure Dimensions Table 16 230 Volt G9 ASD Systems Mounting Hole Dimensions A B c Model Number Enclosure a F in mm Conduit Plate hrame VT130G9U Figure Number Pisa Gees anaes Figure Number D E R1 R2 2010 2 2015 5 2 132 11 2 285 6 1 155 8 7 220 4 5 114 2025 0 217 5 5 Figure 34 A 0 098 2 5 2035 3 6 1 155 12 4 315 9 8 249 5 4 138 2055 Figure 31 6 6 168 4 2080 6 9 175 15 0 381 6 2 158 0 236 6 0 Figure 34 B 11 1 283 5A 2110 8 3 211 15 1 384 7 5 190 Figure 34 C 2160 7 6 193 0 118 3 0 0 276 7 0 5B 9 1 231 19 3 490 15 2 386 8 3 210 Figure 34 D 2220 6 2270 Figure 32 11 1 283 25 9 658 13 2 335 25 0 635 8 0 203 0 188 4 8 0 375 9 5 Figure 34 E 2330 2400 7B Figure 32 14 3 363 33 1 841 15 0 3
72. Speed Control Perform the following setup to allow the system to perform Speed control from the BIN input terminals Set BIN Input Point 1 Frequency F229 Set the BIN input value of 255p F228 that represents BIN Input Point 1 Frequency Set BIN Input Point 2 Frequency F231 Set the BIN input value of 255p F230 that represents BIN Input Point 2 Frequency Provide a Run command F and or R Note 255 pis the decimal equivalent of the 8 bit BIN byte with all input terminals set to 1 255 decimal 11111111 binary Once set as the BIN input signal changes are transferred to the control board the output frequency of the ASD will vary in accordance with the above settings This parameter sets BIN Input Point 1 Setting and is entered as 0 to 100 of the of the range represented by the BIN binary input byte 11111111 255p or the binary bit s 0 MSB 120 Direct Access Number F228 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Units Frequency Settings G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F229 F231 BIN Input Point 1 Frequency Program gt Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints This parameter is used to set the speed of the BIN input terminals when the BIN terminals are used as the control input This parameter sets BIN Input Point 1 Frequency and is the frequency that is associated with the setting
73. Sub Menu Parameter Name eae STARUP WIZARD See the section titled Initial Setup on pg 70 for Startup Wizard Requirements FUNDAMENTAL Automatic Acceleration Deceleration F000 Acceleration Time 1 F009 Deceleration Time 1 F010 Acceleration Deceleration Suspended Function F349 Accel Decel 1 Settings Acceleration Suspend Frequency F350 Acceleration Suspend Time F351 Deceleration Suspend Frequency F332 Deceleration Suspend Time F353 Maximum Frequency F011 Upper Limit Frequency F012 Frequency Settings Lower Limit Frequency F013 V f Pattern F015 Time Limit for Lower Limit Frequency Operation F256 Automatic Torque Boost F001 Base Frequency 1 F014 Motor Set 1 Manual Torque Boost 1 F016 Motor Overload Protection Level 1 F600 Command Mode F003 Frequency Mode 1 F004 Standard Mode Forward Reverse Run F008 Selection Frequency Priority F200 Frequency Mode 2 F207 Frequency Mode Priority Switching Frequency F208 TERMINAL Analog Output FM Output Terminal Function F005 Terminals FM Output Terminal Adjustment F006 46 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Program Mode Menu Navigation Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name anand TERMINAL FM Output Gradient Characteristic F682 FM Bias Adjustment F683 FM Voltage Current Output Switching F681 AM Output Terminal Function F670 AM Output Terminal Adjustment F671 AM Output Gradient Character
74. Sync with Accel Decel Changeable During Run Yes Power Running Stall Continuous Trip Detection Time Program gt Protection gt Stall This parameter is used to extend the Over Voltage Stall F305 and the Over Current Stall F017 time settings G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F452 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 1 0 Units Seconds 159 F453 F463 Stall Prevention During Regeneration Program gt Protection gt Stall This function of this parameter is to disable the Over Voltage Stall F305 and the Over Current Stall F017 function during regeneration only Application specific conditions may occur that warrant disabling the Stall function during regeneration Settings 0 Disabled Stall During Regenerative Braking 1 Enabled No Stall During Regenerative Braking F453 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Enabled Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Current Control Proportional Gain Program gt Feedback gt PG Settings This parameter sets the sensitivity of the drive when monitoring the output current to control speed The larger the value entered here the more sensitive the drive is to changes in the received feedback F458 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD Dependent Direct Access Number
75. The F106 setting overrides this parameter setting Settings 0 Disabled 1 Enabled G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F262 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run Yes 127 F264 F264 UP DOWN Frequency up Response Time No Path Direct Access Only This parameter functions in conjunction with the parameter settings of F265 F266 F267 F268 and F269 The purpose of these settings is to setup the ASD to allow an externally supplied discrete input signal to control the output frequency of the ASD This method uses the discrete input terminal settings UP DOWN Frequency up and UP DOWN Frequency down to change the ASD speed Activation of either terminal increases or decreases the output frequency at the Accel 1 or Decel 1 rates respectively Depending on the Delay setting the UP DOWN Frequency up down terminal may perform 1 the increase decrease function for the duration of activation or 2 the UP DOWN Frequency up down terminal may act as a momentary contact that loads a new commanded frequency upon activation In either case to activate and hold will continue the up or down function until reaching the Upper Limit Frequency or the Lower Limit Frequency respectively At which point further activation will be ignored See Figure 29 on pg 130 for more information on the UP DOWN Frequency function Setup Requirements F0
76. The availability of the Local mode of operation may be reinstated by changing this setting or performing a Reset see F007 ESC Key Returns the system to the previous level of the menu tree toggles between the EOI Command screen and the Frequency Command screen or cancels changes made to a field if pressed while still in the reverse video mode dark background light text The three functions are menu specific Run Key Issues the Run command while in the Local mode The Run key LED illuminates green while stopped or red while running to alert personnel Mode Key Provides a means to access the three root menus Pressing the Mode Key key repeatedly loops the system through the three root menus see Figure 27 on pg 41 While looping through the root menus the Program menu will display the root menu screen or the Program sub menu item being accessed prior to pressing the Mode key G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 29 30 LED LCD Screen Information LED Character Font i LED LCD LED LCD Information z 7 Characters displayed on the LED Screen will be i b E 2 of the seven segment format Not all alpha C 5 3 numeric characters are used with the LED a Screen j d 4 A Listed are the seven segment characters used on E 7 2 the LED Screen along with the same characters r F B 6 as they are displayed on the LCD Screen r G 3 7 H H E 8 LCD Font Information i l 4 9 All alpha numeric characters are used T 0 Stop Reset
77. This value is entered as 0 to 100 of the V I input signal range F633 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 Disabled Direct Access Number Changeable During Run No Minimum 1 Maximum 100 Units Annual Average Ambient Temperature Program gt Special gt Special Parameters This parameter is used in conjunction with a discrete output terminal setting to notify the operator of the remaining useful life of critical components of the ASD system With a discrete output terminal set to Part Replacement Alarm see Table 8 on pg 239 and the calculation derived from the parameter setting maintenance scheduling may be enhanced Settings 1 Under 10 C 50 F 2 Under 20 C 68 F 3 Under 30 C 86 F 4 Under 40 C 104 F 5 Under 50 C 122 F 6 Under 60 C 140 F F634 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Under 30 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run No Rush Relay Current Activation Time Program gt Special gt Special Parameters gt Rush Relay Current Activation Time At system startup this parameter sets a time delay for the start of the Rush Relay activation in an attempt to allow the DC bus voltage to reach the normal operating level before outputting a signal to the motor F635 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run
78. a preset level Drooping can decrease or increase the V f setting of a motor to maintain a balance between the output torque levels of mechanically coupled motors Because of variances in gearboxes sheaves belts motors and since the speed of the motor is constrained by the mechanical system one motor may experience more load than its counterpart and may become overloaded Drooping Control allows the overloaded motor to slow down thus shedding load and encouraging a lightly loaded motor to pick up the slack The goal of Drooping Control is to have the same torque ratios for mechanically coupled motors F320 Parameter Type Numerical Direct Access Number Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 100 0 Units Speed at 0 Drooping Gain Program gt Feedback gt Drooping Control This parameter sets the motor speed when at the 0 output torque gain while operating in the Drooping Control mode This function determines the lowest speed that Drooping will be in effect for motors that share the same load F321 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 320 0 Units Hz Speed at F320 Drooping Gain Program gt Feedback gt Drooping Control This parameter sets the motor speed when at the 100 output torque gain while operating in the Drooping Control mode T
79. addition this output terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This setting assigns the function of the programmable R2 terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 8 on pg 239 Note The Expansion IO Card Option 2 option board P N ETB004Z is required to use this terminal See the Expansion IO Card Option 2 Instruction Manual P N 58686 for more information on the function of this terminal F138 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default Always Off Changeable During Run No Input Terminal 1 F Response Time Program gt Terminal gt Input Terminal Delays This parameter delays the response of the ASD to any change in the F terminal input by the programmed value Input Ternir Delay Time Input Termi The delay may be increased to provide additional electrical noise immunity or to prevent the ASD from responding to contact bounce or chatter Direct Access Number F140 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 8 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 2 0 Maximum 200 0 Units mS Input Terminal 2 R Response Time Program gt Terminal gt Input Terminal Delays This parameter delays the response of the drive to any change in the R terminal input by the programmed value see waveforms at F140 The delay may be increased to provide additional electrical noise immunity or to prevent
80. and Operation Manual F040 F040 Automatic Function Selection Program gt Utilities gt Display Parameters This parameter setting is used to configure multiple parameters with the setting of only one parameter From the selection below multiple parameters may be set as indicated in the table Once set the selected configuration is placed in effect and remains in effect until this parameter is changed or the individual settings are changed Set this parameter to Disable to set these parameters individually Note After performing the desired selection the EOI display returns to Disabled though the selected function has been carried out i e without this if selection 1 is performed F004 and F207 would hold the RR terminal setting regardless of attempts to change the settings individually Settings 0 Disabled 1 RR 2 VIM V D 3 RR or V I Switched via Terminal Board 4 Keypad Frequency Terminal Board Command 5 Keypad Frequency and Command User Settings 4 Keypad E EEA 5 CMD TB a Command Termina Terminal Mode N C Keypad F003 1 Board Board Frequency Mode 1 RR N C RR N C RR Keypad F004 S3 Terminal Preset eas N C Ref N C F117 Speed 3 sete Priority Freq Priority n N C Terminal Board F200 v I Setup 0 0 N C 20 0 N C F201 Frequency Mode 2 V I N C RR V I Keypad F207 Note Go to F003 and or F004 a
81. and the 40 HP to 60 HP 460 volt 30 HP to 100 HP The value may be set to Large default RECTIFIER CIRCUIT setting or Small by pushing or pulling the switch actuator respectively Figure 6 The Grounding Capacitor Bar is used on typeforms 230 volt 75 HP and the 100 HP 460 volt 125 HP and the 150 HP The value may be set to Large or Small default setting by connecting or disconnecting the switching bar respectively Figure 7 The Grounding Capacitor RECTIFIER CIRCUIT Screw is used on typeforms 460 volt 175 HP and above The value may be set to Large or Small default setting by placing the screw in the A position or by placing RECTIFIER CIRCUIT the screw in the B position respectively G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 20 Lead Length Specifications Adhere to the NEC and any local codes during the installation of ASD motor systems Excessive lead lengths may adversely effect the performance of the motor Special cables are not required Lead lengths from the ASD to the motor in excess of those listed in Table 1 may require filters to be added to the output of the ASD Table 1 lists the suggested maximum lead lengths for the
82. and the four 7 32 screw holes Cut the 3 80 by 3 56 rectangular hole Drill the four 7 32 screw holes eS Attach and secure the EOI to the front side of the mounting location using the four 6 32 x 5 16 pan head screws the 6 split lock washers and the 6 flat washers 5 Connect the extension cable Keypad Mounting Dimensions Figure 25 Keypad Mounting Dimensions 3 72 _ ae 4 l f l Rear side Hole 3 34 3 56 RUN STOP RESET 1 i O T O U J 3 80 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Keypad Remote Mounting Using the ASD MTG KIT Note See Figure 26 for the dimensions and the item locations referenced in steps 1 through 6 1 At the keypad mounting location mark the 4 60 by 4 50 hole and the four 11 32 screw holes 2 Cut the 4 60 by 4 50 rectangular hole 3 Drill the four 11 32 holes for the Bezel Plate mount 4 Attach and secure the Bezel Plate to the front side of the mounting location using the four 10 32 hex nuts 10 split lock washers and the 10 flat washers 5 Attach and secure the keypad to the front side of the Bezel Plate using the four 6 32 x 5 16 pan head screws 6 split lock washers and the 6 flat washers 6 Connect the extension cable Keypad ASD MTG KIT Mounting Dimensions Figure
83. as Normally Open or Normally Closed See the 16 bit BIN BCD Option Instruction Manual option for more information on the function of this terminal G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F169 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default OFF Direct Access Number Changeable During Run No 97 F170 F173 Base Frequency 2 Program gt Motor gt Motor Set 2 The Base Frequency 2 setting is the frequency at which the output voltage of the ASD reaches its maximum setting The Base Frequency Voltage 2 parameter is set at F171 This parameter is used only when the parameters for Motor Set 2 are configured and selected Motor Set 2 may be selected by a properly configured input terminal see Table 5 on pg 234 For proper motor operation the Base Frequency should be set for the nameplated frequency of the motor F170 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 60 0 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 25 0 Maximum 299 0 Units Hz Base Frequency Voltage 2 Program gt Motor gt Motor Set 2 The Base Frequency Voltage 2 setting is the Motor 2 output voltage at the Base Frequency F170 Regardless of the programmed value the output voltage cannot be higher than the input voltage The actual output voltage will be influenced by the input voltage of the ASD and the Supply Voltage Compensation setting F307 This parameter is used only wh
84. control respectively G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 37 Any or all of the Command and Frequency control input sources may be placed in the Override mode Placing the ASD in the Local mode Local Remote LED on via the EOI places the RS485 2 wire control selection in the Override mode for Command and Frequency input see the section titled Override Operation on pg 38 for the proper setting The Local Remote control Override feature for Command and Frequency or either may be enabled disabled at Program gt Utilities gt Prohibition Local Remote Key Command or Frequency Override Communications may be used to place the remaining Command and eligible Frequency control input sources in the Override mode Once placed in the Override mode this setting is valid until it is cancelled the power supply is turned off or the ASD is reset Override Operation The signal sources of Table 3 are scanned from left to right in the order that they are listed to determine which input sources are in the Override mode active Command or Frequency command present The first item detected as having the Override function turned on is the selection that is used for Command or Frequency control input The Override control setting supersedes the setting of the Command mode setting F003 and the Frequency mode setting F004 However the F003 and F004 settings will be used in the event that the register scan returns the condition that none of the
85. control circuits e DONOT connect CC to earth ground e Use IICC terminal as the return for the VI II V D input e Always ground the unit to prevent electrical shock and to help reduce electrical noise e It is the responsibility of the ASD Installer Maintenance personnel to provide proper grounding and branch circuit protection in accordance with the 2008 NEC and any applicable local codes The Metal Of Conduit Is Not An Acceptable Ground Grounding Capacitor Switch The ASD is equipped with noise reduction capacitors which are used to reduce the EMI leakage via the 3 phase power input circuit and for compliance with the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive EMC The effective value of the capacitor may be increased reduced or removed entirely via the Selector Switch Switching Bar or the Switching Screw the type used is typeform specific The Grounding Capacitor Switch allows the user to quickly change the value of the leakage reduction capacitance of the 3 phase input circuit without the use of tools See the section titled System Grounding on pg 18 for more on the Grounding Capacitor See figures 4 5 6 and 7 on pg 19 for an electrical depiction of the leakage reduction functionality of the Grounding Capacitor and the methods used to set the capacitance value G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 5 Power Connections A DANGER A Contact With Energized Wiring Will Cause Severe Injury Or Loss O
86. gt Feedback Settings This parameter is used to limit the rate that the output of the ASD may increase for a given difference in the speed reference and the PID feedback value F372 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 10 0 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum 600 0 Units Seconds Process Decreasing Rate Program gt Feedback gt Feedback Settings This parameter is used to limit the rate that the output of the ASD may decrease for a given difference in the speed reference and the PID feedback value F373 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 10 0 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum 600 0 Units Seconds Number of PG Input Pulses Program gt Feedback gt PG Settings This parameter is used to set the number of pulses output from a shaft mounted encoder that is used to indicate one revolution of rotation 360 of the motor or of the motor driven equipment Number of PG Input Phases Program gt Feedback gt PG Settings This parameter determines the type of information that is supplied by the phase encoder Settings 1 Single Phase 2 Two Phase 150 F375 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD Dependent Direct Access Number Changeable During Run No Minimum 12 Maximum 9999 F376 Parameter Type Selection List F
87. gt Pattern Run gt Speeds This parameter allows the user to select 1 of 15 configured Preset Speeds as the number 2 Selection to be included in Pattern Group 1 Skip may be selected to ignore this Selection Setting 0 Skip 1 15 Preset Speed Number See F523 for more information on this parameter Direct Access Number F524 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Skip Changeable During Run No Pattern Group 1 Selection 3 Program gt Pattern Run gt Speeds This parameter allows the user to select 1 of 15 configured Preset Speeds as the number 3 Selection to be included in Pattern Group 1 Skip may be selected to ignore this Selection Setting 0 Skip 1 15 Preset Speed Number See F523 for more information on this parameter Direct Access Number F525 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Skip Changeable During Run No Pattern Group 1 Selection 4 Program gt Pattern Run gt Speeds This parameter allows the user to select 1 of 15 configured Preset Speeds as the number 4 Selection to be included in Pattern Group 1 Skip may be selected to ignore this Selection Setting 0 Skip 1 15 Preset Speed Number See F523 for more information on this parameter Direct Access Number F526 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Skip Changeable During Run No Pattern Group 1 Selection 5 Program gt Pattern Run gt Speeds This paramet
88. in the Override mode Possible Frequency control source selections include the following e Communication Board e RS485 EOI Keypad e Terminal Block the default setting or e F004 setting used if no other items are in the Override mode Note The Terminal Board is placed in the Override mode for Speed control functions by assigning a discrete terminal to V I Terminal Priority and connecting the terminal to CC Once the discrete terminal is activated V I is used as the Terminal Board Override control item Command and Frequency Control Selections The user may select only one Command source and only one source for Frequency control The default settings for Command and Frequency control are Terminal Block and RR respectively The ASD has a command register for each item listed as a Command or Frequency source The registers store the Override setting for each control source The registers are continuously scanned to determine if any of the listed items are in the Override mode For each scan cycle the command registers of the control sources are scanned for the Override setting in the order that they are listed in Table 3 The first item of the Command section and the first item of the Frequency section detected as being in the Override mode will be used for Command and Frequency control respectively If no items are detected as being in the Override mode the settings of F003 and F004 will be used for Command and Frequency
89. is disconnected ASD Operation at Disconnect Program gt Communications Communication Settings This parameter is used to set the G9 ASD action to be carried out in the event of the loss of communications Settings 0 Stop and Terminate Communication 1 Do Nothing Continue Programmed Operation 2 Deceleration Stop 3 Coast Stop 4 Emergency Off 5 Preset Speed Setting of F852 F850 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 100 0 Units Seconds F851 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default Stop Communication Release Changeable During Run Yes Preset Speed Operation Selection Program Communications Communication Settings This parameter is used in conjunction with parameter F806 This parameter setting is used to set the Preset Speed selection to be used if Preset Speed is selected at parameter F851 Settings 0 Disabled 1 15 Preset Speed Number F852 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 Disabled Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Communications Option Station Address Monitor Program gt Communications Communication Settings This parameter is used in the setup of the communications network by reading the Media Access Code MAC address of the ASD that is co
90. listed items have the Override feature turned on or a discrete input terminal is set to Serial Local Switch and is activated Command and Frequency Control Override Hierarchy Table 3 lists the input conditions and the resulting output control source selections for Command and Frequency control Override operation The ASD software reads the memory locations of the listed control sources from the left to the right The first item to be read that has the Override feature turned on will be used for Command or Frequency control Table 3 Command and Frequency Control Hierarchy 1 2 3 4 5 6 Priority Level Forced F003 F004 by VP Comm EOI Terminal Board Command Terminal Board omen Keypad Binary BCD Input FOO3 F004 Frequency Mode Assign to Serial y q y Local Switch 1 X X X X X F003 F004 Setting 0 1 X X X X Communication Board 0 0 1 X X X RS485 0 0 0 1 X X EOI Keypad 0 0 0 0 1 X Terminal Board 0 0 0 0 0 E003 E004 F003 F004 Setting Setting Note I Override feature is turned on for that control input source 0 Override Off X Don t Care 38 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Command Control Selections The following is a listing with descriptions of the Command Mode F003 selections Program gt 01 06 Fundamental gt Standard Mode Selection gt Command Standard Mode Selection Mode Selection F003 Command Mode Settings Selection 0 Termin
91. more information on this parameter setting G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F743 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default Freq Reference Changeable During Run Yes 201 F744 F801 Trace Data 3 Program gt Utilities gt Trace Data 3 This parameter is used to select the Trace Data 3 item from Table 9 on pg 240 to be read and stored in accordance with the setup of parameters F740 and F741 See F740 for more information on this parameter setting F744 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default Output Current Changeable During Run Yes Trace Data 4 Program gt Utilities gt Trace Data 4 This parameter is used to select the Trace Data 4 item from Table 9 on pg 240 to be read and stored in accordance with the setup of parameters F740 and F741 See F740 for more information on this parameter setting F745 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default DC Voltage Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes RS485 2 Wire Baud Rate Program gt Communications Communication Settings This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by establishing the Baud Rate of the communications link The communications network includes other ASDs and Host Control computers that monitor the status of the ASD s transfers commands and loads or modifies the parameter set
92. of 15 configured Preset Speeds as the number 5 selection to be included in the Group 2 Selection Skip may be selected to ignore this Selection Setting 0 Skip 1 15 Preset Speed Number See F523 for more information on this parameter Direct Access Number F536 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Skip Changeable During Run No Pattern Group 2 Selection 6 Program gt Pattern Run gt Speeds This parameter allows the user to select 1 of 15 configured Preset Speeds as the number 6 selection to be included in the Group 2 Selection Skip may be selected to ignore this Selection Setting 0 Skip 1 15 Preset Speed Number See F523 for more information on this parameter Direct Access Number F537 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Skip Changeable During Run No Pattern Group 2 Selection 7 Program gt Pattern Run gt Speeds This parameter allows the user to select 1 of 15 configured Preset Speeds as the number 7 selection to be included in the Group 2 Selection Skip may be selected to ignore this Selection Setting 0 Skip 1 15 Preset Speed Number See F523 for more information on this parameter Direct Access Number F538 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Skip Changeable During Run No Pattern Group 2 Selection 8 Program gt Pattern Run gt Speeds This parameter allows the user to select 1 of 15 co
93. of BIN Input Point 1 Setting See BIN Input Point 1 Setting F228 for further information on this setting Direct Access Number F229 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz BIN Input Point 2 Setting Program gt Frequency gt Speed Reference Setpoints This parameter is used to set the speed of the BIN input terminals when the BIN terminals are used as the control input This parameter sets the BIN input signal that is associated with BIN Input Point 2 Frequency This value is entered as 0 to 100 of the BIN input signal range See BIN Input Point 1 Setting F228 for further information on this setting Direct Access Number F230 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Units BIN Input Point 2 Frequency Program gt Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints This parameter is used to set the speed of the BIN input terminals when the BIN terminal are used as the control input This parameter sets BIN Input Point 2 Frequency and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of BIN Input Point 2 Setting See BIN Input Point 1 Setting F228 for further information on this setting G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F231 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 60 00 Changeable
94. of the EOI are not saved via the Save User Settings selection Forward Reverse Run Selection Direct Access Number F008 Program Fundamental Standard Mode Selection Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Forward While operating in the Local mode this parameter sets the direction of motor rotation Changeable During Run Yes From the Frequency Command screen press the ESC key At the subsequent EOI Command screen select the Direction field and change the setting Press the Rotary Encoder and the new setting will be in effect This setting will not override parameter F311 Forward Reverse Disable If either direction is disabled via parameter F311 the disabled direction will not be recognized if commanded by the keypad If both directions are disabled via parameter F311 the direction command from the keypad will determine the direction of the motor rotation Settings 0 Forward 1 Reverse 2 Forward EOI Switchable F R 3 Reverse EOI Switchable F R G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 79 F009 F011 Acceleration Time 1 Program gt Fundamental Accel Decel 1 Settings This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the output of the ASD to go from 0 0 Hz to the Maximum Frequency for the 1 Acceleration profile The Accel Decel pattern may be set using F502 The minimum Accel Decel time may be set using F508 An acceleration time shorter than that which the load will
95. of the analog signal of the My Function Percent Data 1 The analog signal is selected using the Input Setting number from Table 8 on pg 239 Once the assigned output value reaches the threshold setting of this parameter the output value is transferred to My Function Out 1 See the My Function Instruction Manual P N E6581335 and F977 for more information on this parameter Direct Access Number F918 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 200 00 Units My Function Percent Data 2 Program gt My Function gt My Function Data This parameter is used to set the trigger threshold level of the analog signal of the My Function Percent Data 2 The analog signal is selected using the Input Setting number from Table 8 on pg 239 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F919 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 200 00 Units 217 F920 F925 My Function Percent Data 3 Program My Function gt My Function Data This parameter is used to set the trigger threshold level of the analog signal of the My Function Percent Data 3 The analog signal is selected using the Input Setting number from Table 8 on pg 239 Direct Access Number F920 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Y
96. off lockout and tag out the main power the control power and instrumentation connections before inspecting or servicing the drive or opening the door of the enclosure Turn off lockout and tag out the main power the control power and instrumentation connections before proceeding to disconnect or connect the power wiring to the equipment e The capacitors of the G9 ASD maintain a residual charge for a period of time after turning off the ASD The required time for each ASD typeform is indicated with a cabinet label and a Charge LED shown for smaller ASDs in Figure 2 on pg 16 LED is located on the front panel of larger ASDs Wait at least the minimum time indicated on the enclosure mounted label and ensure that the Charge LED has gone out before opening the door of the ASD once the ASD power has been turned off Turn the power on only after attaching or closing the front cover and DO NOT remove or open the front cover of the G9 ASD when the power is on e DONOT attempt to disassemble modify or repair the ASD Call your Toshiba Sales Representative for repair information e DO NOT place any objects inside of the ASD e Ifthe ASD should emit smoke or an unusual odor or sound turn off the power immediately e The heat sink and other components may become extremely hot to the touch Allow the unit to cool before coming in contact with these items e Remove power from the ASD during extended periods of non use e The syste
97. or Table 10 on pg 241 See F977 for more information on this parameter Direct Access Number F937 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 Disabled Changeable During Run Yes Input Function Command 2 Program gt My Function gt My Function Unit 4 This parameter is used to assign a user selected logical operator to two user selected Input Function Target variables enable a counter timer function or perform a hold reset function Table 11 on pg 243 lists the available selections Their use and selection requirements are described in an example at F977 Direct Access Number F938 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 NOP Input Function Target 3 Program gt My Function gt My Function Unit 4 This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 3 terminal This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target 3 terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 7 on pg 238 Table 8 on pg 239 or Table 10 on pg 241 See F977 for more information on this parameter Direct Access Number F939 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 Disabled Changeable During Run Yes Output Function Assigned Program My Function gt My Function Unit 4 This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feat
98. output of 100 from the ASD G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F471 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 129 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 255 161 F472 F475 RR Input Bias Program gt Frequency gt Speed Reference Setpoints This parameter is used to fine tune the bias of the RR input terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode or the Torque Control mode This setting may be used to ensure that the zero level of the input source pot pressure transducer flow meter etc is also the zero level setting of the ASD system This is accomplished by setting the input source to zero and adjusting this setting to provide an output of zero from the ASD Direct Access Number F472 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 128 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 255 RR Input Gain Program gt Frequency gt Speed Reference Setpoints This parameter is used to fine tune the gain of the RR input terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode or the Torque Control mode This setting may be used to ensure that the 100 level of the input source pot pressure transducer flow meter etc is also the 100 level setting of the ASD system This is accomplished by setting the input source to 100 and a
99. parameters and quick changes when required To maximize the abilities of your new G9 ASD a working familiarity with this manual will be required This manual has been prepared for the ASD installer user and maintenance personnel This manual may also be used as a reference guide or for training With this in mind use this manual to develop a system familiarity before attempting to install or operate the device Important Notice The instructions contained in this manual are not intended to cover all details or variations in equipment types nor may it provide for every possible contingency concerning the installation operation or maintenance of this equipment Should additional information be required contact your Toshiba Sales Representative The contents of this manual shall not become a part of or modify any prior or existing agreement commitment or relationship The sales contract contains the entire obligation of Toshiba International Corporation The warranty contained in the contract between the parties is the sole warranty of Toshiba International Corporation and any statements contained herein do not create new warranties or modify the existing warranty Any electrical or mechanical modifications to this equipment without prior written consent of Toshiba International Corporation may void all warranties and may void the UL CUL listing or other safety certifications Unauthorized modifications may also result in a safety hazard or
100. setup may be re applied when finished via Program gt Utilities gt Type Reset gt Restore User Settings Note EOI settings are not stored using the Save User Settings or using the Restore User Settings features i e contrast setting voltage current units display gradient characteristics etc G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 75 F000 F001 Direct Access Parameter Information The ASD has the ability to allow the user direct access to the motor control functions There are two ways in which the motor control parameters may be accessed for modification Program gt Applicable Menu Path or Program gt Direct Access gt Applicable Parameter Number Both methods access the parameter via the Program mode Once accessed the parameter may be viewed or changed The Program mode allows the user to develop an application specific motor control profile Motor control functions may be set to accommodate specific power and timing requirements for a given application The configurable parameters of the Program mode that have user accessible Parameter Numbers are listed and described below Note Parameter selections are preceded by the number used to select an item if using communications to write to a parameter location in memory i e F000 0 Manual 1 No Trip on Acc Dec 2 No trip on Acc Only etc Note The setup procedures included within this section may require a Reset before performing the procedure Application specif
101. the Auto Restart function is activated the search time required for the Auto Restart function will be subtracted from the Operation Time setting resulting in a shorter run time F549 Parameter Type Numerical Direct Access Number Factory Default 5 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum 6000 0 Units F520 Setting Speed 11 Operation Time Program gt Pattern Run gt Operation Time This parameter sets the run time for Preset Speed 11 This time is effective when used with Group Speeds and non Group Speeds If the Auto Restart function is activated the search time required for the Auto Restart function will be subtracted from the Operation Time setting resulting in a shorter run time F550 Parameter Type Numerical Direct Access Number Factory Default 5 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum 6000 0 Units F520 Setting Speed 12 Operation Time Program gt Pattern Run gt Operation Time This parameter sets the run time for Preset Speed 12 This time is effective when used with Group Speeds and non Group Speeds If the Auto Restart function is activated the search time required for the Auto Restart function will be subtracted from the Operation Time setting resulting in a shorter run time 178 F551 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 5 0 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimu
102. the Finish box Click Finish to return the system to the Frequency Command screen Voltage and Frequency Rating of the Motor Motors are designed and manufactured to be operated within a specific voltage and frequency range The voltage and frequency specifications for a given motor may be found on the nameplate of the motor Highlight and click the voltage and frequency of the motor being used Upper Limit Frequency This parameter sets the highest frequency that the ASD will accept as a frequency command or frequency setpoint The ASD may output frequencies higher than the Upper Limit Frequency but lower than the Maximum Frequency when operating in the PID Control mode Torque Control mode or the Vector Control modes sensorless or feedback Lower Limit Frequency This parameter sets the lowest frequency that the ASD will accept as a frequency command or frequency setpoint The ASD will output frequencies lower than the Lower Limit Frequency when accelerating to the lower limit or decelerating to a stop Frequencies below the Lower Limit may be output when operating in the PID Control mode Torque Control mode or the Vector Control modes sensorless or feedback Automatic Acceleration Deceleration When Automatic ACC DEC is chosen the ASD adjusts the acceleration and deceleration rates according to the applied load The minimum accel decel time may be set using F508 The motor and the load must be connected prior to selecting Automat
103. the Ridethrough function Note The actual Ridethrough Time is load dependent G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F310 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 2 0 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum 320 0 Units Seconds 137 F311 F317 Forward Run Reverse Run Disable Program gt Frequency Forward Reverse Disable This parameter Enables Disables the Forward Run or Reverse Run mode If either direction is disabled commands received for the disabled direction will not be recognized If both directions are disabled the received direction command will determine the direction of the motor rotation Settings 0 Off 1 Disable Reverse Run 2 Disable Forward Run F311 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Off Direct Access Number Changeable During Run No Random Mode Program gt Protection gt Retry Restart This parameter adjusts the carrier frequency randomly This feature is effective in minimizing the negative effects of mechanical resonance Settings 0 Disabled 1 Enabled F312 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled Direct Access Number Changeable During Run No Carrier Frequency Control Mode Program gt Special gt Carrier Frequency This parameter provides for the automatic decrease of the carrier frequency Select 1 to decre
104. the full range of the RX value 10 to 10 VDC input RX2 Option Al1 Displays the RX2 input setting as a percentage of the full range of the RX2 value Note The RX2 function is available on the Expansion IO Card Option 1 option board P N ETB003Z only Trip Code Displays None if there are no errors or displays one of the associated Fault Codes listed in Table 14 on page 248 if there is an active Fault e g E Emergency Off Past Trip 1 This function records and displays the last trip incurred Subsequent trips will replace Past Trip 1 As trip records are replaced they are shifted to the next level of the Past Trip locations until being deleted i e Past Trip 1 is moved to Past Trip 2 and then to Past Trip 3 until being shifted out of Past Trip 4 Once shifted out of Past Trip 4 the record is deleted If no trips have occurred since the last reset None is displayed for each trip record Past Trip 2 Past trip information or None Past Trip 3 Past trip information or None G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Past Trip 4 Past trip information or None Note An improper ASD setup may cause some trips reset the ASD to the Factory Default settings before pursuing a systemic malfunction Program gt Utilities gt Type Reset gt Reset to Factory Settings Direction Displays the Direction command forward reverse Discrete Input Terminals Displays the status activated reverse v
105. the function of the programmable OUTS terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 8 on pg 239 Note The Expansion IO Card Option 2 option board P N ETB004Z is required to use this terminal See the Expansion IO Card Option 2 Instruction Manual P N 58686 for more information on the function of this terminal Direct Access Number F136 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Always Off Changeable During Run No Output Terminal 8 OUT6 Function Program gt Terminal gt Output Terminals This parameter is used to set the functionality of the OUT6 discrete output terminal In addition this output terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This setting assigns the function of the programmable OUT6 terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 8 on pg 239 Note The Expansion IO Card Option 2 option board P N ETB004Z is required to use this terminal See the Expansion IO Card Option 2 Instruction Manual P N 58686 for more information on the function of this terminal 94 Direct Access Number F137 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Always Off Changeable During Run No G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F138 F142 Output Terminal 9 R2 Function Program gt Terminal gt Output Terminals This parameter is used to set the functionality of the R2 discrete output terminal In
106. to determine the Thermal Overload Protection setting for the motor Motor RPM This parameter is used to input the nameplated rated speed of the motor Command Source This selection allows the user to establish the source of the Run commands Run commands are Run Stop Jog etc Settings Use Terminal Block Use EOI Keypad Use RS485 Use Communication Option Board 72 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Frequency Reference Source This selection allows the user to establish the source of the Frequency command Settings Use VI II V D Use RR Use RX EOI Keypad RS485 Communication Option Board RX2 Option AIl Option V I UP DOWN Frequency Pulse Input Option Pulse Input Motor CPU Binary BCD Input Option Display Unit This parameter sets the unit of measurement for current and voltage values displayed on the EOI Wizard Finish This is the final screen of the Startup Wizard The basic parameters of the ASD have been set Click Finish to return to the Program mode Additional application specific programming may be required Operation Local Note See the section titled EOI Features on pg 29 for information on Remote operation To turn the motor on perform the following 1 Connect the CC terminal to the ST terminal Frequency Command Screen 2 Press the Mode key until the Frequency Command screen is displayed 3 Press the Local Remote key to enter the Local SET 0 00 H
107. wiring from the ASD to the DBR should be twisted approximately two twists per foot throughout the length of the wire If EMI RFI noise is of concern the DBR wiring should be 3 core screened cable The screen should connect to the ASD enclosure and the resistor enclosure CAUTION Though the in line DBR fuse and the thermal relay are designed into the system to prevent a catastrophic DBR over current condition they are both intended to be used as backup protection ONLY A proper typeform specific and application specific system setup that includes using the appropriate Dynamic Braking Resistor and Overload settings will be required G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 267 Figure 37 DBR Configurations Braking Resistor circuit with a thermal fuse Figure 38 Shown below is a typical connection diagram using an MCCB with a Trip Coil TC in lieu of an input contactor A control transformer is required for 400 volt models only The primary MC is opened in the event of a DBR over current detection With no power supplied to the G9 ASD the failure will not be displayed on the EOI see the Trip History for failure information once restarted 268 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Short Circuit Protection Recommendations Table 22 230 240 and 400 480 Volt A
108. z Control Circuitry S G E 25 HP and above 400 Volt Unit F S106 30 HP and above onnecror FLA RES FLBA lt 2A 120VA0 gt CC Fl 2 2A 30VDC gt 0 Fr m erminall re Discrete St 5 _ mon gt P Boore FP 50mA7 24VDC Terminals s3 l TOSHIBA 4 moce A OST H DUT1A Factory Installed Jumper RR ja DUT1B O1B 10VDC Output RR Potentiometer voltage g2a DUT2A External gt Potentiometer 1 to 10 ke Ohm XW ee Communication E Cor voltage from DUT2B RR to CC oF E on 028 4 Wire 2 Wire RAS or CE o sw200 AM Open or Close both switches of SW200 o ec C Voltage or F681 Current Input Set uing FMC 0 10 VDC _ O V I lt select V or I at SW30D 0 10 VDC IVN 4 20 mA avant obima ae RX yeas e hr eee Input Signal A 9 cc 10 to 10 VDC Ech Aei J101 24V w Backup D P24 J100 24 Volt Input su Backup Ext Input Sink Source ea Input Signal Jumper 1 to 2 Sink 2 to 3 Source V Note Note Note The isolated V I analog terminal references ICC The AM FM and the SU analog terminals are referenced to CC The PP RR RX and the P24 analog terminals are referenced to CCA G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Startup and Test Before turning on the ASD ensure that e R L1 S L2 and T L3 are connected to the 3 phase input power U T1 V T2 and W T3 are connected to the motor The 3 phase input voltage is within the specified tolerance The
109. 0 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz VI II V I Input Point 2 Setting Program gt Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the V I input terminal when the V I terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode or the Torque Control mode This parameter sets the V I input level that is associated with V I Input Point 2 Frequency when operating in the Speed control mode or is associated with the V I Input Point 1 Rate when operating in the Torque Control mode This value is entered as 0 to 100 of the V I input signal range See V I Input Point 1 Setting F201 for more information on this setting when used for Speed control See V I Input Point 1 Rate F205 for more information on this setting when used for Torque Control F203 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Units VI II V I Input Point 2 Frequency Program gt Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the V I input terminal when the V I terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode This parameter sets V I Input Point 2 Frequency and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of V I Input P
110. 00 of the PG input pulse count range Note Further application specific PG settings may be performed from the following path Program Feedback gt PG Settings F234 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 100 0 Units Frequency Settings PG Point ny7 7 1007 2 Setting 1 F236 Input Signal Range PG Point 1 Setting F234 0 0 Hz Output Max Freq 4 Frequency 4 PG Point 1 Frequency F235 PG Point 2 Frequency F237 PG Input Point 1 Frequency Program gt Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints This parameter is used to set the speed of the PG input terminals when the PG terminal is used as the control input This parameter sets PG Point 1 Frequency and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of PG Point 1 Setting See PG Point 1 Setting F234 for further information on this setting 122 F235 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F236 F241 PG Input Point 2 Setting Program gt Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints This parameter is used to set the direction and speed of the PG input terminals when the PG terminals are used a
111. 03 Selects the Command control source set to Terminal Block F004 Selects the Frequency Control Mode 1 control source set to UP DOWN Frequency F207 Selects the Frequency Control Mode 2 control source set to UP DOWN Frequency if used Set one unused discrete input terminal to UP DOWN Frequency up and one unused discrete input terminal to UP DOWN Frequency down F264 Sets the system response delay to the initial activation of the discrete input terminal UP DOWN Frequency up Also sets the response delay of subsequent terminal activations of the UP DOWN Frequency up terminal during an activate and hold F265 Sets the frequency increase amount for each activation of the UP DOWN Frequency up terminal activation The rate of the frequency increase is set at Acceleration Time 1 F009 F266 Sets the system response delay to the initial activation of the discrete input terminal UP DOWN Frequency down Also sets the activation delay of subsequent terminal activations of the UP DOWN Frequency down terminal during an activate and hold F267 Sets the frequency decrease amount for each activation of the UP DOWN Frequency down terminal activation The rate of the frequency decrease is set at Deceleration Time 1 F010 F268 At power up or after a reset this parameter setting is used to provide a starting frequency for the UP DOWN Frequency function F269 At power down while running and when e
112. 04 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default RR Changeable During Run No 77 F005 F006 FM Output Terminal Function Program gt Terminal gt Analog Output Terminals This parameter is used to set the output function of the FM analog output terminal The FM output terminal produces an output current or voltage that is proportional to the magnitude of the function assigned to this terminal select current or voltage at F681 The available assignments for this output terminal are listed in Table 6 on pg 237 Note To read voltage at this terminal connect a 100 500Qresistor from the FM terminal to the CC terminal Using a voltmeter read the voltage across the 100 500Qresistor To read current at this terminal connect a 100 500Q resistor from the FM terminal through a series Ammeter to the CC terminal The FM analog output has a maximum resolution of 1 1024 and a maximum load rating of 500 ohms FM Terminal Setup Parameters F005 Set FM Function F006 Calibrate FM Terminal F681 Voltage Current Output Switching Selection F682 Output Response Polarity Selection F683 Set Zero Level Direct Access Number F005 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Output Frequency Changeable During Run Yes FM Output Terminal Adjustment Program gt Terminal gt Analog Output Terminals This parameter is used to calibrate the FM analog output To
113. 08 NEC Article 310 adjustment factors Note National and local codes should be referenced when running more than three conductors in the same conduit Install a molded case circuit breaker MCCB or fuse between the 3 phase power source and the ASD in accordance with the fault current setting of the ASD and 2008 NEC Article 430 The ASD is designed and tested to comply with UL Standard 508C Modifications to the ASD system or failure to comply with the short circuit protection requirements outlined in this manual may disqualify the UL rating See Table 22 on pg 269 for typeform specific short circuit protection recommendations As a minimum the installation of the ASD shall conform to 2008 NEC Article 110 the Occupational Safety and Health Administration requirements and to any other local and regional industry codes and standards Note In the event that the motor rotates in the wrong direction when powered up reverse any two of the three ASD output power leads U V or W connected to the motor Figure 3 G9 ASD Motor Typical Connection Diagram L1 Tl p F JL J T2 7 in Circui otor Sout _ T L3 goeh 13 ya AN o Ternir e DEJ l rad G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 17 System Grounding Proper grounding helps to prevent electrical shock and to reduce electrical noise The ASD is designed to be grounded in accordan
114. 1 Process PID 2 Speed PID 3 Easy Positioning PID Not Used with the G9 ASD G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F359 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default PID Off Changeable During Run No 147 F360 F364 PID Feedback Signal Program gt Feedback gt Feedback Settings This parameter Enables Disables PID feedback control When enabled this parameter determines the source of the motor control feedback Settings 0 PID Control Disabled 1 VVU V D 2 RR 3 RX 4 RX2 AIl 5 Option V I 6 PG Feedback Option Proportional Integral Derivative PID A closed loop control technique that seeks error minimization by reacting to three values One that is proportional to the error one that is representative of the error and one that is representative of the rate of change of the error F360 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default PID Control Disabled Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes PID Feedback Delay Filter Program gt Feedback gt Feedback Settings This parameter determines the delay in the ASD output response to the motor control feedback signal signal source is selected at F360 F361 Parameter Type Numerical Direct Access Number Factory Default 0 1 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 25 0 PID Feedback Proportional
115. 1 Maximum 100 00 Units Seconds Over Speed Detection Frequency Upper Band Program gt Protection Abnormal Speed Settings This parameter sets the upper level of the Base Frequency range that once exceeded will cause an Over Speed Detected alert This parameter functions in conjunction with the settings of F622 and F624 Direct Access Number F623 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Disabled Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Disabled Maximum 30 00 Units Hz Over Speed Detection Frequency Lower Band Program gt Protection Abnormal Speed Settings This parameter sets the lower level of the Base Frequency range that once the output speed falls below this setting will cause a Speed Drop Detected alert This parameter functions in conjunction with the settings of F622 and F623 Direct Access Number F624 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Disabled Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Disabled Maximum 30 00 Units Hz Over Voltage Limit Operation Level Program gt Protection gt Stall This parameter sets the upper DC bus voltage threshold that once exceeded will cause an Over Voltage Stall An Over Voltage Stall increases the output frequency of the drive during deceleration for a specified time in an attempt to prevent an Over Voltage Trip If the over voltage condition persists for over 4 mS an Over Voltage T
116. 158 Regenerative Braking Torque Limit 2 Level 158 Regenerative Braking Torque Limit 3 Level 159 Regenerative Braking Torque Limit 4 Level 159 Regenerative Power Ridethrough Control Level 188 Regenerative Power Ridethrough Mode 134 Release Time 143 Remote Keypad Required Hardware 33 Remote Mode 29 RES 21 22 Reset 50 79 Restore User Settings 75 Retain Trip Record at Power Down 182 Retry Selection 135 Retry Restart 53 Reverse Speed Limit Input 156 Reverse Speed Limit Input Level 156 Ridethrough Time 137 ROM Fault 249 Root Menu Mapping 41 Root Menus 41 Rotary Encoder 29 Rotation in Specified Direction ONLY 157 RR 21 22 44 RR Input 25 RR Input Bias 162 RR Input Gain 162 RR Input Point 1 Frequency 110 RR Input Point 1 Rate 112 RR Input Point 1 Setting 110 RR Input Point 2 Frequency 111 RR Input Point 2 Rate 112 RR Input Point 2 Setting 111 RS485 2 and 4 Wire Communications Time Out Action 203 RS485 2 and 4 Wire Parity 202 RS485 2 Wire ASD to ASD Communications 204 RS485 2 Wire Protocol Selection 204 RS485 2 Wire Send Wait Time 204 RS485 ASD to ASD Communications 207 RS485 Protocol Selection TSB ModBus 207 RS485 Send Wait Time 206 Run Frequency 123 Run Frequency Hysteresis 124 Run Key 29 Run Time 43 Rush Relay Current Activation Time 189 RX 21 23 44 RX Input 25 RX Input Bias 162 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual RX In
117. 2 F193 V f 5 Point Setting Frequency 3 F194 Vif Five Point Setting V f 5 Point Setting Voltage 3 F195 V f 5 Point Setting Frequency 4 F196 V f 5 Point Setting Voltage 4 F197 V f 5 Point Setting Frequency 5 F198 V f 5 Point Setting Voltage 5 F199 Start Frequency F240 Run Frequency F241 Frequency Control Run Frequency Hysteresis F242 End Frequency F243 0 Hz Dead Band Signal F244 0 Hz Command Output F255 Exciting Strengthening Coefficient F415 Special Parameters Annual Average Ambient Temperature F634 Rush Current Suppression Relay Activation Time F635 PTC 1 Thermal Selection F637 PTC 2 Thermal Selection F638 Jump Frequency 1 F270 Jump Frequency 1 Bandwidth F271 Jump Frequencies Jump Frequency 2 F272 Jump Frequency 2 Bandwidth F273 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 57 Program Mode Menu Navigation Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Paramena Number SPECIAL Jump Frequency 3 F274 Jump Frequencies Jump Frequency 3 Bandwidth F275 Operation Command Clear Selection With Standby F719 Terminal Off Panel Stop Pattern F721 Panel Torque Command F725 Panel Tension Torque Bias Le 27 Operation Panel Parameters Panel Load Sharing Gain F728 Panel Override Multiplication Gain E729 Panel Frequency Lockout F730 Panel Emergency Off Lockout F734 Panel Reset Lockout F733 Traverse Selection F980 Traverse Acceleration Time F9
118. 225 Input Function Target 3 214 215 217 221 222 224 225 Input Phase Failure 249 Input Phase Failure Detection 184 Input Power 44 274 Input Special Functions 47 Input Terminal 1 F Function 88 Input Terminal 1 F Response Time 95 Input Terminal 10 LI2 Function 90 Input Terminal 11 LI3 Function 90 Input Terminal 12 LI4 Function 91 Input Terminal 13 20 Response Time 96 Input Terminal 13 LI5 Function 91 Input Terminal 14 LI6 Function 91 Input Terminal 15 LI7 Function 92 Input Terminal 16 LI8 Function 92 Input Terminal 17 B12 Function 96 Input Terminal 18 B13 Function 96 Input Terminal 19 B14 Function 97 Input Terminal 2 R Function 88 Input Terminal 2 R Response Time 95 Input Terminal 20 B15 Function 97 Input Terminal 3 ST Function 88 Input Terminal 3 ST Response Time 95 Input Terminal 4 RES Function 89 Input Terminal 4 RES Response Time 96 Input Terminal 5 12 Response Time 96 Input Terminal 5 S1 Function 89 Input Terminal 6 S2 Function 89 Input Terminal 7 S3 Function 89 Input Terminal 8 S4 Function 89 Input Terminal 9 LI1 Function 90 Input Terminal Delays 47 Input Terminal Priority 87 Input Terminals 48 Installation and Connections 14 Installation Notes 14 Installation Precautions 4 Isolated V I Input 105 J Jog Frequency 126 Jog Settings 54 Jog Stop Pattern 127 Jump Frequencies 57 Jump Frequency 1 130 J
119. 26 Keypad Bezel Plate Mounting Dimensions a peoi ooo eo i 0 F 2 I om Fo m a N E ERAS F T IE IDE IE BACT IE G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 35 Command Mode and Frequency Mode 36 Control Command control includes instructions such as Stop Run Jog etc The source of the Command signal must be established for normal operation Frequency commands control the output speed of the ASD The source of the frequency control signal must be established for normal operation The source of the command control and speed control may be either internal or external Once the source signal is selected for either function the system may be configured to use the selected signal all of the time or switch under user defined conditions Command and Frequency control may be carried out using any one of several control methods signal sources or combinations thereof In the event that multiple control commands are received the signal sources are assigned priority levels The primary control method for Command and Frequency control uses the settings of F003 and F004 respectively Command Control F003 The Command Mode selection of F003 establishes Standard Mode Selection the primary source of the command input for the ASD F003 Command Mode However the Override feature may supersede the F003 setting as indicated in Tab
120. 47 Input Function Command 1 F948 Input Function Target 2 F949 My Function Unit 6 Input Function Command 2 F950 Input Function Target 3 F951 Output Function Assigned POSA 62 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Program Mode Menu Navigation Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Saeed My FUNCTION Input Function Target 1 F953 Input Function Command 1 F954 Input Function Target 2 F955 My Function Unit 7 Input Function Command 2 F956 Input Function Target 3 F957 Output Function Assigned F958 My Function Percent Data 1 F918 My Function Percent Data 2 BONO My Function Percent Data 3 F920 My Function Percent Data 4 F921 My Function Percent Data 5 F922 My Function Frequency Data 1 F923 My Function Frequency Data 2 F924 My Function Frequency Data 3 F925 My Function Data My Function Frequency Data 4 F926 My Function Frequency Data 5 E927 My Function Time Data 1 F928 My Function Time Data 2 F929 My Function Time Data 3 F930 My Function Time Data 4 F931 My Function Time Data 5 F932 My Function Count Data 1 F933 My Function Count Data 2 F934 Analog Input Function Target 11 B959 Analog Function Assigned Object 11 F961 My Function Analog Analog Input Function Target 21 F962 Analog Function Assigned Object 21 F964 Monitor Output Function 11 F965 My Function Monitor Monitor Output Function Command 11 F966 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
121. 478 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 128 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Direct Access Number F479 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 128 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 255 163 F498 F501 Permanent Magnet PM Motor Constant 1 Program gt Motor PM Motor This parameter is used with synchronous motor applications only Contact the Toshiba Customer Support Center for information on this parameter Direct Access Number F498 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD Dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Units Permanent Magnet PM Motor Constant 2 Program gt Motor PM Motor This parameter is used with synchronous motor applications only Contact the Toshiba Customer Support Center for information on this parameter Direct Access Number F499 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD Dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Units Acceleration Time 2 Program gt Special gt Acc Dec 1 4 Settings This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the output of the ASD to go from 0 0 Hz to the Maximum Frequency for the 2 Acceleration profile The Accel Decel pattern may be set using F502 The minimum Accel Decel time may be set using F508 This setting is also used to determine the acce
122. 63 Program Mode Menu Navigation Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name aha My FUNCTION Monitor Output Function 21 F967 Monitor Output Function Command 21 F968 Monitor Output Function 31 F969 My Function Monitor Monitor Output Function Command 31 F970 Monitor Output Function 41 F972 Monitor Output Function Command 41 F971 COMMUNICATIONS Frequency Point Selection F810 Point 1 Setting F811 PE Point 1 Frequency F812 Point 2 Setting F813 Point 2 Frequency F814 RS485 2 Wire Baud Rate F800 RS485 2 Wire and 4 Wire Parity F801 ASD Number F802 RS485 2 Wire and 4 Wire Communications Time Out F803 RS485 2 Wire and 4 Wire Communication Time Out Action P804 RS485 2 Wire Send Wait Time F805 RS485 2 Wire ASD to ASD Communication F806 RS485 2 Wire Protocol F807 Comm rication RS485 4 Wire Baud Rate F820 Settings RS485 Send Wait Time F825 RS485 4 Wire ASD to ASD Communication F826 RS485 4 Wire Protocol TSB MODBUS F829 Communication Option DeviceNet Profibus Setting 1 F830 Communication Option DeviceNet Profibus Setting 2 F831 Communication Option DeviceNet Profibus Setting 3 F832 Communication Option DeviceNet Profibus Setting 4 F833 Communication Option DeviceNet Profibus Setting 5 F834 Communication Option DeviceNet Profibus Setting 6 F835 Communication Option DeviceNet Profibus Setting 7 F836 64 G9 ASD Install
123. 8 One Preset Speed number 1 15 or Skip is selected for Selection 1 F523 The number of times to repeat Pattern Group 1 is selected at F522 Set this value to 255 to run forever Setup Pattern Group 2 at F531 F539 if more Preset Speed entries are required Pattern Run Setup for Pattern Group 1 1 From Program gt Pattern Run gt Speeds select the Preset Speeds to be used as the Pattern Group 1 set of Selections Select a speed from the 1 15 configured presets 1 speed number per Selection Set any unused Selec tions to Skip 2 From Program gt Pattern Run gt Pattern Run gt Pattern Operation Selection enable the Pattern Run mode of operation by selecting Seconds or Minutes as the unit of measure for the Operation Time setting 3 From Program gt Pattern Run gt Operation Time set the run time for each Preset Speed selected in step 1 4 Configure two unused discrete input terminals for Pattern Operation Group 1 and Pattern Operation Trigger Signal Note Activation of the Pattern Operation Group 1 discrete input terminal is required to enable Pattern Group 1 for use Activation of the Pattern Operation Trigger Signal discrete input terminal starts the Pattern Group 1 pattern run 5 From Program gt Pattern Run gt Pattern Run gt Pattern 1 Repeat set to the number of times that Pattern Group 1 is to be run Set to 255 to run forever 6 From Program gt Pattern Run gt Pattern Run g
124. 81 32 3 820 8 0 203 0 188 4 8 0 375 9 5 Figure 35 G 2500 2600 9 2750 14 6 371 51 7 1313 50 2 1275 9 2 234 Figure 35 I Figure 33 17 6 447 0 344 8 7 0 670 17 0 10 210K 15 7 399 53 1 1349 51 7 1313 9 9 252 Figure 35 J G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 255 Table 17 460 Volt G9 ASD Systems Enclosure A B c Mounting Hole Dimensions Model Number 3 A A in mm Conduit Plate Frame Figure Width Height Depth F VT130G9U Number in mm in mm in mm Figure Number D E R1 R2 4015 2 4025 5 2 132 11 2 285 6 1 155 8 7 220 4 5 114 0 217 5 5 Figure 34 A 4035 0 098 2 5 3 4055 6 1 155 12 4 315 9 8 249 5 4 138 4080 Figure 31 6 6 168 4 6 9 175 15 0 381 6 2 158 0 236 6 0 Figure 34 B 4110 11 1 283 5A 4160 8 3 211 15 1 384 7 5 190 Figure 34 C 4220 7 6 193 0 118 3 0 0 276 7 0 5B 9 1 231 19 3 490 15 2 386 8 3 210 Figure 34 D 4270 6 4330 25 9 658 13 2 335 25 0 635 Figure 34 E 4400 11 1 283 7A 30 8 782 14 3 363 29 7 754 Figure 34 F 4500 Figure 32 8 0 203 0 188 4 8 0 375 9 5 4600 8 4750 14 3 363 36 1 917 15 3 389 35 3 897 Figure 35 H 410K 9 412K 14 6 371 51 7 1313 50 2 1275 9 2 234 Figure 35 I 10 415K 15 7 399 53 1 1349 1 7 1313 Figure 35 J 9 9 252 11 420K 15 0 381 63 1 1603 61 6 1565 Figure 35 K Figure 33 17 6 447 0 344 8 7 0 670 17 12 425K 18 9
125. 81 Traverse Traverse Deceleration Time F982 Traverse Step F983 Traverse Jump Step F984 MOTOR Motor Set 2 Base Frequency F170 Motor Set 2 Base Frequency Voltage F171 Motor Set 2 Motor Set 2 Manual Torque Boost F172 Motor Set 2 Overload Protection Level F173 Motor Set 3 Base Frequency F174 Motor Set 3 Base Frequency Voltage EITS Motor Set 3 Motor Set 3 Manual Torque Boost F176 Motor Set 3 Overload Protection Level F177 Motor Set 4 Base Frequency F178 Motor Set 4 Base Frequency Voltage F179 Motor Set 4 Motor Set 4 Manual Torque Boost F180 Motor Set 4 Overload Protection Level F181 PM Motor Constant 1 D Axis Inductance F498 PM Motor PM Motor Constant 2 Q Axis Inductance F499 58 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Program Mode Menu Navigation Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name anand Motor Step Out Detection Current Level For PM Motors F640 PM Motor Step Out Detection Current Time For PM Motors F641 Autotune 1 F400 Slip Frequency Gain F401 Autotune 2 F402 Motor Rated Capacity Nameplate F405 Motor Rated Current Nameplate F406 Vector Motor Model Motor Rated RPM Nameplate F407 Base Frequency Voltage 1 F409 Motor Constant 1 Torque Boost F410 Motor Constant 2 No Load Current F411 Motor Constant 3 Leak Inductance F412 Motor Constant 4 Rated Slip F413 TORQUE Power Running Torque Limit 2 Level F444 Rege
126. 814 for more information on this setting Note Scaling the communications signal is not required for all applications Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled off then on for the changes to take effect Settings 0 Disabled 1 RS485 2 Wire NOT USED 2 RS485 4 Wire 3 Communication Card F810 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Point 1 Setting Program gt Communications Communication Reference Adjust When enabled at F810 this parameter is used to allow the user to set the gain and bias of the speed control input to the drive when the speed control signal is received via the source selected at F810 Gain and Bias Settings When operating in the Speed Control mode and using one of the control sources from Settings above the settings that determine the gain and bias properties of the input signal are e Communications Reference Speed Setpoint 1 frequency F812 e the communications input signal value that represents Communications Reference Speed Setpoint 1 frequency F811 e Communications Reference Speed Setpoint 2 frequency F814 and e the communications input signal value that represents Communications Reference Speed Setpoint 2 frequency F813 Once set as the input signal value changes the output frequency of the drive will vary in accordance with the above setting
127. 964 may be adjusted using the input analog control signal selected here Settings 0 Disabled None 1 VII V D 2 RR 3 RX 4 Optional RX2 RX2 5 Optional V I 226 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F964 F966 Analog Function Assigned Object 21 Program gt My Function gt My Function Analog This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality to which the adjustment of F962 is applied Settings 0 Disabled None 1 Acceleration Rate 2 Upper Limit Frequency 3 Acceleration Multiplication Factor 4 Deceleration Multiplication Factor 5 Manual Torque Boost 6 Over Current Stall F601 7 Thermal Protection F600 8 Speed Loop Proportional Gain F460 9 Drooping Gain F320 10 PID Proportional Gain F362 See the My Function Instruction Manual P N E6581335 for a complete description of the setup requirements and operational information of the Analog Function Assigned Object parameter F964 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 Disabled Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Monitor Output Function 11 Program My Function gt My Function Monitor This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by establishing the function that is to be recorded and output as the Peak Minimum or Normal Avg value as selected at parameter
128. A EOI Features LED Screen Displays the running frequency active Fault or active Alarm information Rotary Encoder Used to access the G9 ASD menu selections change the value of a displayed parameter and performs the Enter key function Turn the Rotary Encoder either clockwise or counterclockwise to perform the Up or Down functions of the displayed menu selection Press the Rotary Encoder to perform the Enter select function LCD Screen Displays configuration information performance data e g output frequency bus voltage torque etc diagnostic information and LED Screen information in expanded normal text Local Remote Key Toggles the system to and from the Local and Remote modes The Local Remote Key is disabled while the Fault screen is displayed The LED is on when the system is in the Local Command mode The Local mode allows the Command and Frequency control functions to be carried out via the EOI The Remote mode enables the Command and Frequency control functions to be carried out via the Terminal Board RS485 Communication Card Pulse Input or the settings of F003 F004 The selection may be made via Program Fundamental Standard Mode Settings Command Mode and Frequency Mode 1 respectively The availability of Local mode control Command and Frequency control may be disabled via Program gt Utilities gt Prohibition gt Local Remote Key Command Override and Local Remote Key Frequency Override
129. ASD Switching Output 1 1134 134 Failure FL Except Emergency Off 1048 48 Commercial Power ASD Switching Output 2 1222 222 My Function Output 1 1050 50 Cooling Fan ON OFF 1224 224 My Function Output 2 1052 52 Jogging Operation Active Jog Run Active 1226 226 My Function Output 3 1054 54 Panel Terminal Board Operation Switching 1228 228 My Function Output 4 1056 56 Cumulative Run Time Alarm 1230 230 My Function Output 5 1058 58 ProfiBus DeviceNet CC Link Communication Error 1232 232 My Function Output 6 1060 60 Forward Reverse Switching 1234 234 My Function Output 7 1062 62 Ready for Operation 1 1236 236 My Function Output 8 1064 64 Ready for Operation 2 1238 238 My Function Output 9 1068 68 Brake Release BR 1240 240 My Function Output 10 1070 70 Alarm Status Active 1242 242 My Function Output 11 1072 72 Forward Speed Limit torque control 1244 244 My Function Output 12 1074 74 Reverse Speed Limit torque control 1246 246 My Function Output 13 1076 76 ASD Healthy Output 1248 248 My Function Output 14 1078 78 RS485 Communication Error 1250 250 My Function Output 15 1080 80 Error Code Output 1 1252 252 My Function Output 16 1082 82 Error Code Output 2 1254 254 Always OFF 1084 84 Error Code Output 3 Note Only positive logic is available for the listed parameters 239 Table 9 Trace Back Data Selections Selection
130. ASD of the communications Changeable During Run Yes link See parameter F875 for more information on this setting Block Read Data 3 Direct Access Number F877 Program Communications gt Communication Settings Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default None This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by establishing the type of data to be read from the ASD of the communications link Changeable During Run Yes See parameter F875 for more information on this setting 212 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F878 F901 Block Read Data 4 Program Communications gt Communication Settings This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by establishing the type of data to be read from the ASD of the communications link See parameter F875 for more information on this setting Direct Access Number F878 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default None Changeable During Run Yes Block Read Data 5 Program gt Communications Communication Settings This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by establishing the type of data to be read from the ASD of the communications link See parameter F875 for more information on this setting Direct Access Number F879 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default None Changeable During Run Yes Free Notes Program gt Commun
131. Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum Lower Limit F013 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz 131 F288 F293 Preset Speed 9 Program gt Frequency Preset Speeds This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 1001 and is identified as Preset Speed 9 The binary number is applied to S1 S4 of the Terminal Board to output the Preset Speed see F018 for more information on this parameter F288 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum Lower Limit F013 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz Preset Speed 10 Program gt Frequency gt Preset Speeds This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 1010 and is identified as Preset Speed 10 The binary number is applied to S1 S4 of the Terminal Board to output the Preset Speed see F018 for more information on this parameter F289 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum Lower Limit F013 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz Preset Speed 11 Program gt Frequency Preset Speeds This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 1011 and is identified as Preset Speed 11 The binary number is applied to S1 S4 of the Terminal Board to output the Preset Speed see F018 for more information on this par
132. During Run No Minimum 0 00 Maximum 250 00 Units Over Torque Detection Level Negative Torque Program gt Protection gt Over Torque Parameters This parameter sets the torque threshold level that is used as a setpoint for over torque tripping during negative torque regen This setting is a percentage of the maximum rated torque of the drive This function is enabled at F615 F617 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 200 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 00 Maximum 250 00 Units Over Torque Detection Time Program gt Protection gt Over Torque Parameters This parameter sets the amount of time that the over torque condition may exceed the tripping threshold level set at F616 and F617 before a trip occurs This function is enabled at F615 F618 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 50 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 00 Maximum 10 0 Units Seconds Over Torque Detection Hysteresis Program gt Protection gt Over Torque Parameters During a momentary over torque condition this parameter provides a torque threshold level to which the over torque condition must return within the time setting of F618 or an Over Torque Trip will be incurred F619 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 10 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Y
133. F563 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Forward Run Changeable During Run No G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F564 F573 Preset Speed 4 Operation Mode Program gt Pattern Run gt Operation Mode Same as Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode see F561 Direct Access Number F564 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Forward Run Changeable During Run No Preset Speed 5 Operation Mode Program gt Pattern Run gt Operation Mode Same as Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode see F561 Direct Access Number F565 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Forward Run Changeable During Run No Preset Speed 6 Operation Mode Program gt Pattern Run gt Operation Mode Same as Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode see F561 Direct Access Number F566 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Forward Run Changeable During Run No Preset Speed 7 Operation Mode Program gt Pattern Run gt Operation Mode Same as Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode see F561 Direct Access Number F567 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Forward Run Changeable During Run No Preset Speed 8 Operation Mode Program gt Pattern Run gt Operation Mode Same as Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode see F561 Direct Access Number F568 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Forward Run Change
134. F973 4 Set Input Function Target 1 to 5 F900 This setting assigns S1 as the control input terminal 5 Set Output Function Assigned to 21 F905 This setting is a command that writes the F115 selection S1 to Virtual Input Terminal 1 activating both 6 Enable the My Function parameter at F977 by selecting My Function Always On or selecting My Function With TB Signal If set to My Function Always On the combination of ST and F are always On both are connected to CC only during the S1 activation If set to My Function With TB Signal set a discrete input terminal to My Function Run Signal and connect it to CC to enable My Function Connect S1 to CC to activate the ST F function A disconnection at either terminal will terminate the My Function programming discrete input terminal My Function Run Signal is Anded with discrete input terminal S1 Connect S1 to CC and the F to CC the ST to CC functions will be carried out using only S1 With the aforementioned setup completed provide a Frequency Command F004 and the motor will run at the commanded frequency G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F977 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default None Disabled Changeable During Run No DANGER This parameter must always be set to None at the start of the My Function setup and remain set to None until all of the My Function parameter settings have been confirme
135. Function F116 Input Terminal 7 S3 Function F117 Input Terminal 8 S4 Function F118 Input Terminal 9 LI1 Function F119 Input Terminal 10 LI2 Function F120 Input Terminal 11 LI3 Function F121 Input Terminals Input Terminal 12 LI4 Function F122 Input Terminal 13 LIS Function F123 Input Terminal 14 LI6 Function F124 Input Terminal 15 LI7 Function HILS Input Terminal 16 LI8 Function F126 Input Terminal 17 B12 Function F164 Input Terminal 18 B13 Function F165 Input Terminal 19 B14 Function F166 Input Terminal 20 BI5 Function F167 Virtual Input Terminal Selection 1 F975 Virtual Input Terminal Selection 2 F974 Virtual Input Terminal Selection 3 RIIS Virtual Input Terminal Selection 4 F976 Commercial Power ASD Switching Output F354 Commercial Power ASD Switching Frequency F333 Line Power Switching ASD Side Switching Delay Time F356 Commercial Power Side Switching Delay Time F397 Commercial Power Switching Frequency Hold Time F358 48 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Program Mode Menu Navigation Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name anand TERMINAL Output Terminal 1 OUT1 Function F130 Output Terminal 2 OUT2 Function F131 Output Terminal 3 FL Function F132 Output Terminal 4 OUT3 Function F133 Output Terminal 5 OUT4 Function F134 Output Terminals Output Terminal 6 R1
136. Function F135 Output Terminal 7 OUTS Function F136 Output Terminal 8 OUT6 Function F137 Output Terminal 9 R2 Function F138 Output Terminal 10 R3 Function F168 Output Terminal 11 R4 Function F169 Low Speed Signal Output Frequency F100 Reach Settings Speed Reach Frequency F101 Speed Reach Detection Band F102 DIRECT ACCESS Parameter Number Input Unknown Numbers Accepted aa UTILITIES Automatic Function Selection F040 Voltage Current Display Units F701 Free Unit Multiplication Factor F702 Free Unit F703 Display Parameters Free Unit Display Gradient Characteristic F705 Free Unit Display Bias F706 Change Step Selection 1 F707 Change Step Selection 2 F708 Write Parameter Lockout F700 Command Mode Frequency Mode Lockout F736 Prohibition Lockout All Keys F737 Local Remote Key Command Override N A Local Remote Key Frequency Override Trace Trace Selection F740 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 49 Program Mode Menu Navigation Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Parameter Number UTILITIES Trace Trace Cycle F741 Trace Data 1 F742 Trace Data 2 F743 Trace Data 3 F744 Trace Data 4 F745 Alarm Prohibition prohibits an EOI alarm display ONLY alarm still activated Over Current Alarm ASD Overload Alarm Motor Overload Alarm Over Heat Alarm Over Voltage Alarm Main Power Under Voltage Alarm Reserved POFF Alarm Unde
137. I7 discrete input terminal In addition this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This setting assigns the function of the programmable LI7 terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 5 on pg 234 Note The Expansion IO Card Option 2 option board P N ETB004Z is required to use this terminal See the Expansion IO Card Option 2 Instruction Manual P N 58686 for more information on the function of this terminal F125 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default Unassigned Changeable During Run No Input Terminal 16 LI8 Function Program gt Terminal gt Input Terminals This parameter is used to set the functionality of the LI8 discrete input terminal In addition this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This setting assigns the function of the programmable LI8 terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 5 on pg 234 Note The Expansion IO Card Option 2 option board P N ETB004Z is required to use this terminal See the Expansion IO Card Option 2 Instruction Manual P N 58686 for more information on the function of this terminal Direct Access Number F126 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Unassigned Changeable During Run No Output Terminal 1 OUT1 Function Program gt Terminal gt Output Terminals This par
138. Input Point 1 Setting when operating in the Torque Control mode This value is entered as 0 to 250 of the rated torque Direct Access Number F214 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 250 00 Units Torque Settings RR Input Point 2 Rate Program gt Torque gt Setpoints This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RR input terminal when the RR terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Torque Control mode Torque Control is accomplished by establishing an associated V f output pattern for a given RR input level This parameter sets RR Input Point 2 Rate and is the output torque value that is associated with the setting of RR Input Point 2 Setting when operating in the Torque Control mode This value is entered as 0 to 250 of the rated torque See RR Input Point 1 Rate F214 for more information on this setting 112 F215 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 250 00 Units G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F216 F217 RX Input Point 1 Setting Program gt Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX input terminal when the RX terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode or
139. Output 4 1002 2 Upper Limit Frequency 1088 88 Error Code Output 5 1004 4 Low Speed Signal 1090 90 Error Code Output 6 1006 6 Acceleration Deceleration Completion 1092 92 Specified Data Output 1 1008 8 Speed Reach Signal 1094 94 Specified Data Output 2 1010 10 Failure FL All trips 1096 96 Specified Data Output 3 1012 12 Failure FL Except EF OCL EPHO OL2 1098 98 Specified Data Output 4 1014 14 Over Current OC Alarm 1100 100 Specified Data Output 5 1016 16 ASD Overload OL1 Alarm 1102 102 Specified Data Output 6 1018 18 Motor Overload OL2 Alarm 1104 104 Specified Data Output 7 1020 20 Over Heat Alarm 1106 106 Light Load 1022 22 Over Voltage Alarm 1108 108 Heavy Load 1024 24 Main Circuit MOFF Under Voltage Alarm 1110 110 Positive Torque Limit 1026 26 Low Current Alarm 1112 112 Negative Torque Limit 1028 28 Over Torque Alarm 1114 114 External Rush Suppression Relay Activated 1030 30 DBR Overload Alarm 1118 118 Completion of Stop Positioning 1032 32 Emergency Off Active 1120 120 L STOP 1034 34 Retry Active 1122 122 Power Failure Synchronized Operation 1036 36 Pattern Operation Switching Output 1124 124 Traverse in Progress 1038 38 PID Deviation Limit 1126 126 Traverse Deceleration Active 1040 40 Run Stop 1128 128 Part Replacement Alarm 1042 42 Serious Failure OCA OCL EF Phase Failure etc 1130 130 Over Torque Alarm 1044 44 Light Failure OL OC1 2 3 OP 1132 132 Frequency Command Selection 1046 46 Commercial Power
140. P Gain Program Feedback gt Feedback Settings This parameter determines the degree that the Proportional function affects the output signal The larger the value entered here the quicker the drive responds to changes in feedback F362 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 10 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 01 Maximum 100 0 PID Feedback Integral I Gain Program gt Feedback gt Feedback Settings This parameter determines the degree that the Integral function affects the output signal The smaller the value here the more pronounced the effect of the integral function on the output signal F363 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 10 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 01 Maximum 100 00 PID Deviation Upper Limit Program Feedback gt Feedback Settings This parameter determines the maximum amount that the feedback may increase the output signal 148 F364 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 60 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 60 00 Units Hz G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F365 F370 PID Deviation Lower Limit Program gt Feedback gt Feedback Settings This parameter determines the maximum amount that the feedback may decrease the output signal F365 Parameter Type Numerical
141. Protocol CC Link ProfiBus and DeviceNet Refer to the manual of each protocol type for more information Trace data may be viewed graphically via Program gt Utilities gt View Trace Data Settings 0 None Disabled 1 At Trip 2 At Trigger F740 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default At Trip Changeable During Run Yes Trace Cycle Program gt Utilities gt Trace This parameter sets the record time for the Trace Data events selected at F742 F745 See F740 for more information on this parameter setting Settings 0 4mS 1 20 mS 2 100 mS 3 1 Second 4 10 Seconds F741 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 100 mS Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Trace Data 1 Program gt Utilities gt Trace Data 1 This parameter is used to select the Trace Data 1 item from Table 9 on pg 240 to be read and stored in accordance with the setup of parameters F740 and F741 See F740 for more information on this parameter setting F742 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default Output Frequency Changeable During Run Yes Trace Data 2 Program gt Utilities gt Trace Data 2 This parameter is used to select the Trace Data 2 item from Table 9 on pg 240 to be read and stored in accordance with the setup of parameters F740 and F741 See F740 for
142. Remote LED Off Provide a Run command connect F and or R to CC Connect S1 to CC to run Preset Speed 1 S1 to CC 0001 binary With S1 S4 configured to output Preset Speeds F115 F118 0001 1111 may be applied to S1 S4 of the Terminal Board to run the associated Preset Speed If bidirectional operation is required F and R must be connected to CC and Preset Speed Operation Mode must be set to Enabled at F560 With S1 being the least significant bit of a binary count the S1 S4 settings will produce the programmed speed settings as indicated in the Preset Speed Truth Table to the right Preset Speeds are also used in the Pattern Run mode F018 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum Lower Limit F013 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz Preset Speed Truth Table Preset ee S3 S2 Re Output 1 0 0 0 1 F018 2 0 0 1 0 F019 3 0 0 1 1 F020 4 0 1 0 0 F021 5 0 1 0 1 F022 6 0 1 1 0 F023 7 0 1 1 1 F024 8 1 0 0 0 F287 9 1 0 0 1 F288 10 1 0 1 0 F289 11 1 0 1 1 F290 12 1 1 0 0 F291 13 1 1 0 1 F292 14 1 1 1 0 F293 15 1 1 1 1 F294 Note 1 Terminal connected to CC Preset Speed 2 Program gt Frequency Preset Speeds This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 0010 and is identified as Preset Speed 2 The binary number i
143. SD an output parameter of the Master ASD is used to control the Follower ASDs and is set here If operating as a Follower ASD the ASD response if an error is incurred is set here Note Selecta Follower function here if F826 is configured as a Master Output controller for any other ASD in the system Otherwise an EOI failure will result Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled off then on for the changes to take effect Settings 0 Follower Decel Stop If Error Detected 1 Follower Continues Operation If Error Detected 2 Follower Emergency Off If Error Detected 3 Master Frequency Command 4 Master Output Frequency 5 Master Torque Reference 6 Master Torque Command Direct Access Number F806 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Follower Decel Stop Changeable During Run Yes RS485 2 Wire Protocol Selection Program Communications Communication Reference Adjust This parameter sets the RS485 2 Wire communications protocol Settings 0 Toshiba 1 Modbus 204 Direct Access Number F807 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Toshiba Changeable During Run Yes G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F810 F812 Frequency Point Selection Program gt Communications Communication Reference Adjust This parameter is used to set the communications reference for scaling See F811 F
144. SD Recommended Circuit Breaker Selection Bees ASD HP COL rape mais Current Circuit Breaker Part Number 2010 0 75 3 5 HLL36015 2015 1 4 8 HLL36015 2025 2 8 0 HLL36015 2035 3 10 0 HLL36025 2055 5 17 5 HLL36025 2080 7 5 27 5 HLL36040 2110 10 33 HLL36050 2160 15 54 HLL36070 2220 20 66 HLL36090 2270 25 76 HLL36100 2330 30 90 HLL36100 2400 40 120 HLL36125 2500 50 152 HLL36150 2600 60 176 JLL36200 2750 75 221 JLL36250 210K 100 285 LIL36300 4015 1 2 7 Consult NEC 4025 2 4 1 HLL36015 4035 3 5 8 HLL36015 4055 5 10 5 HLL36025 4080 7 5 14 3 HLL36040 4110 10 17 6 HLL36050 4160 15 27 7 HLL36070 4220 20 33 HLL36090 4270 25 41 HLL36100 4330 30 48 HLL36100 4400 40 66 HLL36125 4500 50 79 HLL36150 4600 60 94 JLL36200 4750 75 116 JLL36225 410K 100 160 JLL36250 412K 125 179 LIL36300 415K 150 215 LIL36300 420K 200 259 LIL36400 425K 250 314 LIL36400 430K 300 387 LIL36450 435K 350 434 LIL36500 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 269 Optional Devices The ASD may be equipped with several options which are used to expand the functionality Table 23 lists the available options and their functions Table 23 G9 Optional Devices and Functions Part Identifier Device Name Device Function ASD CAB USB G9 G7 USB Communication Cable Used to connect the ASD to a PC via the PC USB port
145. Setting 2 Program Communications Communication Settings While using the DeviceNet Profibus communications protocol parameters F831 F836 allow the user to select the ASD memory location that holds the Command Frequency Monitoring instructions to be applied to the ASD for Communications Option Settings 2 7 respectively See the DeviceNet Option Instruction Manual P N 58683 for more information on this parameter Settings 0 Disabled 1 FA06 ALCAN Command 1 2 FA23 ALCAN Command 2 3 FA07 ALCAN Frequency Command 0 01 Hz 4 FA33 Torque Command 0 01 5 FASO Terminal Output 6 FAS1 Analog Output Data from Comm FM 7 FAS2 Analog Output Data from Comm AM 8 F601 Stall Prevention Level 9 F441 Power Running Torque Limit 1 Level 0 01 10 F443 Regen Braking Torque Limit 1 Level 0 01 11 F460 Speed Loop Proportional Gain 12 F461 Speed Loop Stabilization Coefficient Direct Access Number F831 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0000h Changeable During Run Yes Communications Option DeviceNet Profibus Setting 3 Program gt Communications Communication Settings Same as F831 See F831 for information on this parameter Direct Access Number F832 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0000h Changeable During Run Yes Communications Option DeviceNet Profibus Setting 4 P
146. TOSHIBA Leading Innovation gt gt gt WalHSoLl G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual aq p ds aiqeisnipy 69 Document Number 58681 003 Date October 2009 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Document Number 58681 003 Date October 2009 0 0 Introduction Congratulations on the purchase of the new G9 True Torque Control Adjustable Speed Drive The G9 True Torque Control Adjustable Speed Drive ASD is a solid state AC drive that features True Torque ControP Toshiba s Vector Control Algorithm enables the motor to develop high starting torque and provide compensation for motor slip which results in smooth quick starts and highly efficient operation The G9 ASD uses digitally controlled pulse width modulation The programmable functions may be accessed via the easy to use menu selections or via the Direct Access Numbers see page 76 This feature combined with Toshiba s high performance software delivers unparalleled motor control and reliability The G9 ASD is a very powerful tool yet surprisingly simple to operate The user friendly Electronic Operator Interface EOI of the ASD has an easy to read LCD Screen There is also a read only LED Screen with enhanced visibility that can be read from a greater distance The EOI provides easy access to the many monitoring and programming features of the ASD The motor control software is menu driven which allows for easy access to the motor control
147. Torque Monitor 2 0 01 3035 FE35 RR Input 1 3036 FE36 VII V I Input 1 3037 FE37 RX Input See Note 2 1 3038 FE38 RX2 Option AI1 Input See Note 2 1 3039 FE39 RX2 Option AI Input 1 3040 FE40 FM Output 1 3041 FE41 AM Output 1 Note 1 Ifno PG feedback is used an estimated speed value is displayed Note 2 My Function cannot process negative values A negative value is processed by My Function as an absolute value G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 241 Table 10 Continued Input Function Target selections and the associated Communications Number Input Setting Communication Number FM AM FP Comm Monitor Comm Function Resolution Unit Input Namber Display Input Niner Setting Setting 3050 FESO Communication Data Output 2 3051 FES1 Communication Data Output 1 3052 FES2 Communication Data Output 3 3060 FE60 My Function Monitor 1 Output of Unsigned Value 3061 FE61 My Function Monitor 2 Output of Unsigned Value 3062 FE62 My Function Monitor 3 Output of Signed Value 3063 FE63 My Function Monitor 4 Output of Signed Value 3066 FE66 Expansion I O Card 1 CPU Version 3067 FE67 Expansion I O Card 2 CPU Version 3076 FE76 Integral Input Power 0 01 kW 3077 FE77 Integral Output Power 0 01 kW 3084 FE84 16 Bit BIN BCD Input Value 1 242 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Table 11 My Function Operator selections My Function Computatio
148. V f Curves may be useful in starting high inertia loads such as rotary drum vacuum filters Output t l F199 Fl F1 i Jf PISS PT A ey A Output 4 4 4 4 4 Frequenc Hz G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 101 F191 F192 Vif 5 Point Setting Voltage 1 Program gt Special gt V f 5 Point Setting The V f 5 Point Setting Voltage 1 establishes the output voltage level that is to be associated with the frequency setting of F190 V f 5 Point Setting Frequency 1 The F701 parameter setting will determine if the on screen selection for this parameter appears in the form of a Voltage V or as a Percentage of the ASD rating If using Voltage as a unit of measure and with no voltage correction F307 Disabled the limit of the on screen display value for this parameter is 200 volts for the 230 volt ASD and 400 volts for the 460 volt ASD The actual output voltage is scaled to the maximum EOI display values e g a 100 volt EOI display corresponds to a 115 volt actual output for the 230 volt ASD of the full display range If using as a unit of measure and with no voltage correction F307 Disabled the ASD output voltage will be the percentage setting times 230 for the 230 volt unit or times 460 volts for the 460 volt unit See F190 for additional information on this setting F199 EDI Display m 100 or 200 Volts 230 Volt ASD
149. Version read only G9 EOI Ver DB ASD Type CPU Code Version N A G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 51 Program Mode Menu Navigation Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Peramedar Number UTILITIES CPU Code Revision MC Version Version read only MC Revision Main Board EEPROM Version N A Main Monitor Monitor 1 Selections Monitor View Trace Data View Trace Data PROTECTION Abnormal Speed Detection Time F622 Bene nnalopeed Over Speed Detection Frequency Upper Band F623 Settings Over Speed Detection Frequency Lower Band F624 voe Supply Voltage Correction F307 DC Injection Braking Start Frequency F250 DC Injection Braking Current F251 DC Injection Braking DC Injection Braking Time F252 Forward Reverse DC Injection Braking Priority F253 Motor Shaft Stationary Control F254 Dynamic Braking Enable F304 Dynamic Braking Resistance F308 Dynamic Braking Continuous Dynamic Braking Capacity F309 Braking Resistance Overload Time 10x Rated Torque F639 Emergency Off Emergency Off F603 Settings Emergency DC Injection Braking Control Time F604 Low Current Trip F610 Low Current Detection Current F611 Low Current Settings Low Current Detection Time F612 Low Current Detection Hysteresis Width F609 Motor Overload Protection Configuration F017 Overload Overload Reduction Start Frequency F606 52 G9 ASD Install
150. Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 50 Units Acceleration Time 3 Program gt Special Accel Decel 1 4 Settings This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the output of the ASD to go from 0 0 Hz to the Maximum Frequency for the 3 Acceleration profile The Accel Decel pattern may be set using F502 The minimum Accel Decel time may be set using F508 An acceleration time shorter than that which the load will allow may cause nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads Automatic Accel Decel Stall and Ridethrough settings may lengthen the acceleration times Note 168 Direct Access Number F510 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD Dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum 6000 Units Seconds G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F511 F514 Deceleration Time 3 Program gt Special Accel Decel 1 4 Settings This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the output of the ASD to go from the Maximum Frequency to 0 0 Hz for the 3 Deceleration profile The Accel Decel pattern may be set using F502 The minimum Accel Decel time may be set using F508 Note A deceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads Automatic Accel Decel Stall and Ridethrough settings may lengthen the deceleration times Direct Access Number F511 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Def
151. able During Run No Preset Speed 9 Operation Mode Program gt Pattern Run gt Operation Mode Same as Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode see F561 Direct Access Number F569 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Forward Run Changeable During Run No Preset Speed 10 Operation Mode Program gt Pattern Run gt Operation Mode Same as Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode see F561 Direct Access Number F570 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Forward Run Changeable During Run No Preset Speed 11 Operation Mode Program gt Pattern Run gt Operation Mode Same as Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode see F561 Direct Access Number F571 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Forward Run Changeable During Run No Preset Speed 12 Operation Mode Program gt Pattern Run gt Operation Mode Same as Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode see F561 Direct Access Number F572 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Forward Run Changeable During Run No Preset Speed 13 Operation Mode Program gt Pattern Run gt Operation Mode Same as Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode see F561 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F573 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Forward Run Changeable During Run No 181 F574 F602 Preset Speed 14 Operation Mode Progra
152. able During Run Yes Settings 0 Linear 1 S Pattern 1 2 S Pattern 2 166 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F504 F505 Acc Dec Pattern 1 4 Program gt Special gt Acc Dec Special Four Acceleration times and four Deceleration times may be set up and run individually Accel Decel Time 1 4 may be selected using this parameter setting or switched via threshold frequencies or by discrete input terminal This parameter is used to select one of the four configured accel decel profiles to be used Settings 1 Acc Dec 1 2 Acc Dec 2 3 Acc Dec 3 4 Acc Dec 4 Each Accel Decel selection is comprised of an Acceleration Time Deceleration Time and a Pattern selection Selection 1 2 and 3 have a Switching Frequency setting The Switching Frequency is used as a threshold frequency that once reached the ASD switches to the next Acc Dee selection Switching Frequency settings are used during acceleration and deceleration A switching frequency setting is not required for Acc Dec 4 Acc Dec 1 is set up using parameters F009 Acc Time F010 Dec Time F502 Pattern and F505 Switching Frequency Acc Dec 2 is set up using parameters F500 Acc Time F501 Dec Time F503 Pattern and F513 Switching Frequency Acc Dec 3 is set up using parameters F510 Acc Time F511 Dec Time F512 Pattern and F517 Switching Frequency Acc Dec 4 is set up using parameters F514 Acc Tim
153. actory Default ASD Dependent Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F377 F401 PG Disconnection Detection Program gt Feedback gt PG Settings This parameter Enables Disables the system s monitoring of the PG connection status when using encoders with line driver outputs Note The PG Vector Feedback Board option is required to use this feature Settings 0 Disabled 1 Enabled with Filter 3 Enabled Detect Momentary Power Fail F377 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default ASD Dependent Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Simple Positioning Completion Range Program gt Feedback gt PG Settings While operating in the Positioning Control mode this parameter sets the range of accuracy for a Stop command initiated via the terminal board If the setting is too low the stop may be too abrupt F381 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 1 Maximum 4000 Autotuning 1 Program gt Motor gt Vector Motor Model This parameter sets the Autotune command status Selecting Reset Motor Defaults for this parameter sets parameters F410 F411 F412 and F413 to the factory default settings If selecting Autotune on Run Command Autotune Initiated by Input Terminal or Autotune of Detail Parameters for
154. actory Default 0 NOP This parameter is used to assign a user selected logical operator to two user selected Input Function Target variables enable a counter timer function or perform a hold reset function Table 11 on pg 243 lists the available selections Their use and selection requirements are described in an example at F977 Input Function Target 2 Direct Access Number F914 Program gt My Function gt My Function Unit 3 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 Disabled This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 2 terminal Changeable During Run Yes This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target 2 terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 7 on pg 238 Table 8 on pg 239 or Table 10 on pg 241 See F977 for more information on this parameter Input Function Command 2 Direct Access Number F915 Program gt My Function gt My Function Unit 3 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 NOP This parameter is used to assign a user selected logical operator to two user selected Input Function Target variables enable a counter timer function or perform a hold reset function Table 11 on pg 243 lists the available selections Their use and selection requirements are described in an example at F977 216 G9 ASD I
155. al Block Allows for Command control input via the Terminal Board 1 Not Used Unused 2 EOI Keypad This setting is used for EOI command control 3 RS485 This setting is used to transfer commands to the ASD via RS485 4 wire 4 Communication Option Board Use this setting if using the optional Communication Board for command control Frequency Control 02 06 Selections F004 Frequency Mode 1 The following is a listing with descriptions of the Frequency Mode F004 selections Program gt Fundamental gt Standard Mode Selection gt Frequency Mode 1 Settings 1 VIM V D Used when a 0 to 10 volt DC analog input or a 0 20 mA DC current input is used as the speed control input Only one input signal type may be used at a time Set SW301 to the desired signal type 2 RR Used for a 0 to 10 volt DC analog input signal 3 RX Used for a 10 to 10 volt DC analog input signal 4 Not Used Unused 5 EOI Keypad Used for EOI frequency control 6 RS485 Used to transfer speed commands to the ASD via RS485 4 wire G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 39 40 7 Communication Option Board Use this setting if using the optional Communication Board for frequency control 8 RX2 Option AI1 Used for a 10 to 10 volt DC analog input signal 9 Option V I Allows for the use of the optional voltage current frequency control interface 10 UP DOWN Frequency A discrete termi
156. al while operating in the Local mode the ASD output to the motor will cease this parameter setting is used to allow for the reactivation of the motor without user intervention upon the reactivation of the ST terminal Upon reactivation of the ST terminal in this condition the ASD will resume the Run condition and the motor will start 1 Retain Run Command This feature may be Disabled and the Run command must be re initiated by the user for ASD operation 0 Clear Panel Run Command N DANGER WHEN ENABLED THE ASD WILL RESUME THE RUN CONDITION WHEN THE ST TERMINAL IS REACTIVATED Settings 0 Clear Panel Run Command 1 Retain Panel Run Command 198 F719 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default Retain Panel Run Command Changeable During Run Yes G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F721 F729 Panel Stop Pattern Program gt Special gt Operation Panel Parameters While operating in the Local mode this parameter determines the method used to stop the motor when the stop command is issued via the EOI The Decel Stop setting enables the Dynamic Braking system that is setup at F304 or the DC Injection Braking system that is setup at F250 F251 and F252 The Coast Stop setting allows the motor to stop at the rate allowed by the inertia of the load Settings 0 Deceleration Stop 1 Coast Stop Note The Stop Pattern setting has no ef
157. allation and Operation Manual F424 F426 Load Sharing Gain Input Program gt Torque gt Torque Control This parameter Enables Disables the Load Sharing Gain input function This feature is enabled by selecting a Load Sharing Gain input signal source Settings 0 Disabled 1 VII V D 2 RR 3 RX 4 Panel Keypad 5 RS485 2 Wire 6 RS485 4 Wire 7 Communication Option Board 8 RX2 Option AIl Direct Access Number F424 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run Yes Forward Speed Limit Input Program gt Torque gt Torque Speed Limiting This parameter Enables Disables the Forward Speed Limit Input control function When enabled and operating in the Torque Control mode the forward speed limit is controlled by the input selected here If Setting is selected the value set at F426 is used as the Forward Speed Limit input Settings 0 Disabled 1 VII V D 2 RR 3 RX 4 F426 Setting F425 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Forward Speed Limit Level Program gt Torque gt Torque Control This parameter provides a value to be used as the Forward Speed Limit setting if F426 Setting is selected at F425 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F426 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 80 0 Direct
158. allow may cause nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads Automatic Accel Decel Stall and Ridethrough settings may lengthen the acceleration times Note Acceleration The acceleration rate of a motor is determined by several factors applied power applied load and the physical properties of the motor winding parameters motor size etc The ASD will control the first of these factors input power The settings of the ASD will control the frequency and amplitude of the applied voltage to the motor Under most operating conditions as the output frequency of the drive goes up so does the output voltage linear acceleration The ASD has the ability to modify the relationship between frequency and voltage automatically to produce smoother operation or increased starting torque See F502 F009 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD Dependent Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum 6000 Units Seconds Deceleration Time 1 Program gt Fundamental gt Accel Decel 1 Settings This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the output of the ASD to go from the Maximum Frequency to 0 0 Hz for the 1 Deceleration profile The Accel Decel pattern may be set using F502 When operating with the Automatic Accel Decel enabled F000 the minimum accel decel time may be set using F508 Note A deceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause
159. am Mode Menu Navigation Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name raha PATTERN RUN V f Group F573 Torque Limit Group Preset Speed 14 Direction Acc Dec Group F574 V f Group Operation Mode Torque Limit Group Preset Speed 15 Direction Acc Dec Group F575 V f Group Torque Limit Group Speed 1 Operation Time F540 Speed 2 Operation Time F541 Speed 3 Operation Time F542 Speed 4 Operation Time F543 Speed 5 Operation Time F544 Speed 6 Operation Time F545 Speed 7 Operation Time F546 Operation Time Speed 8 Operation Time F547 Speed 9 Operation Time F548 Speed 10 Operation Time F549 Speed 11 Operation Time F550 Speed 12 Operation Time F551 Speed 13 Operation Time F552 Speed 14 Operation Time F553 Speed 15 Operation Time F554 Pattern Operation F520 Pattern Run Pattern Operation Mode F521 Pattern 1 Repeat F522 68 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Program Mode Menu Navigation Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name nana PATTERN RUN Pattern Run Pattern 2 Repeat F531 Pattern Group 1 Selection 1 F523 Pattern Group 1 Selection 2 F524 Pattern Group 1 Selection 3 F525 Pattern Group Selection 4 F526 Pattern Group Selection 5 BSD Pattern Group 1 Selection 6 F528 Pattern Group 1 Selection 7 F529 Pattern Group 1 Selection 8 F530 Sp
160. ameter Direct Access Number F290 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum Lower Limit F013 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz Preset Speed 12 Program gt Frequency Preset Speeds This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 1100 and is identified as Preset Speed 12 The binary number is applied to S1 S4 of the Terminal Board to output the Preset Speed see F018 for more information on this parameter Direct Access Number F291 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum Lower Limit F013 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz Preset Speed 13 Program gt Frequency Preset Speeds This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 1101 and is identified as Preset Speed 13 The binary number is applied to S1 S4 of the Terminal Board to output the Preset Speed see F018 for more information on this parameter Direct Access Number F292 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum Lower Limit F013 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz Preset Speed 14 Program gt Frequency Preset Speeds This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 1110 and is identified as Preset Speed 14 The binary number is applied to S1 S4 of the Terminal Board to output the Preset S
161. ameter is used to set the functionality of the OUT1 discrete output terminals O1A and O1B The O1A and O1B OUT1 output terminals change states open or close as a function of a user selected event See Table 8 on pg 239 for listing the possible assignments for the OUT1 terminals In addition the output terminals must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed See parameter F669 for more information on this setting F130 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default Low Speed Signal Changeable During Run No Output Terminal 2 OUT2 Function Program gt Terminal gt Output Terminals This parameter is used to set the functionality of the OUT2 discrete output terminals O2A and O2B The O2A and O2B OUT2 output terminals change states open or close as a function of a user selected event See Table 8 on pg 239 for listing the possible assignments for the OUT2 terminals In addition the output terminals must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed See parameter F669 for more information on this setting 92 F131 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default RCH Acc Dec Complete Direct Access Number Changeable During Run No G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F132 F134 Output Terminal 3 FL Function Program gt Terminal gt Output Terminals This parameter is used to set the functionality of the FL output te
162. anual Over Torque Detection Hysteresis 186 Pattern Group Preset 44 Over Torque Detection Level Negative Torque 186 Pattern Operation Mode 170 Over Torque Detection Level Positive Torque 186 Pattern Run 65 Over Torque Detection Time 186 Pattern Time 44 Over Torque Parameters 53 PC 16 Over Torque Trip 185 Permanent Magnet PM Motor Constant 1 164 Over Voltage 247 Permanent Magnet PM Motor Constant 2 164 PG Disconnection Detection 151 PG Input Point 1 Frequency 122 PG Input Point 1 Setting 122 PG Input Point 2 Frequency 123 PG Input Point 2 Setting 123 Over Voltage During Acceleration 252 Over Voltage During Deceleration 252 Over Voltage During Run 252 Over Voltage Limit Operation 136 Over Voltage Limit Operation Level 187 P P24 23 P24 Output 25 PA 16 Panel Load Sharing Gain 199 Panel Operation Jog Mode 127 Panel Override Multiplication Gain 199 Panel Stop Pattern 199 Panel Tension Torque Bias 199 Panel Torque Bias 143 Panel Torque Command 199 Panel Torque Gain 143 Parameter Write Lockout 196 Part Numbering Convention 254 Password 69 Past Trip 1 44 Past Trip 2 44 Past Trip 3 44 Past Trip 4 45 Pattern 1 Repeat 171 Pattern 2 Repeat 174 Pattern Group 1 Selection 1 172 Pattern Group 1 Selection 2 173 PG Settings 61 Phase Loss 53 PID Control Switching 147 PID Control Wait Time 149 PID Deviation Lower Limit 149 PID Deviation Upper Limit
163. arameter Type Numerical Factory Default 512 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 1 Maximum 1280 MON2 Terminal Meter Selection Program gt Terminal gt Analog Output Terminals This parameter is used to set the output function of the MON2 analog output terminal The available assignments for this output terminal are listed in Table 6 on pg 237 The MON2 analog output terminal produces an output voltage or current that is proportional to the magnitude of the function assigned to this terminal Note The Expansion IO Card Option 2 option board P N ETB004Z is required to use this terminal See the Expansion IO Card Option 2 Instruction Manual P N 58686 for more information on the function of this terminal MON2 Terminal Setup Parameters F674 MON2 Output Function F675 MON2 Terminal Meter Adjustment F691 MON Voltage Current Output Switching F692 MON2 Output Gradient Characteristic F693 MON2 Bias Adjustment Set Zero Level G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F674 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default Output Frequency Changeable During Run Yes 193 F675 F682 MON2 Terminal Adjustment Program gt Terminal gt Analog Output Terminals This parameter is used to set the gain of the MON2 output terminal and is used in conjunction with the settings of parameter F674 See parameter
164. arget 3 terminal Changeable During Run Yes This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target 3 terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 7 on pg 238 Table 8 on pg 239 or Table 10 on pg 241 See F977 for more information on this parameter Output Function Assigned Direct Access Number F958 Program gt My Function gt My Function Unit 7 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 Disabled This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the Output Function Assigned terminal Ctiangeable During Ruri Yes This setting assigns the function of the programmable Output Function Assigned data location to one of the functions listed in the Input Setting field of Table 8 on pg 239 Settings 0 3099 See the My Function Instruction Manual P N E6581335 and F977 for more information on this parameter G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 225 F959 F962 Analog Input Function Target 11 Direct Access Number F959 Program My Function My Function Analog Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 Disabled This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the programmable Analog Input Function Target 11 terminal Changeable During Run Yes The function selected at F961 may be adjusted using the input analog
165. art Frequency may be output from the drive If the setting of this parameter results in an over current condition at startup reduce the setting of this parameter to a value less than the rated slippage of the motor If zero speed torque is required set this parameter and F243 to 0 0 Hz This setting will override the setting of F244 if this setting has a higher value This parameter setting is used during a Jog as the Lower Limit Frequency see F260 Direct Access Number F240 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 10 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz Run Frequency Program gt Special Frequency Control This parameter establishes a center frequency Run Frequency of a frequency band Parameter F242 provides a plus or minus value for the Run Frequency thus establishing a frequency band During acceleration the drive will not output a signal to the motor until the lower level of the band is reached During deceleration the drive will continue to output the programmed deceleration signal to the motor until the lower level of the band is reached at which time the output will go to 0 0 Hz G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F241 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz 123 F242 F251 Run F
166. ase Frequency Voltage 4 is the Motor 4 output voltage at the Base Frequency F178 Regardless of the programmed value the output voltage cannot be higher than the input voltage The actual output voltage will be influenced by the input voltage of the ASD and the Supply Voltage Compensation setting F307 This parameter is used only when the parameters for Motor Set 4 are configured and selected Motor Set 4 may be selected by a properly configured input terminal see Table 5 on pg 234 F179 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD Dependent Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 50 0 Maximum 660 0 Units Volts Manual Torque Boost 4 Program gt Motor gt Motor Set 4 The Manual Torque Boost 4 function is used to increase the low frequency torque for high inertia loads by increasing the output voltage at frequencies below of the 4 Base Frequency setting F178 See parameter F016 Manual Torque Boost 1 for an explanation of torque boost This parameter is used only when the parameters for Motor Set 4 are configured and selected Motor Set 4 may be selected by a properly configured input terminal see Table 5 on pg 234 Motor Overload Protection Level 4 Program gt Motor gt Motor Set 4 The Motor 4 Overload Protection Level parameter specifies the motor overload current level for Motor Set 4 This value is entered as either a percentage of the full load
167. ase the Carrier Frequency setting as a function of an increased current requirement Selection 2 or 3 may also include an output voltage drop as a function of an increased current requirement The Carrier Frequency should be set below 4 kHz Settings 0 No Decrease and No Limit 1 Valid Decrease and No Limit 2 No Decrease and Limit Small Pulse 4 Valid Decrease and Limit Small Pulse F316 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default Valid Decrease and No Limit Changeable During Run Yes Synchronized Deceleration Time No Path Direct Access Only In the event that the Ridethrough function activates in a multiple motor application it will be necessary to manage the stopping motors synchronously as not to damage the product being processed e g wire spools bobbin winder for textile machines etc This parameter is used to minimize the product breakage during a momentary power outage This function stops multiple machines simultaneously or makes them reach their respective command frequencies simultaneously by regulating their deceleration times See parameter F302 for more information on this setting 138 F317 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 2 0 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum 6000 0 Units Seconds G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F318 F322 Synchronized A
168. ation Runs speed as commanded by the Frequency Mode setting Dwell Signal Used in conjunction with the Acceleration Deceleration Suspend function F349 suspends the ie sy Accel Decel function for the duration of the activation 62 63 Power Failure Synchronized Signal Activates the Synchronized Accel Decel function of the Regenerative Power Ridethrough feature See F302 for more information on this terminal setting 64 65 My Function Run Activates the configured My Function feature See F977 for more information on this parameter 66 67 Autotuning Signal Initiates the Autotune function Set F400 to Autotuning by Input Terminal Signal Speed Gain Switching Toggles the ASD operating mode from and to Speed Control and Torque Control 68 69 Speed Control operation references parameter settings F460 and F461 Torque Control operation references parameter settings F462 and F463 70 71 Servo Lock Holds the motor at 0 Hz until a Run command is received Simple Positioning While operating in the Positioning Control mode activation initiates the Stop command 12 73 See F381 for more information on this terminal setting 74 75 kWH Display Clear Clears the kWH meter display Trace Back Trigger Initiates the data Read Store function of the Trace Selection parameter See F740 for more 76 77 i information on this feature 78 79 Light Load High Speed Di
169. ation and Operation Manual Program Mode Menu Navigation Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name hand COMMUNICATIONS Communication Option DeviceNet Profibus Setting 8 F841 Communication Option DeviceNet Profibus Setting 9 F842 Communication Option DeviceNet Profibus Setting 10 F843 Communication Option DeviceNet Profibus Setting 11 F844 Communication Option DeviceNet Profibus Setting 12 F845 Communication Option DeviceNet Profibus Setting 13 F846 Disconnection Detection Extended Time F850 ASD Operation at Disconnection F851 Preset Speed Operation F852 Communication Option Station Address Monitor F853 Communication Settings Communication Option Speed Switch Monitor F854 DeviceNet CC Link Block Write Data 1 F870 Block Write Data 2 F871 Block Read Data 1 F875 Block Read Data 2 F876 Block Read Data 3 F877 Block Read Data 4 F878 Block Read Data 5 F879 Free Notes F880 Network Option Reset Setting F899 IP Sub Net Ethernet Settings Gateway N A DHCP Mode MAC ID PATTERN RUN Preset Speed Operation Mode F560 Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode Direction F561 Acc Dec Group G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 65 Program Mode Menu Navigation Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Parameter Number PATTERN RUN 66 Operation Mode V f Group Torque Limit Group F561 Pres
170. ation and Operation Manual Program Mode Menu Navigation Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Botarpeter Number PROTECTION Motor 150 Overload Time Limit F607 Overload ASD Overload F631 Over Torque Trip F615 Over Torque Detection Level During Power Running F616 Over Torque Over Torque Detection Level During Regenerative F617 Parameters Braking Over Torque Detection Time F618 Over Torque Detection Hysteresis F619 ASD Output Phase Loss Detection F605 Phase Loss ASD Input Phase Loss Detection F608 Auto Restart Enable F301 Number of Times to Retry F303 Retry Restart Ridethrough Time F310 Random Mode F312 Over Voltage Limit Operation F305 Stall Prevention Factor 1 F416 Power Running Stall Continuous Trip Detection Time F452 Stall Stall Prevention During Regeneration F453 Stall Prevention Level F601 Over Voltage Limit Operation Level F626 Trip Settings Retain Trip Record at Power Down F602 Regenerative Power Ridethrough Mode F302 Synchronized Deceleration Time F317 Under Voltage Synchronized Acceleration Time F318 Ridethrough Under Voltage Trip F627 Under Voltage Trip Alarm Detection Time F628 Regenerative Power Ridethrough Control Level F629 Short Circuit Detection at Start F613 Special Protection Cooling Fan Control F620 Parameters Cumulative Operation Time Alarm Setting F621 Brake Answer Wait Time F630 G9 ASD Installat
171. ault ASD Dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum 6000 Units Seconds Acceleration Deceleration Pattern 3 Program gt Special gt Accel Decel 1 4 Settings This parameter enables a user selected preprogrammed output profile that controls the acceleration and deceleration pattern for the 3 Accel Decel parameter Settings 0 Linear 1 S Pattern 1 2 S Pattern 2 Direct Access Number F512 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Linear Changeable During Run Yes Acceleration Deceleration Switching Frequency 2 Program gt Special gt Accel Decel Special This parameter sets the frequency at which the acceleration control is switched from the Accel 2 profile to the Accel 3 profile during a multiple acceleration profile configuration Direct Access Number F513 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz Acceleration Time 4 Program gt Special Accel Decel 1 4 Settings This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the output of the ASD to go from 0 0 Hz to the Maximum Frequency for the 4 Acceleration profile The Accel Decel pattern may be set using F502 The minimum Accel Decel time may be set using F508 An acceleration time shorter than that which the load will allow may cause nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to load
172. ause an Changeable During Run Yes Over Voltage Stall An Over Voltage Stall increases the output frequency of the drive during deceleration for a specified time in an attempt to prevent an Over Voltage Trip If the over voltage threshold level setting of parameter F626 is exceeded for over 4 mS an Over Voltage Trip will be incurred Note This parameter setting may increase deceleration times Settings 0 Enabled Over Voltage Stall 1 Disabled 2 Enabled Forced Shorted Deceleration 3 Enabled Forced Dynamic Braking Deceleration 136 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F307 F310 Supply Voltage Correction Program gt Protection gt Base Frequency Voltage This parameter Enables Disables the Voltage Compensation function When Enabled this function provides a constant V f ratio during periods of input voltage fluctuations Settings 0 Disabled Output Voltage Unlimited 1 Enabled Supply Voltage Compensation 2 Disabled Output Voltage Limited 3 Enabled Supply Voltage Compensation w Output Voltage Limited F307 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled Direct Access Number Changeable During Run No Dynamic Braking Resistance Program gt Protection gt Dynamic Braking This parameter is used to input the resistive value of the Dynamic Braking Resistor being used Light duty and heavy duty resistors vary from a few o
173. be recorded and output as the Peak Minimum or Normal Avg value as selected at parameter F972 Select the Monitor Display Input Setting number from Table 10 on pg 241 to output the corresponding function Use the Communication Number if operating using communications See the My Function Instruction Manual P N E6581335 for a complete description of the setup requirements and operational information of the Monitor Output Function parameter F971 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 2000 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Monitor Output Function Command 41 Program My Function gt My Function Monitor This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by allowing the user to select the Peak Minimum or Normal Avg value of the parameter F971 selection to be recorded and output as a monitored function Settings 0 Normal 1 Peak 2 Minimum See the My Function Instruction Manual P N E6581335 for a complete description of the setup requirements and operational information of the Monitor Output Function parameter G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F972 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default Normal Changeable During Run Yes 229 F973 F976 Virtual Input Terminal 1 Selection Direct Access Number F973 Program gt Terminal gt Input Terminals Parameter Type Selection Lis
174. be used in the event that Setting F729 is selected for the Frequency Override Multiplying Input F661 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F729 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 100 00 Maximum 100 00 Units 199 F730 F737 Panel Frequency Lockout Program gt Special gt Operation Panel Parameters This parameter is model specific and has no function on the G9 ASD system Settings 0 Unlocked 1 Locked Direct Access Number F730 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Unlocked Changeable During Run Yes Panel Emergency Off Lockout Program gt Special Operation Panel Parameters This parameter is model specific and has no function on the G9 ASD system Settings 0 Unlocked 1 Locked Direct Access Number F734 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Unlocked Changeable During Run No Panel Reset Lockout Program gt Special gt Operation Panel Parameters This parameter is model specific and has no function on the G9 ASD system Settings 0 Unlocked 1 Locked Direct Access Number F735 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Unlocked Changeable During Run Yes Command Mode Frequency Mode Change Lockout Program gt Utilities Prohibition This parameter is model specific and has no funct
175. ble During Run No Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz Vif 5 Point Setting Voltage 5 Program gt Special gt V f 5 Point Setting The V f 5 Point Setting Voltage 5 establishes the output voltage level that is to be associated with the frequency setting of F198 V f 5 Point Setting Frequency 5 The F701 parameter setting will determine if the selection for this parameter appears in the form of a Voltage V or as a Percentage of the ASD rating The default setting is See F190 and F191 for additional information on this setting Direct Access Number F199 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 0 Maximum 100 0 Units V or F701 Frequency Priority Selection Program gt Fundamental Standard Mode Selection Either Frequency Mode 1 or Frequency Mode 2 may control the output frequency of the ASD This parameter determines which of the two will control the output frequency and the conditions in which control will be switched from one to the other Note Frequency Mode is abbreviated as FMOD Settings 0 FMOD changed by Terminal Board Frequency Mode 1 FMOD F208 Frequency Mode The Frequency Mode 1 or Frequency Mode 2 selection specifies the source of the input frequency command signal These selections are performed at F004 and F207 respectively If FMOD changed by Terminal Board is selected here
176. boost percentage establishes an output voltage vs output frequency relationship to be used to start the motor or to provide smoother operation gt Frequer Dutput Volta Setting an excessive Torque Boost level may cause nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads Note F016 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD Dependent Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 30 0 Units 82 Motor Overload Protection Configuration Program gt Protection Overload This parameter is used to protect the motor from an over current condition The type of motor being used and the Overload Stall setting is selected here to better match the application This parameter setting may extend the Over Voltage Stall time settings This parameter may be affected by the setting of the Power Running Stall Continuous Trip Detection Time F452 Settings 0 Overload Trip without Stall 1 Overload Trip with Stall 2 No Overload without Stall 3 Stall Only 4 V f Motor Overload without Stall 5 V f Motor Overload with Stall 6 V f Motor No Overload without Stall 7 V f Motor Stall Only F017 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default O L Trip No Stall Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F018 F019 Preset Speed 1 Program gt Frequenc
177. caesnaeeseentens 10 Low Speed Operation sesinin bsccees echoes cdc bok dee ER E std a S E AEE R 10 Overload Protection Adjustment 0 0 cccccccseesecsecesecesceeeeeceseeneceseeeeecaeeasecseesaecseceaeeeenseens 10 Operation Above 60 HZ e e aa aeae ea a E E i E E E E E A 10 Power Factor Correction siorino eri ieii ii i i pE E E EA 11 Light Load Conditions esseere ee aa n nn 11 Motor Load Combinations cccceseescescesseesecacescecaceaeceecesesseeeseeeeceseeneeeaeeeeecaeenseeeeneens 11 Load Produced Negative Torque cccceccessesssessessecsseesecesceseeeenseseceseeceeeaeeneecaeeeseeeeneees 12 Motor Braking succccvtte noi ian wk Hated ohtaat eae es a Ps ee ES es 12 G9 ASD Characteristics coses ssiri soseer eserse torio noros E no s n E aoo 13 Over Current Protect On worte is hy ec e s a ei E O E en ee eG 13 ASD Capacity ci ae Ac ets Ribak MA ee S ES 13 Using Vector Control nece gorenen i eee hist hice eleva ean E A EE 13 Installation and Connections 3 cicscsdesecdsccscenediscsdscsedissotesacedeiacs sevsevsiesssseseass sadendeSecssdeededsusseves 14 Installation Notes siint teehee ee ee Re 14 Mounting the ASD iv cc cccccs cneccccneds Aectenee el EAEE fleece E ga ives E AEE 15 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Connecting the ASD aiee n darn teas baad ane N aA E ee ce 16 Lead Length Specifications i0cccreetetrseievivess r r r En aS 20 VO and Control secere eoii iaei i E E a E E casevdeessceveeeesoude
178. calibrate the FM analog output connect a meter current or voltage as described at F005 With the drive running at a known value e g output frequency adjust this parameter until the assigned function produces the desired DC level output at the FM output terminal See F005 for more information on this setting 78 Direct Access Number F006 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 493 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 1 Maximum 1280 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F007 F008 Type Reset Direct Access Number F007 Program gt Utilities Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default None This feature assists the user when performing fault analysis or by allowing a quick system setup change when required Performing a Type Reset results in one of the following user selected post reset configurations Changeable During Run No Settings 0 None 1 50 Hz Setting 2 60 Hz Setting 3 Reset to Factory Settings 4 Clear Past Trips 5 Clear Run Timer 6 Initialize Typeform 7 Save User Settings 8 Restore User Settings 9 Clear Cumulative Fan Timer 10 Accel Decel Time Setting 0 01 600 0 Seconds 11 Accel Decel Time Setting 0 1 6000 0 Seconds 12 Update EOI Firmware 13 Set EOI Memory to Default 14 Save User Settings to EOI 15 Restore User Settings from EOI Note User settings stored in the memory
179. capacitor or surge absorber to the output of the ASD If the ASD is used with a motor that is equipped with a capacitor for power factor correction remove the capacitor from the motor Connecting either of these devices to the output of the ASD may cause the ASD to malfunction and trip or the output device may cause an over current condition resulting in damage to the device or the ASD Light Load Conditions When a motor is operated under a continuous light load i e at a load of less than 50 of its rated capacity or it drives a load which produces a very small amount of inertia it may become unstable and produce abnormal vibration or trips because of an over current condition In such a case the carrier frequency may be lowered to compensate for this undesirable condition see Program gt Special gt Carrier Frequency gt PWM Carrier Frequency Note When operating in the Vector Control mode the carrier frequency should be set to 2 2 kHz or above Motor Load Combinations When the ASD is used in combination with one of the following motors or loads it may result in unstable operation e A motor with a rated capacity that exceeds the motor capacity recommended for the ASD e An explosion proof motor When using the ASD with an explosion proof motor or other special motor types lower the carrier frequency to stabilize the operation DO NOT set the carrier frequency below 2 2 kHz if operating the system in the vector control
180. cation information The Support Center is open from 8 a m to 5 p m CST Monday through Friday The Center s toll free number is US 800 231 1412 Fax 713 937 9349 Canada 800 527 1204 For after hours support follow the directions in the outgoing message when calling You may also contact Toshiba by writing to Toshiba International Corporation 13131 West Little York Road Houston Texas 77041 9990 Attn ASD Product Manager For further information on Toshiba s products and services please visit our web site at www toshiba com ind TOSHIBA INTERNATIONAL CORPORATION G9 Adjustable Speed Drive Please complete the Warranty Card supplied with the G9 ASD and return it to Toshiba by prepaid mail This will activate the 12 month warranty from the date of installation but shall not exceed 18 months from the shipping date Complete the following information and retain for your records Model Number Serial Number Project Number if applicable Date of Installation Inspected By Name of Application Table of Contents General Safety Information cscscssssssessesscsscssssssssssssesessssssesssesecesensesesessesessessesseseeeee 1 Safety Alert Symbol ee ace na anki a at die Aah ae aN oth NE 1 Signal Words ooe 2scccccsceds csec cdsccsscbeedsceese ai dua custa EEA A A lesen EERTE E 1 Special Symbols ee or E E EE E cnet 2 Equipment Warning Labels ccecccecsesesss
181. cceleration Time No Path Direct Access Only In the event that the Ridethrough function activates in a multiple motor application it will be necessary to manage the accelerating motors synchronously as not to damage the product being processed e g wire spools bobbin winder for textile machines etc This parameter is used to minimize the product breakage during a momentary power outage This function orchestrates the acceleration of multiple machines simultaneously or makes them reach their respective command frequencies simultaneously by regulating their acceleration times See parameter F302 for more information on this setting F318 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 2 0 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 10 Maximum 6000 0 Units Seconds Drooping Gain Program gt Feedback gt Drooping Control This parameter sets the effective 100 output torque level while operating in the Drooping Control mode This value is the upper torque limit of the motor being driven by a given ASD while operating in the Drooping Control mode Note The maximum frequency output is not limited by the setting of F011 while operating in the Drooping Control mode Drooping Drooping Control also called Load Share is used to share the load among two or more mechanically coupled motors Unlike Stall which reduces the output frequency in order to limit the load once the load reaches
182. ce with Article 250 of the 2008 NEC or Section 10 Part One of the Canadian Electrical Code CEC The grounding conductor shall be sized in accordance with Article 250 122 of the NEC or Part One Table 6 of the CEC The Metal Of Conduit Is Not An Acceptable Ground The input output and control lines of the system shall be run in separate metal conduits and each shall have its own ground conductor ASDs produce high frequency noise steps must be taken during installation to avoid the negative effects of noise Listed below are some examples of measures that will help to combat noise problems e DONOT install the input power and output power wires in the same duct or in parallel with each other and do not bind them together e DONOT install the input output power wires and the wires of the control circuit in the same duct or in parallel with each other and do not bind them together e Use shielded wires or twisted wires for the control circuits Ensure that the grounding terminals G E of the ASD are securely connected to ground Connect a surge suppressor to every electromagnetic contactor and every relay installed near the ASD e Install noise filters as required Grounding Capacitor The Grounding Capacitor plays a role in minimizing the effects of leakage current through the ASD system and through ground paths to other systems Leakage current may cause the improper operation of earth leakage current breaker
183. ceive priority over commands from the EOI See F260 for more information on using the Jog function See F250 F252 for more information on DC Injection Braking Settings 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 16 Bit Binary BCD Input Direct Access Number F107 Program Terminal gt Input Special Functions Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default None The extended terminal function is used with the Expansion IO Card Option P N ETB004Z Changeable During Run No This parameter defines the format of the binary or BCD data when using the option card Note The Expansion IO Card Option 2 option board is required to use this terminal See the Expansion IO Card Option 1 Instruction Manual P N 58685 for more information on the function of this terminal Settings 0 None 1 12 Bit Binary 2 16 Bit Binary 3 3 Digit BCD 4 4 Digit BCD 5 Inverted 12 Bit Binary 6 Inverted 16 Bit Binary 7 Inverted 3 Digit BCD 8 Inverted 4 Digit BCD Selections using 16 bit binary or 4 digit BCD will require the configuration of terminals S1 S4 on the Terminal Board as binary bits 0 3 F115 F118 The Frequency Mode 1 F004 parameter must be set to Binary BCD For proper scaling of the binary or BCD input parameters F228 F231 must be configured G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 87 F109 F113 Option V I Terminal Voltage Current Selection Program gt Freque
184. cess Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum 6000 0 Units F520 Setting Speed 8 Operation Time Program gt Pattern Run gt Operation Time This parameter sets the run time for Preset Speed 8 This time is effective when used with Group Speeds and non Group Speeds If the Auto Restart function is activated the search time required for the Auto Restart function will be subtracted from the Operation Time setting resulting in a shorter run time F547 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 5 0 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum 6000 0 Units F520 Setting Speed 9 Operation Time Program gt Pattern Run gt Operation Time This parameter sets the run time for Preset Speed 9 This time is effective when used with Group Speeds and non Group Speeds If the Auto Restart function is activated the search time required for the Auto Restart function will be subtracted from the Operation Time setting resulting in a shorter run time F548 Parameter Type Numerical Direct Access Number Factory Default 5 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum 6000 0 Units F520 Setting Speed 10 Operation Time Program gt Pattern Run gt Operation Time This parameter sets the run time for Preset Speed 10 This time is effective when used with Group Speeds and non Group Speeds If
185. chronize the stopping and restarting of the motors as not to cause breakage in the product being processed by the motors stopping starting at different times e g wire spools bobbin winder for textile machines etc Parameters F317 and F318 must be setup to synchronize motor operation as to avoid breakage in these types of applications Note If used to restart the motors the Retry setup of F301 is required Note The Jog function will not operate while in the Synchronized Decel Accel mode Settings 0 Off 1 Ridethrough On 2 Decel Stop 3 Synchronized ACC DEC TB 4 Synchronized ACC DEC TB Power Off Ridethrough Setup Requirements 1 Select the Ridethrough Mode at F302 2 Select the Ridethrough Time at F310 3 Select the Synchronized Stop Start Times at F317 F318 if required Note F317 and F318 are not functional while operating in the Torque or Position control modes or for the Jog Run function F260 4 Seta discrete input terminal to Power Failure Synchronized Signal and activate the terminal to enable the Synchronized Accel Decel function 5 Select the Ridethrough Control Level at F629 134 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F303 F303 Retry Selection Program gt Protection gt Retry Restart After a trip has occurred this parameter sets the number of times that an automatic system restart is attempted for a qualified trip The trip conditions listed bel
186. ciated with the voltage setting of parameter F197 V f 5 Point Setting Voltage 4 See F190 and F191 for additional information on this setting F196 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz Vif 5 Point Setting Voltage 4 Program gt Special gt V f 5 Point Setting The V f 5 Point Setting Voltage 4 establishes the output voltage level that is to be associated with the frequency setting of F196 V f 5 Point Setting Frequency 4 The F701 parameter setting will determine if the selection for this parameter appears in the form of a Voltage V or as a Percentage of the ASD rating The default setting is See F190 and F191 for additional information on this setting G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F197 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 0 Maximum 100 0 Units V or F701 103 F198 F200 Vif 5 Point Setting Frequency 5 Program gt Special gt V f 5 Point Setting The V f 5 Point Setting Frequency 5 sets the frequency to be associated with the voltage setting of parameter F199 V f 5 Point Setting Voltage 5 See F190 and F191 for additional information on this setting Direct Access Number F198 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changea
187. cified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This parameter sets the programmable F terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 5 on pg 234 Direct Access Number F111 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Forward Changeable During Run No Input Terminal 2 R Function Program gt Terminal gt Input Terminals This parameter is used to set the functionality of the R discrete input terminal In addition this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This parameter sets the programmable R terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 5 on pg 234 Direct Access Number F112 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Reverse Changeable During Run No Input Terminal 3 ST Function Program gt Terminal gt Input Terminals This parameter is used to set the functionality of the ST discrete input terminal In addition this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This parameter sets the programmable ST terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 5 on pg 234 88 Direct Access Number F113 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Standby Changeable During Run No G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F114 F118 Input Terminal 4 RES Function Program gt Terminal gt Input Terminals This paramet
188. control signal selected here Settings 0 Disabled None 1 VII V D 2 RR 3 RX 4 Optional RX2 RX2 5 Optional V I Analog Function Assigned Object 11 Direct Access Number F961 Program My Function gt My Function Analog Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 Disabled This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality to which the adjustment of F959 is applied Changeable During Run Yes Settings 0 Disabled None 1 Acceleration Rate 2 Upper Limit Frequency 3 Acceleration Multiplication Factor 4 Deceleration Multiplication Factor 5 Manual Torque Boost 6 Over Current Stall F601 7 Thermal Protection F600 8 Speed Loop Proportional Gain F460 9 Drooping Gain F320 10 PID Proportional Gain F362 See the My Function Instruction Manual P N E6581335 for a complete description of the setup requirements and operational information of the Analog Function Assigned Object parameter Analog Input Function Target 21 Direct Access Number F962 Program My Function My Function Analog Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 Disabled This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the programmable Analog Input Function Target 21 terminal Changeable During Run Yes The function selected at F
189. ctive for EOI control Only Figure 27 G9 ASD Root Menu Navigation l t t Display Alarm F Mode Frequency Monitor Program ault Stop Res Conmara Mode Mode Mode L Mode ESO L FaultN EDI Command Uccurs Mode Frequency Command Mode Frequency Setting While operating in the Local mode Local LED is illuminated on the front panel the running frequency of the motor may be set from the Frequency Command screen Using the Rotary Encoder enter the Frequency Command value connect ST to CC provide a Run command F and or R and then press the Run key The motor will run at the Frequency Command speed and may be changed while running See Figure 22 on pg 31 and Operation Local on pg 73 for more information on the Frequency Command mode G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 41 EOI Command Mode The EOI Command mode is accessed by pressing the ESC key from the Frequency Command screen The control settings of the EOI Command menu are effective for EOI control only The EOI Command mode provides quick access to the following menu parameters Direction Forward or Reverse Stop Pattern The Decel Stop or Coast Stop settings determines the method used to stop the motor when using the Stop Reset key of the EOI The Decel Stop setting enables the Dynamic Braking system setup at F304 or the DC Inj
190. d parameter Press the Rotary Encoder to enter the Edit mode the parameter value setting takes on the reverse video format dark background light text Turn the Rotary Encoder to change the parameter setting Press the ESC key while the setting is in the reverse video format to exit the Edit mode without saving the change and to resume the Changed From Default search Or press the Rotary Encoder while the setting is in the reverse video format to save the change Press ESC to return to the Changed From Default search Pressing ESC while the system is performing a Changed From Default search terminates the search Pressing ESC when finished searching or halted at a changed parameter takes the menu back one level Note Communications setting changes will require that the ASD power be removed and then re applied for the changes to take affect Figure 28 Changed From Default Screen gt Changed From Default Changed Parameters 0x201 V I Input Point 1 Realtime Clock Setup Trip History Changed From Default Contrast Version Setting G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Save User Settings A profile of an existing setup may be saved and re applied when required by using the Save User Setup feature This function is carried out via Program gt Utilities gt Type Reset gt Save User Settings With the initial setup saved troubleshooting and diagnostics may be performed and the starting
191. d as being correct If enabled for normal operation using settings 1 or 2 the motor may start and engage the driven equipment unexpectedly upon receiving a Run signal during the My Function setup 231 F977 F977 Combined Terminal Function Cont Output terminals may also be combined to produce one output response to multiple conditions using the computational operators of Table 11 on pg 243 Assigning more than one function to a discrete output terminal provides two advantages it effectively expands the number of input terminals and reduces the number of cables required to support the input output functions e g assigning Low Speed Detection and Low Current Detection to one output terminal Using Virtual Terminals 1 4 F973 F976 are required to use this function In the example below the Low Speed Signal detection terminal assignment and the Low Current Detection terminal assignment will be combined as one terminal output to illustrate this feature However any two of the discrete output terminal assignments may listed in Table 8 on pg 239 may be combined in this manner Setup example 1 Disable the My Function parameter at F977 to prevent the system from starting upon completion of the setup 2 From Program gt Direct Access gt Unknown Numbers select Enabled Set the OUT1 terminal F130 to My Function Output 1 222 4 Set Input Function Target 1 F900 to 1004 Low Speed Signal detection
192. d for Override Command control F R Preset Speeds etc G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Frequency Control F004 Standard Mode Selection The Frequency Mode 1 or the Frequency Mode 2 setting establishes the user selected source of the frequency control input for the G9 ASD The signal source selected here is used for speed control unless the Reference Priority Selection parameter is configured to switch this setting automatically see F200 or if the Override feature is enabled F004 Frequency Mode 1 Table 3 on pg 38 shows the hierarchy of the control sources managed by the Override function The level of the control item of the hierarchy is listed from left to right most to least respectively As indicated in the table the Override setting may supersede the selection at F004 Placing the EOI in the Local mode selects the RS485 2 wire as the Frequency Mode 1 control source Local mode operation may be superseded by other Override settings Example With the EOI set to Local the Communication Board input or the RS485 4 wire input will supersede EOI control input The remaining control sources may be placed into the Override mode using communications The source of the Frequency control signal may be selected by The F004 setting e Placing an item from the Frequency control source selections in the Override mode via communications or e Placing the EOI in the Local mode places only the RS485 2 wire
193. d mapped for convenience The Direct Access Numbers are listed where applicable The default settings may also be changed by entering the Parameter Number of the setting to be changed at the Direct Access menu Program gt Direct Access gt Applicable Parameter Number A listing of the Direct Access Numbers and a description of the associated parameter may be found in the section titled Direct Access Parameter Information on pg 76 A listing of all parameters that have been changed from the default setting may be viewed sequentially by accessing the Changed From Default screen Program gt Utilities Changed From Default Note Parameter F201 was changed to create the example shown in Figure 28 The Changed From Default feature allows the user to quickly access the parameters that are different from the factory default settings or the post Reset settings Once the Changed From Default screen is displayed the system scrolls through all of the system parameters automatically and halts once reaching a changed parameter Once stopped at a changed parameter the Rotary Encoder may be clicked once clockwise to continue scrolling forward or clicked once counterclockwise to begin scrolling in reverse With each click of the Rotary Encoder from a stop the system scrolls through the parameters and stops at the next parameter that has been changed Press the Rotary Encoder while stopped at a changed parameter to display the settings of the change
194. dications from the display Reset is effective when faulted only This input terminal may be programmed to any of the functions listed in Table 5 on pg 234 see F114 F The default setting for this terminal is Forward run command The F terminal is activated by connecting CC to this terminal Sink mode This input terminal may be programmed to any of the functions listed in Table 5 on pg 234 see F111 R The default setting for this terminal is Reverse run command The R terminal is activated by connecting CC to this terminal Sink mode This input terminal may be programmed to any of the functions listed in Table 5 on pg 234 see F112 S1 The default setting for this terminal is Preset Speed 1 see Preset Speed 1 on pg 83 The S1 terminal is activated by connecting CC to this terminal Sink mode This input terminal may be programmed to any of the functions listed in Table 5 on pg 234 see F115 S2 The default setting for this terminal is Preset Speed 2 see Preset Speed 2 on pg 83 The S2 terminal is activated by connecting CC to this terminal Sink mode This input terminal may be programmed to any of the functions listed in Table 5 on pg 234 see F116 S3 The default setting for this terminal is Preset Speed 3 see Preset Speed 3 on pg 84 The S3 terminal is activated by connecting CC to this terminal Sink mode This input terminal may be programmed to any of the functions listed in Table 5 on pg 234
195. djusting this setting to provide an output of 100 from the ASD Direct Access Number F473 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 154 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 255 RX Input Bias Program gt Frequency gt Speed Reference Setpoints This parameter is used to fine tune the bias of the RX input terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode or the Torque Control mode This setting may be used to ensure that the zero level of the input source pot pressure transducer flow meter etc is also the zero level setting of the ASD system This is accomplished by setting the input source to zero and adjusting this setting to provide an output of zero from the ASD RX Input Gain Program gt Frequency gt Speed Reference Setpoints This parameter is used to fine tune the gain of the RX input terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode or the Torque Control mode This setting may be used to ensure that the 100 level of the input source pot pressure transducer flow meter etc is also the 100 level setting of the ASD system This is accomplished by setting the input source to 100 and adjusting this setting to provide an output of 100 from the ASD 162 Direct Access Number F474 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 127 Changeable During Run Yes Mi
196. ds and loads or modifies the parameter settings of the ASD Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled off then on for the changes to take effect F802 Parameter Type Numerical Direct Access Number Factory Default 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 247 Communications Time Out Time Program Communications Communication Settings This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by setting the time that no activity may exist over the communications link before the link is severed Time Out The communications network includes other ASDs and Host Control computers that monitor the status of the ASD s transfers commands and loads or modifies the parameter settings of the ASD Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled off then on for the changes to take effect F803 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 Off Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Off Maximum 100 Units Seconds RS485 2 and 4 Wire Communications Time Out Action Program Communications Communication Settings This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by determining the action to be taken in the event of a time out Time Out Action The communications network includes other ASDs and Host Control computers that monitor the status of the ASD s trans
197. e and F515 Dec Time F516 Pattern This parameter F504 is used to manually select Ace Dec 1 4 To switch using the Terminal Board assign the functions Acc Dec Switching 1 and Ace Dec Switching 2 to two discrete input terminals Activation combinations of the two terminals result in the Acc Dec 1 4 selections as shown in Table 4 Figure 30 shows the setup requirements and the resulting output frequency response when using Switching Frequency settings to control the Ace Dec response of the ASD output While operating using S Pattern 1 the system performance may be further enhanced by the adjustment of parameters F506 F509 These settings provide for upper and lower Ace Dec limit adjustments These settings are used to extend or shorten the upper or lower Acc Dec curve Note If operating from the Local mode press Esc from the Frequency Command screen to access this parameter F504 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default 1 Changeable During Run Yes Table 4 Using combinations of discrete terminal activations Accel Decel profiles 1 4 may be selected Acc Dec Switching Truth A D SW 1 A D SW 2 Acc Dec Out 0 0 1 0 1 2 1 0 3 1 1 4 1 Discrete terminal activation Figure 30 Using Acc Dec Switching Tir 1 Accel time 1 F009 setting 2 Accel time 2 F500 setting 3 Accel time 3 F510 setting
198. e The Expansion IO Card Option 1 option board P N ETB003Z is required to use this terminal See the Expansion IO Card Option 1 Instruction Manual P N 58685 for more information on the function of this terminal F119 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default Unassigned Changeable During Run No Input Terminal 10 LI2 Function Program gt Terminal gt Input Terminals This parameter is used to set the functionality of the LI2 discrete input terminal In addition this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This setting assigns the function of the programmable LI2 terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 5 on pg 234 Note The Expansion IO Card Option 1 option board P N ETB003Z is required to use this terminal See the Expansion IO Card Option 1 Instruction Manual P N 58685 for more information on the function of this terminal Direct Access Number F120 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Unassigned Changeable During Run No Input Terminal 11 LI3 Function Program gt Terminal gt Input Terminals This parameter is used to set the functionality of the LI3 discrete input terminal In addition this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This setting assigns the function of the programmable LI3 terminal to any one of the user selectabl
199. e This ensures the proper alignment and electrical connection of the CNX connector of the LED LCD Screen module PCB Gently hold the display in place while securing the Phillips mounting screw If improperly seated the periphery of the LED LCD Screen module will not be flush with the front panel surface and the unit will not function properly G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Keypad Remote Mounting The ASD may be controlled from a remotely mounted keypad For safety and application specific reasons some ASD installations will warrant that the operator not be in the vicinity during operation or that the keypad not be attached to the ASD housing The keypad may be mounted either with or without the optional Remote Mounting Kit P N ASD MTG KIT The ease of installation is enhanced by the Remote Mounting Kit P N 58333 which allows for keypad placement and easier cable routing Remote mounting will also allow for multiple keypad mountings at one location if controlling and monitoring several ASDs from a central location is required The keypad can operate up to 9 feet away from the ASD A keypad extender cable is required for remote mounting The keypad extender cable is available in a 9 ft length and may be ordered through your Toshiba Sales Representative The optional dust cover P N ASD BPC may be used to cover the front panel opening of the ASD housing after removing the keypad Remote Keypad Required Hardware Keypad Mounti
200. e rated capacity of the motor Motor Load Displays the real time Motor Load as a percentage of the rated capacity of the motor ASD OL Overload Real Displays the real time ASD Overload as a percentage of the rated capacity of the ASD ASD OL Overload Trip Displays the ASD Overload Trip value as a percentage of the rated capacity of the ASD ASD Load Displays the ASD Load as a percentage of the rated capacity of the ASD Run Time Displays the Cumulative Run Time in hours Compensation Frequency Displays the Output Frequency after the application of the slip compensation correction value Post Compensation Frequency DBR OL Overload Real Displays the real time DBR Overload value as a percentage of the Dynamic Braking Resistor capacity DBR OL Overload Trip Displays the DBR Overload Trip value as a percentage of the Dynamic Braking Resistor capacity DBR Load Displays the DBR Load as a percentage of the Dynamic Braking Resistor capacity Feedback inst Provides a status of the Real Time Feedback in Hz Feedback 1 second Provides a status of the 1 Second Averaging feedback in Hz G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 43 Torque Displays the Output Torque as a percentage of the rated capacity of the ASD Torque Reference Displays the Torque Reference as a percentage of the maximum torque available Torque Current Displays the torque producing current value Exci
201. e Control input at the RX input terminal Program gt Fundamental Standard Mode Selection gt Frequency Mode gt RX Program gt Fundamental gt Standard Mode Selection gt Command Mode Selection gt Terminal Block Torque Control Perform the following setup to allow the system to perform Torque Control from the RX input terminal Set RX Input Point 1 Rate F220 Set RX Input Point 1 Setting F216 the input analog signal level that corresponds to the torque setting at RX Input Point 1 Rate Set RX Input Point 2 Rate F221 Set RX Input Point 2 Setting F218 the input analog signal level that corresponds to the speed setting at RX Input Point 2 Rate Provide a Run command F and or R Torque Control is accomplished by establishing an associated V f output pattern for a given RX input level Once set as the RX input voltage changes the ASD output speed and or torque will vary in accordance with the above settings This parameter sets RX Input Point 1 Rate and is the output torque value that is associated with the setting of RX Input Point 1 Setting when operating in the Torque Control mode This value is entered as 250 to 250 of the rated torque Direct Access Number F220 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 250 00 Maximum 250 00 Units Torque Settings RX Input Point 2 Rate
202. e DC Injection function being carried out The display shows db when braking and shows dbOn when the motor shaft stationary function is being carried out G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 245 Alarms Table 13 lists the alarm codes that may be displayed during operation of the ASD Each alarm code is accompanied by a description and a possible cause In the event that the source of the malfunction cannot be determined contact your Toshiba Sales Representative for further information on the condition and for an appropriate course of action The Alarms are listed in the top down order that they are checked for activation Only the first to be detected will be displayed on the Frequency Command screen Table 13 G9 ASD Alarms Rae Raves Description Possible Causes CM1 Comm1 Error Internal communications error Improperly programmed ASD Comm2 Error Improper communications settings CM2 External communications error Improperly connected cables E Emergency Off Output signal from the ASD is Stop Reset pressed twice at the EOI PERT cies ad be EOFF command received remotely ASD reset required MOFF Main Under voltage condition at the Low 3 phase utility voltage Under Voltage 3 phase AC input to the ASD Oc Over Current ASD output current greater than Defective IGBT U V or W F601 setting ASD output to the motor is connected incorrectly ASD output phase to phase short The ASD is starting i
203. e During Run No G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F522 F522 Pattern 1 Repeat Program gt Pattern Run gt Pattern Run This parameter sets the number of times to repeat the Pattern Group 1 Settings 1 Once Then Stop 2 254 Number of Repeats 255 Infinite Forever G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F522 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 255 Infinite Changeable During Run No Minimum 1 Maximum 255 Infinite Units Repetitions 171 F523 F523 Pattern Group 1 Selection 1 Program gt Pattern Run gt Speeds Groups of configured Preset Speeds may be selected and run from this screen The execution of grouped Preset Speeds in this manner is called a Pattern Run One to eight user selected Preset Speeds may be run sequentially for a user set number of repetitions The group of user selected Preset Speeds is called a Pattern Group The Pattern Run function executes the user set Pattern Group Pattern Group 1 is comprised of up to 8 Selections with each Selection being 1 of 15 possible Preset Speed settings Skip may be selected to ignore a Selection This parameter allows the user to choose one configured Preset Speed that is to be used as Selection 1 of 8 for Pattern Group 1 See F018 for information on configuring the individual Preset Speeds Parameters F524 F530 may be setup for subsequent Selections 2
204. e functions listed in Table 5 on pg 234 Note The Expansion IO Card Option 1 option board P N ETB003Z is required to use this terminal See the Expansion IO Card Option 1 Instruction Manual P N 58685 for more information on the function of this terminal 90 Direct Access Number F121 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Unassigned Changeable During Run No G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F122 F124 Input Terminal 12 LI4 Function Program gt Terminal gt Input Terminals This parameter is used to set the functionality of the LI4 discrete input terminal In addition this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This setting assigns the function of the programmable LI4 terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 5 on pg 234 Note The Expansion IO Card Option 1 option board P N ETB003Z is required to use this terminal See the Expansion IO Card Option 1 Instruction Manual P N 58685 for more information on the function of this terminal Direct Access Number F122 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Unassigned Changeable During Run No Input Terminal 13 LI5 Function Program gt Terminal gt Input Terminals This parameter is used to set the functionality of the LI5 discrete input terminal In addition this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Cl
205. e value and press the scroll knob Enter Parameters F562 F575 are used to set the functions listed here for Preset Speeds 2 15 When using communications write the appropriate byte to location F561 as indicated below Settings 0 Forward Run 1 Reverse Run 2 Accel Decel Switching 1 4 Accel Decel Switching 2 8 V f Switching Signal 1 16 V f Switching Signal 2 32 Torque Limit Switching Signal 1 64 Torque Limit Switching Signal 2 Writing the following data to location F561 via communications results in Forward Run A D SW 2 V f SW 3 Torque Lim SW 4 Torque Limit Switch 2 V f Switch A D Switch F R 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 _ _ ya i E x 0 F 00 T Lim 1 gt 00 V f 1 00 A D 1 I R 01 T Lim 2 01 V f 2 01 A D 2 10 T Lim 3 10 V f 3 10 A D 3 11 T Lim 4 11 V f 4 11 A D 4 Direct Access Number F561 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Forward Run Changeable During Run No Preset Speed 2 Operation Mode Program gt Pattern Run gt Operation Mode Same as Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode see F561 Direct Access Number F562 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Forward Run Changeable During Run No Preset Speed 3 Operation Mode Program gt Pattern Run gt Operation Mode Same as Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode see F561 180 Direct Access Number
206. eak Minimum or Normal Avg value as selected at parameter F968 Select the Monitor Display Input Setting number from Table 10 on pg 241 to output the corresponding function Use the Communication Number if operating using communications See the My Function Instruction Manual P N E6581335 for a complete description of the setup requirements and operational information of the Monitor Output Function parameter F967 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 2000 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Monitor Output Function Command 21 Program My Function gt My Function Monitor This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by allowing the user to select the Peak Minimum or Normal Avg value of the parameter F967 selection to be recorded and output as a monitored function Settings 0 Normal 1 Peak 2 Minimum See the My Function Instruction Manual P N E6581335 for a complete description of the setup requirements and operational information of the Monitor Output Function parameter F968 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default Normal Changeable During Run Yes Monitor Output Function 31 Program gt My Function gt My Function Monitor This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by establishing the function that is to be recorded and output as the Peak Minimum or
207. ecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 1 terminal Changeable During Run Yes This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target 1 terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 7 on pg 238 Table 8 on pg 239 or Table 10 on pg 241 See F977 for more information on this parameter Input Function Command 1 Direct Access Number F948 Program My Function gt My Function Unit 6 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 NOP This parameter is used to assign a user selected logical operator to two user selected Input Function Target variables enable a counter timer function or perform a hold reset function Table 11 on pg 243 lists the available selections Their use and selection requirements are described in an example at F977 Input Function Target 2 Direct Access Number F949 Program My Function gt My Function Unit 6 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 Disabled This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 2 terminal Changeable During Run Yes This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target 2 terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 7 on pg 238 Table 8 on pg 239 or Table 10 on pg 241 See F977 for more information on this parameter
208. ection Braking system setup at F250 F251 and F252 The Coast Stop setting allows the motor to stop at the rate allowed by the inertia of the load Note The Stop Pattern setting has no effect on the Emergency Off settings of F603 V f Group One of 4 V f profiles may be selected and run Each V f profile is comprised of 4 user settings Base Frequency Base Frequency Voltage Manual Torque Boost and Electronic Thermal Protection Expanded descriptions of these parameters may be found in the section titled Direct Access Parameter Information on pg 76 Accel Decel Group One of 4 Accel Decel profiles may be selected and run Each of the Accel Decel profiles is comprised of three user settings Acceleration Deceleration and Pattern Expanded descriptions of these parameters may be found in the section titled Direct Access Parameter Information on pg 76 or see F009 Feedback in Panel Mode This feature enables or disables the PID feedback function Torque Limit Group This parameter is used to select 1 of 4 preset positive torque limits to apply to the active motor of a multiple motor configuration The settings of profiles 1 4 may be setup at F441 F444 F446 and F448 respectively G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Monitor Mode The Monitor mode allows the user to monitor motor performance variables control settings and configuration data during motor operation The items viewable from this mode are listed a
209. ed Changeable During Run Yes 215 F911 F915 Output Function Assigned Direct Access Number F911 Program gt My Function My Function Unit 2 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 Disabled This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the Output Function Assigned terminal Changeable During Run Yes This setting assigns the function of the programmable Output Function Assigned data location to one of the functions listed in the Input Setting field of Table 8 on pg 239 Settings 0 3099 See the My Function Instruction Manual P N E6581335 and F977 for more information on this parameter Input Function Target 1 Direct Access Number F912 Program gt My Function gt My Function Unit 3 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 Disabled This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 1 terminal Changeable During Run Yes This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target 1 terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 7 on pg 238 Table 8 on pg 239 or Table 10 on pg 241 See F977 for more information on this parameter Input Function Command 1 Direct Access Number F913 Program My Function gt My Function Unit 3 Parameter Type Selection List F
210. ed 1 VII V D 2 RR 3 RX 4 F431 Setting F430 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Speed Limit torque 0 Center Value Program gt Torque gt Torque Speed Limiting The system has the ability to limit the amount that the speed may vary as a function of a changing load while operating in the Torque Control mode This parameter sets the targeted speed The plus or minus value range for this setting may be set at F432 156 Direct Access Number F431 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F432 F441 Speed Limit torque 0 Band Program gt Torque gt Torque Speed Limiting The system has the ability to limit the amount that the speed may vary as a function of a changing load while operating in the Torque Control mode This parameter sets a plus or minus value range for the Speed Limit Torque Level F431 F432 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz Rotation in Specified Direction ONLY Program gt Torque gt Torque Speed Limiting This parameter Enables Disables the Forward Run or Reverse Run mode If either d
211. ed as a reference when determining when to switch the output frequency control source from the Frequency Mode 1 setting to the Frequency Mode 2 setting See F200 for additional information on this setting 108 F208 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 10 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 10 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F209 F209 Analog Input Filter Program gt Frequency gt Analog Filter Analog filtering is applied after the analog reference signal is converted to a digital signal The type of filtering used is Rolling Average over time Settings 0 None 1 mS 1 Small 8 mS 2 Medium 16 mS 3 Large 32 mS 4 Huge 64 mS The analog input signal is sampled and converted to a digital signal With no filtering applied the resulting digital value is scaled for use by the microprocessor of the ASD If the filtering selection Small is selected the ASD averages the last 8 mS of sampled signal and converted digital values The rolling average is updated every 4 uS and scaled for use by the microprocessor This holds true for the Medium Large and Huge selections providing a larger sample to produce the average for use by the microprocessor False responses to electrical noise are eliminated with no loss in bandwidth because the value used by the drive is the average va
212. ed to the setting established in F330 This parameter may be disabled Enabling the Light Load High Speed function requires that an operating mode be selected here and that the criteria of parameters F331 F333 be met Settings 0 Off 1 Auto Speed F Motor Up R Generator Down 2 Auto Speed F Generator Down R Motor Up 3 F330 Setting F Motor Up R Generator Down 4 F330 Setting F Generator Down R Motor Up Direct Access Number F328 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Off Changeable During Run Yes Light Load High Speed Learning Function Program gt Special gt Crane Hoist Settings The Light Load High Speed function accelerates the output frequency of the ASD from the programmed speed to the setting established in F330 and is primarily used with Crane Hoist functions During Light Load High Speed operation with this parameter enabled parameters Panel Torque Bias F343 Creep Frequency F346 and the Creep Time F347 are set to a standard set of light load profile values Application specific adjustments may be required Note This function should be setup with a light load only Settings 0 Off 1 Forward Reverse 2 Forward Only 140 Direct Access Number F329 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Off Changeable During Run No G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F330 F334 Automatic Light Load Hig
213. edback gt PG Settings During closed loop operation this parameter sets the sensitivity of the drive when monitoring the output speed for control The larger the value entered here the more sensitive the drive is to changes in the received feedback 160 F463 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD Dependent Direct Access Number Changeable During Run No Minimum 1 Maximum 9999 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F464 F471 Second Speed Loop Stabilization Coefficient Program gt Feedback gt PG Settings During closed loop operation this parameter sets the response sensitivity of the drive when monitoring the output speed for control The larger the value entered here the quicker the response to changes in the received feedback F464 Parameter Type Numerical Direct Access Number Factory Default 1 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 1 Maximum 9999 Load Moment of Inertia 2 Program gt Feedback gt PG Settings This parameter is used for calculating accel decel torque when compensating for load inertia while operating in the Drooping Control mode F465 Parameter Type Numerical Direct Access Number Factory Default 35 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Speed PID Switching Frequency Program gt Feedback gt Feedback Settings While running this parameter establishes the th
214. eds If the Auto Restart function is activated the search time required for the Auto Restart function will be subtracted from the Operation Time setting resulting in a shorter run time F554 Parameter Type Numerical Direct Access Number Factory Default 5 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum 6000 0 Units F520 Setting Preset Speed Operation Mode Program gt Pattern Run gt Operation Mode This parameter is used to set the Preset Speed operating mode Select Disabled at this parameter to use the speed command only for Preset Speed operation Select Enabled at this parameter to apply the control settings of F561 F575 to the associated Preset Speed while operating in the Preset Speed mode Settings 0 Disabled Preset Speed Only 1 Enabled Full Preset Speed Mode G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F560 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled Direct Access Number Changeable During Run No 179 F561 F563 Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode Program gt Pattern Run gt Operation Mode This parameter is enabled at F560 and is used to set the speed torque and direction of Preset Speed 1 This screen is comprised of 4 fields and are labeled as follows Direction Acc Dec Group V f Group and Torque Limit Group Scroll to the field of interest and press the scroll knob Enter Using the scroll knob set th
215. ee RX Input Point 1 Setting F216 for more information on this setting when used for Speed control See RX Input Point 1 Rate F220 for more information on this setting when used for Torque Control F218 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 100 0 Maximum 100 0 Units RX Input Point 2 Frequency Program gt Frequency gt Speed Reference Setpoints This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX input terminal when the RX terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode This parameter sets RX Input Point 2 Frequency and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of RX Input Point 2 Setting when operating in the Speed Control mode See RX Input Point 1 Setting F216 for more information on this setting 114 Direct Access Number F219 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 60 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F220 F221 RX Input Point 1 Rate Program gt Torque gt Setpoints This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX input terminal when the RX terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Torque Control mode RX Input Torque Control Setup Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Torqu
216. ee the Communications Manual P N 53840 The Jog function can be activated from zero Hz or from any frequency below the Jog Run Frequency Jog can only increase the speed A Jog command will not be recognized when the running frequency is above the Jog Run Frequency setting The Jog command has priority over other Run commands and is not limited by the Upper Limit setting of parameter F012 Jog commands received while running for the opposite direction will follow the programmed stopping method of F261 until reaching zero Hz and will then ramp to the programmed Jog Frequency and direction Jog Setup and Execution To initiate a Jog Run from the EOI perform the following l 2 3 Enable the Jog function at F262 Set the Command Mode Selection F003 to EOI Keypad Assign the Jog Run setting to a discrete input terminal see Table 5 on pg 234 Note Any unused discrete input terminal may be used for the Jog Run setting Set up a Jog Run Frequency at F260 Set up a Jog Stop Pattern at F261 Set the Input Terminal Priority F106 function to Disable to receive Jog commands from the EOI Set the Local Remote key to Local Activate the Jog Run terminal from step 3 and provide a Run command F or R Note Simultaneous F and R activations will perform as setup at parameter F105 Press the Run key and the ASD will output the frequency setting of F260 for the duration of the activation To initiate a Jog
217. eeds Pattern Group 2 Selection 1 E592 Pattern Group 2 Selection 2 F533 Pattern Group 2 Selection 3 F534 Pattern Group 2 Selection 4 F339 Pattern Group 2 Selection 5 F536 Pattern Group 2 Selection 6 F537 Pattern Group 2 Selection 7 F538 Pattern Group 2 Selection 8 F339 PASSWORD AND Enter Password N A Lockout Change Password Enter New Password N A Reset From Trip Local Remote Run Stop from EOI Lockouts Frequency Change From EOI N A Monitor Screen Parameter Access Parameter Write G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 69 System Operation Initial Setup Upon initial system power up the Startup Wizard starts automatically The Startup Wizard assists the user with the initial configuration of the input power settings and the output parameters of the ASD The Startup Wizard may also be selected and run from the Program menu after the initial startup if required The Startup Wizard querys the user to select one of the following items Run Now gt Continue on to item below Run Next Time gt Go to Program Mode Manually Configure Go to Finish screen and click Finish Startup Wizard Parameters Startup parameter settings may be viewed or changed Change the parameter setting and click Next Or click Next without making any changes to go to the next startup parameter See the section titled Startup Wizard Parameter Requirements on pg 71 for further information on the Startup Wizard parameters Click Finish t
218. eescesceeeceseeesecseesaecsecsaeeseceeenseeeeeseeneeeseeeseeaeenaes 2 Qualified Personnel 2c c cessccceseccccevevess ofc EREEREER E A a E a a a an 2 Equipment Inspection sereias ae a hs ieee ted E S 3 Handling and Storage reens ea a e AE E T E R eh i 3 Disposal mone chs E E E eee ae O E E E E E eerie eee 3 Inst llation Precautions i 0ssscssessssessssensesesencesseesseesesupnosesseuseseanssoaceutavsvessoesecbssenenpscadenasoomodseasenns 4 Location and Ambient Requirements 0 c ccceeccessesseesecseeesecsceseesecesceseeereeeeeneeeaseeeeaeenaes 4 Mounting Requirements ac a toe AE E gone caer hia A eee 4 Conductor Routing and Grounding 0 ceeceeseesseesecsceesececeseceecesceeceeeeeeceseeseeeaseaeeeaeeneeeaees 5 Power Connections imeni eneee in n E tates ERR E RER E 6 PrOteCtiOn kudri E E E E E ea a ee 6 System Integration Precautions sscsscssscsssccssessseecescescessssscsssceseesesessscsssesssssssseessssseees 7 Personnel Protection i 2 cccciccsdeehcecesdevsteesec in seb vec E E E ds Sens Wisde hes R ceeesseed 7 Syste Setup Requirements nemocen ns e e tenia lea eink acd 8 Operational and Maintenance Precautions sssssccssccsecesecsssesssesscsseseesscessscsssceesesseseses 9 Motor Characteristics civcscuss icescscsessesscscnesssnssvescesvestensseevssveossaseusvsness i R i 10 M tor Autotuning osco Sen at Oe ee eee ees 10 Pulse Width Modulation Operation 0 ccccccecsessecssessececeseeseeeeeeeeeeceseeeeecaeesee
219. eferences 150 of the F600 setting for the 1 motor The unit will trip sooner than the time entered here if the overload is greater than 150 F607 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 300 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 10 Maximum 2400 Units Seconds ASD Input Phase Failure Detection Program gt Protection gt Phase Loss This parameter enables the 3 phase input power phase loss detection feature A loss of either input phase R S or T results in a trip Settings 0 Disabled 1 Enabled F608 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default Enabled Changeable During Run No Low Current Detection Current Hysteresis Width Program gt Protection Low Current Settings During a momentary low current condition this parameter provides a current threshold level to which the low current condition must return within the time setting of F612 or a Low Current Trip will be incurred F609 Parameter Type Numerical Direct Access Number Factory Default 10 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 1 Maximum 20 Units Low Current Trip Program gt Protection Low Current Settings This parameter Enables Disables the low current trip feature When enabled the drive will trip on a low current fault if the output current of the drive falls below the level defined at F611 and r
220. egative torque Upper Limit for the 2 motor profile when multiple motors are controlled by a single drive or when a single motor is to be controlled by multiple profiles Direct Access Number F445 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 250 0 Disabled Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 250 0 Disabled Units Power Running Torque Limit 3 Level Program gt Torque Manual Torque Limit Settings This parameter is used to set the positive torque Upper Limit for the 3 motor profile when multiple motors are controlled by a single drive or when a single motor is to be controlled by multiple profiles 158 Direct Access Number F446 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 250 0 Disabled Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 250 0 Disabled Units G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F447 F452 Regenerative Braking Torque Limit 3 Level Program gt Torque Manual Torque Limit Settings This parameter is used to set the negative torque Upper Limit for the 3 motor profile when multiple motors are controlled by a single drive or when a single motor is to be controlled by multiple profiles Direct Access Number F447 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 250 0 Disabled Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 250 0 Disabled Units Power Running Torque Limit 4 Level Program gt Torque
221. elected at this parameter The multiplier setting of F702 will be applied to parameters F364 F365 F367 and F368 ONLY if PID Process Data is selected at this parameter Settings 0 All Frequencies 1 PID Process Data F703 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default All Frequencies Changeable During Run Yes Display Gradient Characteristic Program Utilities gt Display Parameters The ASD displayed response to output speed changes will be displayed as directly proportional or inversely proportional as a function of this parameter setting Selecting Negative Gradient displays an increased output speed as going more negative Selecting Positive Gradient displays an increased output speed as going more positive Settings 0 Minus Negative Gradient 1 Plus Positive Gradient G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F705 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default Plus Changeable During Run Yes 197 F706 F719 Display Bias Program gt Utilities gt Display Parameters In conjunction with the setting of F702 this parameter sets the bias of the front panel speed display The frequency entered here will be multiplied by the setting of F702 and then displayed as the zero value on the front panel display F706 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Direct Access Number C
222. emains there for the time set at F612 Settings 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 184 F610 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled Direct Access Number Changeable During Run No G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F611 F615 Low Current Detection Threshold Program gt Protection Low Current Settings With the Low Current Trip F610 parameter enabled this function sets the low current trip threshold The threshold value is entered as a percentage of the maximum rating of the drive Direct Access Number F611 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Units Low Current Trip Threshold Time Program gt Protection Low Current Settings With the Low Current Trip F610 parameter enabled this function sets the time that the low current condition must exist to cause a trip Direct Access Number F612 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Units Seconds Short Circuit Detection At Start Program gt Protection gt Special Protection Parameters This parameter determines when the system will perform an Output Short Circuit test Note Selection 3 is recommended for high speed motor applications Because of the low impedance of high speed motors the standard pulse setting may result in a motor malf
223. en the parameters for Motor Set 2 are configured and selected Motor Set 2 may be selected by a properly configured input terminal see Table 5 on pg 234 F171 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD Dependent Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 50 0 Maximum 660 0 Units Volts Manual Torque Boost 2 Program gt Motor gt Motor Set 2 The Manual Torque Boost 2 function is used to increase the low frequency torque for high inertia loads by increasing the output voltage at frequencies below of the Base Frequency 2 setting F170 See parameter F016 Manual Torque Boost 1 for an explanation of torque boost This parameter is used only when the parameters for Motor Set 2 are configured and selected Motor Set 2 may be selected by a properly configured input terminal see Table 5 on pg 234 Motor Overload Protection Level 2 Program gt Motor gt Motor Set 2 The Motor 2 Overload Protection Level parameter specifies the motor overload current level for Motor Set 2 This value is entered as either a percentage of the full load rating of the ASD or as the FLA of the motor The unit of measurement for this parameter may be set to Amps A V or it may be set as a percentage of the ASD rating The nameplated FLA of the motor may be entered directly when Amps is selected as the unit of measurement see F701 to change the display unit The Motor 2 Overload Protecti
224. ent or to activate the brake see F130 The OUT1 terminal is rated at 2 A 120 VAC and 2 A 30 VDC O2A B OUT2A B The default function assigned to this terminal is ACC DEC Complete This output may be programmed to provide an indication open or closed that any one of the functions listed in Table 8 on pg 239 has occurred or is active This function may be used to signal external equipment or to activate the brake see F131 The OUT2 terminal is rated at 2 A 120 VAC and 2 A 30 VDC FP The default function of this output terminal is to output a series of pulses at a rate that is a function of the output frequency of the ASD 50 mA max at 1 0 kHz to 43 3 kHz As the output frequency of the ASD goes up so does the FP output pulse rate This terminal may be programmed to provide an output pulse rate that is proportional to the magnitude of the user selected item from Table 6 on pg 237 For further information on this terminal see F676 on pg 194 AM This output terminal produces an output current that is proportional to the output frequency of the ASD or of the magnitude of the function assigned to this terminal The available assignments for this output terminal are listed in Table 6 on pg 237 For further information on this terminal see F670 on pg 192 FM This output terminal produces an output current or voltage that is proportional to the output frequency of the ASD or of the magnitude of the function assigned to this term
225. equipment damage Misuse of this equipment could result in injury and equipment damage In no event will Toshiba Corporation be responsible or liable for direct indirect special or consequential damage or injury that may result from the misuse of this equipment About This Manual This manual was written by the Toshiba Technical Publications Group This group is tasked with providing technical documentation for the G9 Adjustable Speed Drive Every effort has been made to provide accurate and concise information to you our customer At Toshiba we re continuously searching for better ways to meet the constantly changing needs of our customers E mail your comments questions or concerns about this publication to Technical Publications Dept tic toshiba com Manual s Purpose and Scope This manual provides information on how to safely install operate maintain and dispose of your G9 Adjustable Speed Drive The information provided in this manual is applicable to the G9 Adjustable Speed Drive only This manual provides information on the various features and functions of this powerful cost saving device including Installation e System operation e Configuration and menu options and e Mechanical and electrical specifications Included is a section on general safety instructions that describe the warning labels and symbols that are used throughout the manual Read the manual completely before installing operating performing
226. er allows the user to select 1 of 15 configured Preset Speeds as the number 5 Selection to be included in Pattern Group 1 Skip may be selected to ignore this Selection Setting 0 Skip 1 15 Preset Speed Number See F523 for more information on this parameter G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F527 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Skip Changeable During Run No 173 F528 F531 Pattern Group 1 Selection 6 Program gt Pattern Run gt Speeds This parameter allows the user to select 1 of 15 configured Preset Speeds as the number 6 Selection to be included in Pattern Group 1 Skip may be selected to ignore this Selection Setting 0 Skip 1 15 Preset Speed Number See F523 for more information on this parameter Direct Access Number F528 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Skip Changeable During Run No Pattern Group 1 Selection 7 Program gt Pattern Run gt Speeds This parameter allows the user to select 1 of 15 configured Preset Speeds as the number 7 Selection to be included in Pattern Group 1 Skip may be selected to ignore this Selection Setting 0 Skip 1 15 Preset Speed Number See F523 for more information on this parameter Direct Access Number F529 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Skip Changeable During Run No Pattern Group 1 Selection 8 Program gt Pattern Run
227. er is used to set the functionality of the RES discrete input terminal In addition this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This parameter sets the programmable RES terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 5 on pg 234 Direct Access Number F114 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Reset Changeable During Run No Input Terminal 5 S1 Function Program gt Terminal gt Input Terminals This parameter is used to set the functionality of the S1 discrete input terminal In addition this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This parameter sets the programmable S1 terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 5 on pg 234 Direct Access Number F115 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Preset Speed 1 Changeable During Run No Input Terminal 6 S2 Function Program gt Terminal gt Input Terminals This parameter is used to set the functionality of the S2 discrete input terminal In addition this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This parameter sets the programmable S2 terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 5 on pg 234 Direct Access Number F116 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Preset Speed 2 Changeable During Run No Input Terminal 7 S3 F
228. er is used to set the go to zero method to be used by the ASD in the event that the ASD is commanded to go to 0 Hz Settings 0 Standard DC Injection Braking 1 0 Hz Command F255 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Standard DC Injection Braking Direct Access Number Changeable During Run No Time Limit For Lower Limit Frequency Operation Program gt Fundamental gt Frequency Settings This parameter sets the time that the ASD is allowed to operate below the Lower Limit setting before an alarm and subsequent fault is incurred G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F256 Parameter Type Numerical Direct Access Number Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 600 0 Units Seconds 125 F260 F260 Jog Frequency Direct Access Number F260 Program gt Frequency gt Jog Settings Parameter Type Numerical This parameter sets the output frequency of the drive during a Jog Jog is the term used to describe turning the motor on for small increments of time and is Factory Default 5 00 Changeable During Run Yes used when precise positioning of motor driven equipment is required Minimum F240 Setting The Jog function may be initiated from the EOI remotely via the Terminal Maximum 20 00 Board or using Communications for more information on using Units Hz Communications for Jogging s
229. er part of the acceleration curve by the percentage set here This function is commonly used with transportation and lifting applications See parameter F502 on pg 165 for more information on this setting Direct Access Number F507 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 10 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 50 Units S Pattern Deceleration Lower Limit Adjustment Program gt Special gt Accel Decel Special During an S Pattern 1 or 2 sequence this parameter setting modifies the deceleration rate for the lower part of the deceleration curve by the percentage set here This function is commonly used with transportation and lifting applications See parameter F502 on pg 165 for more information on this setting Direct Access Number F508 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 10 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 50 Units S Pattern Deceleration Upper Limit Adjustment Program gt Special Accel Decel Special During an S Pattern 1 or 2 sequence this parameter setting modifies the deceleration rate for the upper part of the deceleration curve by the percentage set here This function is commonly used with transportation and lifting applications See parameter F502 on pg 165 for more information on this setting Direct Access Number F509 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 10 Changeable During Run
230. er sets the bandwidth of the Speed Reach Frequency F101 Changeable During Run Yes setting Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz Forward Reverse Run Priority Selection Direct Access Number F105 Program gt Terminal gt Input Special Functions Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Suspend The Forward Reverse Priority Selection determines the operation of the ASD if the F and R control terminals are activated simultaneously Changeable D ring Rune Simultaneous F and R activation Settings 0 Reverse 1 Suspend The waveforms shown depict the motor response for all combinations of the F tor F and R terminal settings if the Reverse option is chosen l The Suspend setting will decelerate the motor to a stop regardless of the rotation direction when both the F and R control terminals are activated 86 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F106 F107 Input Terminal Priority Direct Access Number F106 Program gt Terminal gt Input Special Functions Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled This parameter is used to allow the Jog and DC Injection Braking input signals to control the ASD when received via the Terminal Board even though the system is in the Local mode Changeable During Run No With this parameter enabled a Jog command or a DC Injection Braking command received from the Terminal Board will re
231. er than the Maximum Frequency F011 setting Direct Access Number F012 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD Dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz Lower Limit Frequency Program gt Fundamental gt Frequency Settings This parameter sets the lowest frequency that the ASD will accept as a frequency command or frequency setpoint The ASD will output frequencies lower than the Lower Limit Frequency when accelerating to the Lower Limit or decelerating to a stop Frequencies below the Lower Limit may also be output when operating in the PID Control mode Torque Control mode or the Vector Control modes sensorless or feedback F013 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz Base Frequency 1 Program gt Fundamental gt Motor Set 1 The Base Frequency 1 setting is the frequency at which the output voltage of the ASD reaches its maximum setting The Base Frequency Voltage 1 parameter is set at F409 For proper motor operation the Base Frequency should be set for the nameplated frequency of the motor Direct Access Number F014 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 60 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz V f Pattern Pro
232. erical Factory Default 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 100 Maximum 100 Units Frequency Settings RX Input Point 1 Frequency Program gt Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX input terminal when the RX terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode This parameter sets RX Input Point 1 Frequency and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of RX Input Point 1 Setting when operating in the Speed Control mode See RX Input Point 1 Setting F216 for more information on this setting G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F217 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz 113 F218 F219 RX Input Point 2 Setting Program gt Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX input terminal when the RX terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode or the Torque Control mode This parameter sets the RX input level that is associated with RX Input Point 2 Frequency when operating in the Speed control mode or is associated with the RX Input Point 2 Rate when operating in the Torque Control mode This value is entered as 100 to 100 of the RX input signal range S
233. es The operating conditions at the time of the trip may be used to help determine the cause of the trip Listed below are operating conditions that may be used to assist the operator in correcting the problem or that the ASD operator should be prepared to discuss when contacting the Toshiba Customer Support Center for assistance e What trip information is displayed e Is this a new installation Has the system ever worked properly and what are the recent modifications if any What is the ASD and Motor size What is the CPU version and revision level What is the EOI version Does the ASD trip when accelerating running decelerating or when not running Does the ASD reach the commanded frequency Does the ASD trip without the motor attached Does ASD trip with an unloaded motor G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual User Notification Codes The User Notification codes appear in the top right corner of the Frequency Command screen while the associated function is active User Notification codes notify the user of active functions that are usually only momentary under normal conditions and are active for the duration of activation only User notification events are not error conditions and only convey active system functions to the user Table 12 User Notification Codes LED Function Description Atn Autotune Active Indicates that the Autotune function is active dbOn DC Braking This code conveys th
234. es Minimum 0 00 Maximum 100 00 Units Cooling Fan Control Program gt Protection gt Special Protection Parameters This parameter sets the cooling fan run time command Settings 0 Automatic 1 Always On Direct Access Number F620 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Automatic Changeable During Run Yes Cumulative Operation Time Alarm Program gt Protection gt Special Protection Parameters This parameter sets a run time value that once exceeded closes a discrete output contact The output signal may be used to control external equipment or used to engage a brake Associate the Total Operation Hours Alarm setting of Table 8 on pg 239 toa discrete output contactor Note The time displayed is 1 10th of the actual time 0 1 hr 1 0 hr 186 F621 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 610 0 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 999 9 Units Hours X 10 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F622 F627 Abnormal Speed Detection Time Program gt Protection Abnormal Speed Settings This parameter sets the time that an overspeed condition must exist to cause a trip This parameter functions in conjunction with the settings of F623 and F624 Direct Access Number F622 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 01 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0
235. es Minimum 0 00 Maximum 200 00 Units My Function Percent Data 4 Program gt My Function gt My Function Data This parameter is used to set the trigger threshold level of the analog signal of the My Function Percent Data 4 The analog signal is selected using the Input Setting number from Table 8 on pe 239 Direct Access Number F921 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 200 00 Units My Function Percent Data 5 Program My Function gt My Function Data This parameter is used to set the trigger threshold level of the analog signal of the My Function Percent Data 5 The analog signal is selected using the Input Setting number from Table 8 on pg 239 Direct Access Number F922 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 200 00 Units My Function Frequency Data 1 Program My Function gt My Function Data This parameter is used to set the trigger threshold level of the analog signal of the My Function Frequency Data 1 The analog signal is selected using the Input Setting number from Table 8 on pg 239 Direct Access Number F923 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 200 00 Units My Function Frequency Data 2 Program gt
236. et Speed 2 Direction Acc Dec Group V f Group Torque Limit Group Preset Speed 3 Direction Acc Dec Group V f Group Torque Limit Group F562 F563 Preset Speed 4 Direction Acc Dec Group V f Group Torque Limit Group F564 Preset Speed 5 Direction Acc Dec Group V f Group Torque Limit Group F565 Preset Speed 6 Direction Acc Dec Group V f Group Torque Limit Group F566 Preset Speed 7 Direction Acc Dec Group F567 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Program Mode Menu Navigation Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Parameter Number PATTERN RUN Operation Mode G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual V f Group Torque Limit Group F567 Preset Speed 8 Direction Acc Dec Group V f Group Torque Limit Group Preset Speed 9 Direction Acc Dec Group V f Group Torque Limit Group F568 F569 Preset Speed 10 Direction Acc Dec Group V f Group Torque Limit Group F570 Preset Speed 11 Direction Acc Dec Group V f Group Torque Limit Group F571 Preset Speed 12 Direction Acc Dec Group V f Group Torque Limit Group F572 Preset Speed 13 Direction Acc Dec Group F573 67 Progr
237. ettings as mapped on pg 46 or via the Direct Access method Program gt Direct Access gt Applicable Parameter Number See the section titled Program Mode Menu Navigation on pg 46 for the applicable Direct Access parameter numbers For further information on terminal assignments and default setting changes see the sections titled Terminal on pg 47 and Default Setting Changes on pg 74 Note See the section titled Cable Terminal Torque Specifications on pg 265 for the G9 ASD conductor and terminal electrical specifications Note Programmable terminals will not retain their settings indefinitely in the event of a power loss Connect an external 24 VDC supply to the SU terminal to retain the programmable settings in the event of Control Power loss see Figure 20 on pg 26 ST The default setting for this terminal is the Standby mode controller As the default setting this terminal must be activated for normal system operation The ST terminal is activated by connecting CC to this terminal Sink mode When deactivated OFF is flashed on the LED Screen and the Not Ready to Run indicator is displayed on the LCD Screen see Figure 22 on pg 31 This input terminal may be programmed to any of the functions listed in Table 5 on pg 234 see F113 RES The default setting for this terminal is Reset The RES terminal is activated by connecting CC to this terminal Sink mode A momentary connection to CC resets the ASD and any fault in
238. f Life e Turn off lockout and tag out all power sources before proceeding to connect the power wiring to the equipment e After ensuring that all power sources are turned off and isolated in accordance with established lockout tag out procedures connect the 3 phase power source wiring of the correct voltage to the correct input terminals and connect the output terminals to a motor of the correct voltage and type for the application refer to NEC Article 300 Wiring Methods and Article 310 Conductors For General Wiring Size the branch circuit conductors in accordance with NEC Table 310 16 If multiple conductors are used in parallel for the input or output power and it is necessary to use separate conduits each parallel set shall have its own conduit 1 e place U1 V1 W1 and a ground wire in one conduit and U2 V2 W2 and a ground wire in another refer to NEC Article 300 20 and Article 310 4 National and local electrical codes should be referenced if three or more power conductors are run in the same conduit refer to 2008 NEC Article 310 adjustment factors Ensure that the 3 phase input power is NOT connected to the output of the ASD This will damage the ASD and may cause injury to personnel e DO NOT install the ASD if it is damaged or if it is missing any component s DONOT connect resistors across terminals PA PC or PO PC This may cause a fire Ensure the correct phase sequence and the desired directi
239. f the process value and the feedback input will be ignored until this setting times out At which time the PID setup assumes control F368 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run No Minimum Lower Limit F013 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz F369 Parameter Type Numerical Direct Access Number Factory Default 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 2400 Units Seconds PID Output Upper Limit Program gt Feedback gt Feedback Settings Selecting Speed PID at parameter F359 allows for this parameter setting to function as the Upper Limit while operating in the PID Control mode G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F370 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 60 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run No Minimum Lower Limit F013 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz 149 F371 F376 PID Output Lower Limit Program gt Feedback gt Feedback Settings Selecting Speed PID at parameter F359 allows for this parameter setting to function as the Lower Limit while operating in the PID Control mode F371 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 4 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum Lower Limit F013 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz Process Increasing Rate Program gt Feedback
240. f the full load rating of the ASD or as the FLA of the motor The unit of measurement for this parameter may be set to Amps A V or it may be set as a percentage of the ASD rating The nameplated FLA of the motor may be entered directly when Amps is selected as the unit of measurement see F701 to change the display unit The Motor 3 Overload Protection Level setting will be displayed in Amps if the EOI display units are set to A V rather than G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F177 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 0 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 10 Maximum 100 Units 99 F178 F181 Base Frequency 4 Program gt Motor gt Motor Set 4 The Base Frequency 4 setting is the frequency at which the output voltage of the ASD reaches its maximum setting The Base Frequency Voltage 4 parameter is set at F179 This parameter is used only when the parameters for Motor Set 4 are configured and selected Motor Set 4 may be selected by a properly configured input terminal see Table 5 on pg 234 For proper motor operation the Base Frequency should be set for the nameplated frequency of the motor F178 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 60 0 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 25 00 Maximum 299 0 Units Hz Base Frequency Voltage 4 Program gt Motor gt Motor Set 4 The B
241. fect on the Emergency Off settings of F603 This parameter may also be accessed by pressing the ESC key from the Frequency Command screen Direct Access Number F721 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Deceleration Stop Changeable During Run Yes Panel Torque Command Program gt Special gt Operation Panel Parameters This function is not used with the G9 ASD The Torque Command selection is performed at F420 Direct Access Number F725 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 250 00 Maximum 250 00 Panel Tension Torque Bias Program gt Special gt Operation Panel Parameters This function is not used with the G9 ASD The Tension Torque Bias selection is performed at F423 Direct Access Number F727 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 250 00 Maximum 250 00 Units Panel Load Sharing Gain Program gt Special gt Operation Panel Parameters This function is not used with the G9 ASD The Load Sharing Gain selection is performed at F424 Direct Access Number F728 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 250 00 Units Panel Override Multiplication Gain Program gt Special Operation Panel Parameters This parameter provides a value to
242. fers commands and loads or modifies the parameter settings of the drive Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled off then on for the changes to take effect Settings Settings Are For 2 Wire 4 Wire 0 No Action No Action 1 Alarm No Action 2 Trip No Action 3 No Action Alarm 4 Alarm Alarm 5 Trip Alarm 6 No Action Trip 7 Alarm Trip 8 Trip Trip G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F804 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default Trip Trip Changeable During Run Yes 203 F805 F807 RS485 2 Wire Send Wait Time Program gt Communications Communication Settings This parameter sets the RS485 2 Wire response delay time Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled off then on for the changes to take effect Direct Access Number F805 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 2 00 Units Seconds RS485 2 Wire ASD to ASD Communications Program Communications Communication Settings The function of this parameter is 2 fold 1 In a Master Follower configuration and while communicating via RS485 2 Wire this parameter sets the ASD as the Master or the Follower 2 This parameter determines the function of the ASD while operating as the Master or the Follower If operating as the Master A
243. g 194 FMOD 104 Forward Run Reverse Run Disable 138 Forward Speed Limit Input 155 Forward Speed Limit Level 155 Forward Reverse DC Injection Braking Priority 125 Forward Reverse Disable 54 Forward Reverse Run Priority Selection 86 Forward Reverse Run Selection 79 FP 23 FP Output 25 Free Notes 213 Frequency 54 Frequency at Trip 43 273 Frequency Command Mode 41 Frequency Command Screen 31 73 Frequency Control 57 Frequency Control Selections 39 Frequency Mode 1 77 Frequency Mode 2 108 Frequency Mode Control 36 Frequency Mode Priority Switching Frequency 108 Frequency Point Selection 205 Frequency Priority Selection 104 Frequency Reference 43 Frequency Reference Source 73 Frequency Setting 41 Frequency Settings 46 Fundamental 46 G Gate Array Fault 249 General Safety Information 1 Ground Fault 249 Grounding Capacitor Switch 5 H Handling and Storage 3 Heavy Load Torque During Constant Power Running 142 Heavy Load Torque During Power Running 142 T O and Control 21 VO Circuit Configurations 25 II Function 107 IICC 21 26 105 107 Initial Setup 70 Initial UP DOWN Frequency 129 Initial UP DOWN Frequency Rewriting 129 Input Function Command 1 213 215 216 221 222 223 224 Input Function Command 2 214 215 216 221 222 223 225 Input Function Target 1 213 215 216 220 222 223 224 Input Function Target 2 214 215 216 221 222 223
244. g Input 21 Analog Input Filter 109 Analog Input Function Target 11 226 Analog Input Function Target 21 226 Analog Input Loss 248 Analog Output 21 Analog Output Terminals 47 Annual Average Ambient Temperature 189 ASD Capacity 13 ASD HP 269 ASD Input Phase Failure Detection 184 ASD Load 43 ASD Number 203 ASD OL Overload Trip 43 ASD Operation at Disconnect 210 ASD Output Phase Failure Detection 183 ASD Overload 43 188 252 ASD Motor Connection Diagram 17 ASD Side Switching Wait Time 147 Atn 245 At trip Recorded Parameters 253 Auto Accel Decel 71 Auto Restart 133 Automatic Acceleration Deceleration 76 Automatic Function Selection 85 Automatic Light Load High Speed Frequency 141 Automatic Torque Boost 76 Autotune Error 250 Autotuning 10 Autotuning 1 151 Autotuning 2 152 Operation B Base Frequency 1 81 Base Frequency 2 98 Base Frequency 3 99 Base Frequency 4 100 Base Frequency Voltage 52 Base Frequency Voltage 1 152 Base Frequency Voltage 2 98 Base Frequency Voltage 3 99 Base Frequency Voltage 4 100 Bezel Mounting Hardware 33 BIN Input Point 1 Frequency 121 BIN Input Point 1 Setting 120 BIN Input Point 2 Frequency 121 BIN Input Point 2 Setting 121 Block Read Data 1 212 Block Read Data 2 212 Block Read Data 3 212 Block Read Data 4 213 Block Read Data 5 213 Block Write Data 1 211 Block Write Data 2 211 Brake Answer Wait Time
245. g Run Yes G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F906 F910 Input Function Target 1 Program My Function gt My Function Unit 2 This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 1 terminal This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target 1 terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 7 on pg 238 Table 8 on pg 239 or Table 10 on pg 241 See F977 for more information on this parameter Direct Access Number F906 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 Disabled Changeable During Run Yes Input Function Command 1 Program gt My Function gt My Function Unit 2 This parameter is used to assign a user selected logical operator to two user selected Input Function Target variables enable a counter timer function or perform a hold reset function Table 11 on pg 243 lists the available selections Their use and selection requirements are described in an example at F977 Direct Access Number F907 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 NOP Input Function Target 2 Program gt My Function gt My Function Unit 2 This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 2 terminal This setting assigns the function of the pr
246. g Run Yes Minimum 0 01 Maximum 600 00 Units Seconds My Function Time Data 3 Program My Function gt My Function Data This parameter is used to set the response delay of the My Function Time Data 3 terminal The applied discrete input signal must be present at the input terminal of the G9 ASD for the time setting here for a system response Discrete terminal input activation that does not equal or exceed this setting will be ignored G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F930 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 01 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 01 Maximum 600 00 Units Seconds 219 F931 F935 My Function Time Data 4 Program gt My Function gt My Function Data This parameter is used to set the response delay of the My Function Time Data 4 terminal The applied discrete input signal must be present at the input terminal of the G9 ASD for the time setting here for a system response Discrete terminal input activation that does not equal or exceed this setting will be ignored F931 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 01 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 01 Maximum 600 00 Units Seconds My Function Time Data 5 Program My Function gt My Function Data This parameter is used to set the response delay of the My Function Time Data 5 termina
247. given V I input level This parameter sets V I Input Point 2 Rate and is the output torque value that is associated with the setting of V I Input Point 2 Setting when operating in the Torque Control mode This value is entered as 0 to 250 of the rated torque See V I Input Point 1 Rate F205 for more information on this setting F206 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 250 00 Units Frequency Mode 2 Program gt Fundamental Standard Mode Selection This parameter is used to set the source of the frequency command signal to be used as Frequency Mode 2 in the event that Frequency Mode 1 is disabled or if Frequency Mode 2 is set up as the primary control parameter See F004 and F200 for additional information on this setting Settings 1 VII V D 2 RR 3 RX 4 Not Used 5 EOI Keypad 6 RS485 7 Communication Option Board 8 RX2 Option AIl 9 Option V I 10 UP DOWN Frequency Terminal Board 11 Pulse Input Option 12 Pulse Input Motor CPU 13 Binary BCD Input Option F207 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default VI II Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Frequency Mode Priority Switching Frequency Program Fundamental Standard Mode Selection This parameter establishes a threshold frequency that will be us
248. gram gt Fundamental gt Frequency Settings This function establishes the relationship between the output frequency and the output voltage Bolded selections use the motor tuning parameters of the drive to properly configure the ASD for the motor being used If Load Reactors or Long Lead Filters are used or if the capacity of the ASD is greater than the motor manual tuning of the motor parameters may be required for optimum performance Settings 0 Constant Torque 1 Voltage Decrease Curve 2 Automatic Torque Boost 3 Sensorless Vector Control Speed 4 Sensorless Vector Control Speed Torque Switching 5 V f 5 Point Curve Go to F190 to Configure the V f 5 Point settings 6 PM Drive Permanent Magnet 7 PG Feedback Vector Control Speed 8 PG Feedback Vector Control Speed Torque Switching Note When operating in the Vector Control mode the carrier frequency should be set to 2 2 kHz or above G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F015 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default Constant Torque Changeable During Run No 81 F016 F017 Manual Torque Boost 1 Program gt Fundamental gt Motor Set 1 The Manual Torque Boost 1 function is used to increase the low frequency torque for high inertia loads by increasing the output voltage at frequencies below of the Base Frequency 1 F014 setting The value programmed as a
249. gt Speeds This parameter allows the user to select 1 of 15 configured Preset Speeds as the number 8 Selection to be included in Pattern Group 1 Skip may be selected to ignore this Selection Setting 0 Skip 1 15 Preset Speed Number See F523 for more information on this parameter Direct Access Number F530 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default Skip Changeable During Run No Pattern 2 Repeat Program gt Pattern Run gt Pattern Run This parameter sets the number of times to repeat the Pattern Group 2 174 Direct Access Number F531 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 255 Infinite Changeable During Run No Minimum 1 Maximum 255 Infinite Units Repetitions G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F532 F535 Pattern Group 2 Selection 1 Program gt Pattern Run gt Speeds This parameter allows the user to select 1 of 15 configured Preset Speeds as the number 1 selection to be included in the Group 2 Selection Skip may be selected to ignore this Selection Setting 0 Skip 1 15 Preset Speed Number See F523 for more information on this parameter Direct Access Number F532 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Skip Changeable During Run No Pattern Group 2 Selection 2 Program gt Pattern Run gt Speeds This parameter allows the user to select 1 of 15 configured Preset Speeds as the number 2 selectio
250. h Speed Operation Frequency Program gt Special gt Crane Hoist Settings This parameter establishes the speed that the ASD will ramp to when operating in the Light Load High Speed mode F330 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 60 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run No Minimum 30 00 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz Light Load High Speed Operation Switching Lower Limit Frequency Program gt Special gt Crane Hoist Settings This parameter sets an output frequency threshold that once surpassed allows the Light Load High Speed function to be used The Light Load High Speed function may be used if the frequency threshold set at this parameter and the following conditions are met 1 Light Load High Speed Operation Enable is configured at F328 2 The output torque is less than the setting established in F335 when reaching the frequency setting here F331 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 40 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 30 0 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz Light Load High Speed Operation Load Wait Time Program gt Special gt Crane Hoist Settings This parameter determines the length of time that the load requirement must meet the Light Load High Speed criteria before the Light Load High Speed Enable F328 is recognized Once recognized the timer setting of F333 must expire to e
251. hangeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz Change Step Selection 1 Program gt Utilities Display Parameters In conjunction with the parameter setting of F708 this parameter sets the amount that the output speed will increase or decrease for each speed command change entered from the front panel using the Rotary Encoder F707 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz Direct Access Number Change Step Selection 2 Program gt Utilities gt Display Parameters The parameter is used to modify the degree that the setting of F707 affects the output speed changes that are input from the front panel using the Rotary Encoder Selecting a zero value here disables this parameter and the resulting non zero value of parameter setting F707 is output from the ASD Selecting a non zero value here provides a dividend that will be used in the following equation resulting in the actual output frequency applied to the motor OutputFrequencyDisplayed InternallyCommandedFrequency x cae F708 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 Disabled Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Operation Command Clear Selection When ST Off Program Special gt Operation Panel Parameters Upon deactivation of the ST termin
252. hase Over Current e Low impedance at the V lead of the ASD output OCA3 or OCL W Phase Over Current Low impedance at the W lead of the ASD output OCR Dynamic Braking Resistor e ASD inability to discharge the bus voltage during regeneration Overcurrent e No Dynamic Braking Resistor DBR installed DBR value is too low e Deceleration time is too short e Improper DBR setup information Defective IGBT7 or IGBT7 ckt e 3 phase input voltage is above specification OH Over Heat e Cooling fan inoperative e Ventilation openings are obstructed Internal thermistor is disconnected OH2 External Over Heat e Excessive heat signature received at the TB3 TH1 and TH1 terminals See F637 for setup information G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 251 LED Screen LCD Screen Possible Causes OL1 ASD Overload Acceleration time is too short DC Injection current is too high Improper V f setting Motor running during restart ASD or the motor is improperly matched to the application OL2 Motor Overload Improper V f setting Motor is locked Continuous operation at low speed Load requirement exceeds ability of the motor Startup frequency setting adjustment required OLR Dynamic Braking Resistor Deceleration time is too short a Improper DBR setup information Improper Stall setup information OP1 Over Voltage During Motor running during restart Acceleration OP2
253. he Traverse function See the Traverse Control Instruction Manual P N 58693 for more information on this feature Direct Access Number F982 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 25 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 1 Maximum 120 0 Units Seconds Traverse Step Program gt Special gt Traverse This parameter setting is used in the setup of the Traverse control mode of operation This setting is used as a multiplier to establish the amount that the frequency is increased or decreased while using the Traverse function See the Traverse Control Instruction Manual P N 58693 for more information on this feature Direct Access Number F983 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 10 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 0 Maximum 25 0 Units Traverse Jump Step Program gt Special gt Traverse This parameter setting is used in the setup of the Traverse control mode of operation This setting is used as a multiplier to establish the amount that the frequency is increased or decreased while using the Traverse function when a short burst of rapid speed change is required See the Traverse Control Instruction Manual P N 58693 for more information on this feature G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F984 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 10 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 0 Maximum
254. he Auto Restart function is activated the search time required for the Auto Restart function will be subtracted from the Operation Time setting resulting in a shorter run time F544 Parameter Type Numerical Direct Access Number Factory Default 5 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum 6000 0 Units F520 Setting Speed 6 Operation Time Program gt Pattern Run gt Operation Time This parameter sets the run time for Preset Speed 6 This time is effective when used with Group Speeds and non Group Speeds If the Auto Restart function is activated the search time required for the Auto Restart function will be subtracted from the Operation Time setting resulting in a shorter run time G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F545 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 5 0 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum 6000 0 Units F520 Setting 177 F546 F551 Speed 7 Operation Time Program gt Pattern Run gt Operation Time This parameter sets the run time for Preset Speed 7 This time is effective when used with Group Speeds and non Group Speeds If the Auto Restart function is activated the search time required for the Auto Restart function will be subtracted from the Operation Time setting resulting in a shorter run time F546 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 5 0 Direct Ac
255. here is no physical contact between the rotating shaft and a stationary brake pad or drum When braking is required the drive outputs a DC current that is applied to the windings of the motor to quickly brake the motor The braking current stops when the time entered in F252 times out The intensity of the DC current used while braking determines how fast the motor will come to a stop and may be set at F251 The intensity setting is entered as a percentage of the full load current of the ASD DC Injection Braking is also used to preheat the motor or to keep the rotor from spinning freely when the motor is off by providing a pulsating DC current into the motor at the Carrier Frequency This feature may be enabled at F254 F250 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 120 00 Units Hz DC Injection Braking Current Program gt Protection gt DC Braking This parameter sets the percentage of the rated current of the drive that will be used for DC Injection Braking A larger load will require a higher setting 124 F251 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 50 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Units G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F252 F256 DC Injection Braking Time Program gt Protection gt DC Braking This parameter
256. his function determines the speed of the individual motors at the 100 Drooping Gain setting for motors that share the same load G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F322 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 320 0 Units Hz 139 F323 F329 Drooping Insensitive Torque Program gt Feedback Drooping Control This parameter defines a torque range in which the Drooping Control settings will be ignored and the programmed torque settings will be followed Direct Access Number F323 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 10 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 100 0 Units Drooping Output Filter Program gt Feedback Drooping Control This parameter is used to set the rate of output change allowed when operating in the Drooping Control mode Jerky operation may be reduced by increasing this setting Direct Access Number F324 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum 200 0 Units Radians Second Light Load High Speed Operation Program gt Special gt Crane Hoist Settings This parameter enables the Light Load High Speed function by selecting an operating mode The Light Load High Speed function accelerates the output frequency of the ASD from the programmed spe
257. hms to several hundred ohms The appropriate resistance size will be typeform and application specific See the section titled Dynamic Braking Resistor Wire Cable Specifications on pg 267 for more information on using the DBR system and for assistance in selecting the appropriate resistor for a given application Note Using a resistor value that is too low may result in system damage F308 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD Dependent Direct Access Number Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 5 Maximum 1000 0 Units Q Continuous Dynamic Braking Capacity Program gt Protection gt Dynamic Braking This parameter is used to input the wattage of the Dynamic Braking Resistor See the section titled Dynamic Braking Resistor Wire Cable Specifications on pg 267 for more information on using the DBR system Note Using a resistor with a wattage rating that is too low may result in system damage F309 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD Dependent Direct Access Number Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 01 Maximum 600 00 Units kW Ridethrough Time Program gt Protection gt Retry Restart In the event of a momentary power outage this parameter determines the length of the Ridethrough time The Ridethrough will be maintained for the number of seconds set using this parameter See parameter F302 for more information on
258. i Metieclret siete eel eld A al Meese E cats Geae ten TS Direct Access Parameter Information esesseoesoesosssossossoossosseossessesscesceseeseeseoseesesoseosseoseoseos 76 Direct Access Parameters Numbers s s sssssessssssssssessesseeessesesstereseesesesstsessteresresesresrsreseent 76 Alarms Trips and Troubleshooting ccsccssscssscscecssessccccsecsesceccssesecsessesscscecessscseoess 244 Alarms and Tps deroer gurit paria RE ANR ea A ad eee eee 244 User Notification CodeS iessen sites casth neers seh aas se N EE Vane a EEE n n 245 VAN a a EE Ee E AE A E AE T EEE E E DEE 246 GRuo A Enei ir EAA EE EEE E e EE EE E E E E EE E E dees 248 Enclosure Dimensions and Conduit Plate Information seossosseoseossesseossossossosscessesscsecee 254 Enclosure Diin aleg nte C01 nIe EASE E A E hid ebteices Abe e eh 255 Conduit Plate Dimensions perenne nir e e e A E E eee a e oani 260 Current Voltage Specifications cccccssssccsssscecssescsesescesssssescsssceesessssccssseessesseseesssseees 263 Cable Terminal Torque Specifications cscssccscssssscssssssssssssssessssssesssssessssnsesssseseeees 265 Dynamic Braking Resistor Wire Cable Specifications ccsscsssssssssssesssessesesesssessees 267 Short Circuit Protection Recommendations ccsccscsesssccsecsceessssssserssessssssccessseeees 269 Optional DIAA A E EE EEE E ond ovesvevenoovassuano tus sbensenosapwnasenseuasasuenocansons 270 G9 ASD Installation and
259. ic Accel Decel Select Manual to allow the settings of F009 and F010 to control the accel decel respectively The acceleration and deceleration times range from 12 5 to 800 of the programmed values for the active acceleration time Select Automatic ACC Only to allow for the acceleration rate to be controlled automatically only Acceleration Time This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the output of the ASD to go from 0 0 Hz to the Maximum Frequency for the 1 Acceleration profile The Accel Decel Pattern may be set using F502 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 71 Deceleration Time This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the output of the ASD to go from the Maximum Frequency to 0 0 Hz for the 1 Deceleration profile The Accel Decel Pattern may be set using F502 Volts per Hertz Setting This function establishes the relationship between the output frequency and the output voltage of the ASD Settings Constant Torque Voltage Decrease Curve Automatic Torque Boost Sensorless Vector Control Speed Sensorless Vector Control Speed Torque Switching V f 5 Point Curve Go to F190 to Configure the V f 5 Point Settings PM Drive Permanent Magnet PG Feedback Vector Control Speed PG Feedback Vector Control Speed Torque Switching Motor Current Rating This parameter allows the user to input the full load amperage FLA of the motor This value is found on the nameplate of the motor and is used by the ASD
260. ic settings may then be performed The pre Reset conditions may be saved see F007 Note Communications setting changes will require that the power be removed and then re applied for the changes to take affect Direct Access Parameters Numbers Automatic Acceleration Deceleration Direct Access Number F000 Program gt Fundamental Accel Decel 1 Settings Parameter Type Selection List f f f Factory Default Manual This parameter is used to enable automatic acceleration and deceleration rates in accordance with the applied load Changeable During Run No The adjusted acceleration and deceleration times range from 12 5 to 800 of the programmed values for Acceleration Time 1 F009 and Deceleration Time 1 F010 Settings 0 Manual 1 Automatic ACC DEC 2 Automatic ACC Only Note The motor and the load must be connected prior to selecting Automatic Acceleration Deceleration Automatic Torque Boost Direct Access Number F001 Program gt Fundamental gt Motor Set 1 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled This parameter allows the ASD to adjust the output torque in accordance with the applied load automatically When enabled Autotuning is performed the motor should be connected before performing an Autotune Changeable During Run No Settings 0 Disabled 1 Automatic Torque Boost Autotuning 2 Sensorless Vector Control Autotuning
261. ications Communication Settings This is an unused parameter that has allocated memory space The space may be used at the discretion of the user This space may be used to store information or a note to be transferred using communications Direct Access Number F880 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 65534 Network Option Reset Settings Program gt Communications Communication Settings This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by establishing the targets of a Reset command received via the communications link Settings 0 Reset ASD only 1 Reset Option Board and ASD Direct Access Number F899 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Reset ASD only Changeable During Run Yes Input Function Target 1 Program gt My Function My Function Unit 1 This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 1 terminal This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target 1 terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 7 on pg 238 Table 8 on pg 239 or Table 10 on pg 241 See F977 for more information on this parameter Direct Access Number F900 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 Disabled Changeable During Run Yes In
262. ideo of the discrete input terminals of the Terminal Board Discrete Output Terminals Displays the status activated reverse video of the discrete output lines of the Terminal Board Main Monitor Selections Two 2 Monitor Mode items may be selected from the Main Monitor Selections screen to be displayed on the Frequency Command screen while the ASD is running The selected items along with their real time values are displayed on the Frequency Command screen while running Not all Monitor Mode items are available for display on the Frequency Command screen The available items are underlined on pg 43 and pg 44 Any two of the underlined items may be selected from the listing at Program gt Utilities gt Main Monitor Selections Select an item from the Monitor 1 listing and another item from the Monitor 2 listing to be displayed as shown in Figure 22 on pg 31 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 45 Program Mode Menu Navigation The following table lists the menu items of the Program mode and maps the flow of the menu selections The Parameter Numbers for the listed functions are provided where applicable The functions listed may be viewed or selected and changed as mapped below or via the Direct Access method Program gt Direct Access gt Applicable Parameter Number Program Mode Menu Navigation Primary Menu
263. ill decelerate to the lower level of the Jump Frequency range and continue downward as programmed Once set up and enabled it is on in all control modes User selected frequencies may be jumped to avoid the negative effects of mechanical resonance 130 Direct Access Number F270 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F271 F287 Jump Frequency 1 Bandwidth Program gt Special Jump Frequencies This parameter establishes a plus or minus value for Jump Frequency 1 see F270 F271 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 30 00 Units Hz Jump Frequency 2 Program gt Special Jump Frequencies Same as Jump Frequency 1 F270 and is used when multiple frequencies are to be jumped see the plus or minus value setting at F273 When multiple jump frequencies overlap the system will recognize the lowest and the highest frequencies as one jump range F272 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz Jump Frequency 2 Bandwidth Program gt Special Jump Frequencies This parameter establishes a plus or minus value f
264. ime 4 F514 Deceleration Time 4 F515 Acc Dec Pattern 4 F516 Acc Dec Pattern 1 4 F504 Acc Dec Switching Frequency 1 F505 S Pattern Acceleration Lower Limit Adjustment F506 S Pattern Acceleration Upper Limit Adjustment F507 Acc Dec Special S Pattern Deceleration Lower Limit Adjustment F508 S Pattern Deceleration Upper Limit Adjustment F509 Acc Dec Switching Frequency 2 F513 Acc Dec Switching Frequency 3 F517 PWM Carrier Frequency F300 Carrier Frequency Carrier Frequency Control Mode F316 Light Load High Speed Operation F328 Light Load High Speed Learning Function E329 Light Load High Speed Operation Frequency F330 Crane Hoist Settings Light Load High Speed Operation Switching Lower F331 Limit Frequency Light Load High Speed Operation Load Wait Time F332 Light Load High Speed Operation Detection Time R339 56 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Program Mode Menu Navigation Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name aha SPECIAL Light Load High Speed Heavy Load Detection Time F334 Switching Load Torque During Power Running B399 Crane Hoist Settings Heavy Load Torque During Power Running F336 Heavy Load Torque During Constant Power Running E32 Switching Load Torque During Regeneration Braking F338 V f 5 Point Setting Frequency 1 F190 V f 5 Point Setting Voltage 1 F191 V f 5 Point Setting Frequency 2 AO V f 5 Point Setting Voltage
265. in the event that a DBR over temperature condition occurs is a requirement If a DBR failure occurs or should a power source over voltage condition occur the DBR thermal protection circuitry will prevent hazardous DBR temperatures To use the Dynamic Braking function the following requirements must be met e Enable the DBR function e Select a Resistance Value and e Set the Continuous Braking Wattage value at F304 F308 and F309 respectively Set the Braking Resistance Overload Time at parameter F639 to establish how long the braking resistor is allowed to sustain the overload condition before a trip is incurred the factory default setting is 5 seconds Light duty and heavy duty resistors vary from a few ohms to several hundred ohms The appropriate resistance size will be typeform specific and application specific Contact your Toshiba Sales Representative or the Toshiba Customer Support Center for more information on your specific DBR requirements Heavy duty DBRs should be wired using the same gauge wire as the motor leads Light duty DBRs may use one wire size smaller AWG or kcmil than the motor leads Because the heat generated by the DBR will affect the cooling capacity of the heat sink the resistor pack should be mounted above or to the side of the ASD NEVER below the ASD Maintain a minimum of six inches between the resistor pack and the ASD The total wire length from the ASD to the DBR should not exceed 10 feet The
266. inal The available assignments for this output terminal are listed in Table 6 on pg 237 For further information on this terminal see F005 on pg 78 The Voltage Current output selection is performed at F681 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 23 FLA One of two normally closed contacts that under user defined conditions connect to FLC FLB One of two normally open contacts that under user defined conditions connect to FLC FLC FLC is the common leg of a single pole double throw form C relay The FL relay is the Fault Relay by default but may be programmed to any of the selections of Table 8 on pg 239 For further information on this terminal see F132 and Figure 8 Note The FLA FLB and FLC contacts are rated at 2A 120 VAC and 24 30 VDC Figure 8 FLA FLB and FLC Switching Contacts Shown In The Normal Operating Condition ELB Note The relay is shown in the normal operating 5 condition During a faulted condition the relay LC connection is FLC to FLA IFLA m LAS Figure 9 Terminal Board Ensure that the ground screw is securely in CAU TI O N place to prevent arcing intermittent operation or system failure J100 1 to 2 Sink 2 to 3 Source J101_ 24V 1 to 2 System Supplied 2 to 3 Ext Supplied SW301 V I Switch TB1 TB2 TB3 TB4 Half Full Duplex Switch See Figure 20 on pg 26 for more information on the Ter
267. inal Assignment Selection Terminal Assignment Name Comm Number Name Comm Number 0 Output Frequency 30 100 Meter Adjust Value 1 Frequency Reference 31 Data from Communications 2 Output Current 32 185 Meter Adjust Value 3 DC Bus Voltage 33 250 Meter Adjust Value 4 Output Voltage 34 Input Watt Hour 5 Compensated Frequency 35 Output Watt Hour 6 Speed Feedback Realtime 45 Gain Display 7 Speed Feedback 1 Sec Filter 46 My Function Monitor 1 Without Sign 8 Torque 47 My Function Monitor 2 Without Sign 9 Torque Command 48 My Function Monitor 3 With Sign 11 Torque Current 49 My Function Monitor 4 With Sign FP End 12 Excitation Current 50 Signed Output Frequency 13 PID Feedback Value 51 Signed Frequency Reference Before PI 14 Motor Overload Ratio 52 Signed Compensated Frequency 15 ASD Overload Ratio 53 Signed Speed Feedback Realtime 16 DBR Overload Ratio 54 Signed Speed Feedback 1 Sec Filter 17 DBR Load Ratio 55 Signed Torque 18 Input Power 56 Signed Torque Command 19 Output Power 58 Signed Torque Current 23 Option V I Input 59 Signed PID Feedback Value 24 RR Input 60 Signed RX Input 25 VIII V I Input 6l Signed RX2 Option AI1 Input 26 RX Input 62 Signed 100 Meter Adjust Value 27 RX2 Option AIl Input 63 Signed 185 Meter Adjust Value 28 FM Output 64 Signed 250 Meter Adjust Value 29 AM Output G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 237
268. ing Run No Motor Rated Capacity Program gt Motor gt Vector Motor Model This parameter is used to set the nameplated rated capacity of the motor being used F405 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 11 0 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum 500 00 Units kW Motor Rated Current Program gt Motor gt Vector Motor Model This parameter is used to set the nameplated current rating of the motor being used F406 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 20 3 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum 2000 0 Units Amps Motor Rated RPM Program gt Motor gt Vector Motor Model This parameter is used input the nameplated rated speed of the motor F407 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 1730 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 100 Maximum 60000 Units RPM Base Frequency Voltage 1 Program Vector Vector Motor Model The Motor 1 Base Frequency Voltage 1 is the Motor 1 output voltage at the Base Frequency F014 Regardless of the programmed value the output voltage cannot be higher than the input voltage The actual output voltage will be influenced by the input voltage of the ASD and the Supply Voltage Correction setting F307 152 F409 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD
269. ing Run Yes Note Setting this parameter should be done using a light load only Set this parameter to Brake Signal Learning Provide a Run command The aforementioned parameters will receive approximate values Application specific adjustments may be required when done Settings 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Accel Decel Suspend Direct Access Number F349 Program Fundamental gt Accel Decel 1 Settings Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Off To maintain a constant speed setting while running this parameter may be used to suspend speed changes for a user set length of time Changeable During Run Yes The Accel Decel Suspend function is enabled by setting this parameter to either Terminal Board Input or to F350 F353 Selecting Terminal Board Input at this parameter requires that a discrete input terminal be set to Dwell Signal see Table 5 on pg 234 for a listing of available settings Upon activation of the Dwell Signal terminal the output frequency remains at the at activation speed for the duration of the activation When deactivated the programmed accel or decel ramp resumes Selecting F350 F353 at this parameter requires that the acceleration and or the deceleration Suspend Frequency and Suspend Time settings be completed at F350 F351 F352 and F353 Upon reaching the frequency setting of F350 Accel or F352 Decel the Accel Decel ramp will cease and the output frequency will hold a
270. ings When Enabled at F349 this parameter is used to set the frequency at which the Deceleration Suspend function will activate During deceleration this parameter sets the frequency at which deceleration will stop and the motor will run at the setting of this parameter for the time setting of F353 F352 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz Deceleration Suspend Time Program gt Fundamental Accel Decel 1 Settings When Enabled at F349 this parameter is used to set the duration of activation of the Deceleration Suspend function when initiated by reaching the Deceleration Suspend Frequency setting F352 Once this parameter times out the deceleration rate will resume from the point of suspension G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F353 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 10 0 Units Seconds 145 F354 F354 Commercial Power ASD Output Switching Direct Access Number F354 Program gt Terminal gt Line Power Switching Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Off This parameter Enables Disables the Commercial Power ASD Output Switching function Changeable During Run No When enabled the system may be set up to discontinue using the o
271. input voltage or current The function as a voltage input to receive a 0 10 VDC input signal The function as a current input is to receive a 0 20 mA input signal Using either input type the function is to control the 0 0 Maximum Frequency output or the 0 0 to 250 torque output of the ASD This is an isolated input terminal This terminal may be programmed to control the speed or torque of the motor and cannot process both input types simultaneously SW301 must be set to V or I to receive a voltage or current respectively see Figure 9 on pg 24 Terminal scaling is accomplished via F201 F206 The gain and bias of this terminal may be adjusted for application specific suitability see F470 and F471 SU Externally supplied 24 VDC 10 at 1 1 A minimum backup control power This terminal references CC P24 24 VDC at 200 mA power supply for customer use This terminal references CCA PP The function of output PP is to provide a 10 VDC 10 mADC output that may be divided using a potentiometer The tapped voltage is applied to the RR input to provide manual control of the RR programmed function This terminal references CCA O1A B OUT1A B The default function assigned to this terminal is Output Low Speed This output may be programmed to provide an indication open or closed that any one of the functions listed in Table 8 on pg 239 has occurred or is active This function may be used to signal external equipm
272. int 1 Frequency F211 RR Input Point 2 Setting F272 RR Input Point 2 Frequency B23 RX Input Point 1 Setting F216 RX Input Point 1 Frequency F217 RX Input Point 2 Setting F218 RX Input Point 2 Frequency F219 RX2 Option AI1 Input Point 1 Setting F222 RX2 Option AI1 Input Point 1 Frequency E223 Speed Reference RX2 Option AI1 Input Point 2 Setting F224 Setpoints RX2 Option AI1 Input Point 2 Frequency E225 BIN Input Point 1 Setting F228 BIN Input Point 1 Frequency F229 BIN Input Point 2 Setting F230 BIN Input Point 2 Frequency F231 PG Input Point 1 Setting F234 PG Input Point 1 Frequency F235 PG Input Point 2 Setting F236 PG Input Point 2 Frequency E23 VIAI V D Input Bias F470 VIAL V D Input Gain F471 RR Input Bias F472 RR Input Gain F473 RX Input Bias F474 RX Input Gain F475 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 55 Program Mode Menu Navigation Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name nanan FREQUENCY RX2 Option AI1 Input Bias F476 Speed Reference RX2 Option AI1 Input Gain F477 Setpoints V I Input Bias AI2 Option Board Input F478 V I Input Gain AI2 Option Board Input F479 SPECIAL Acceleration Time 2 F500 Deceleration Time 2 F501 Acc Dec Pattern 1 F502 Acc Dec Pattern 2 F503 Acceleration Time 3 F510 Acc Dec 1 4 Settings Deceleration Time 3 F511 Acc Dec Pattern 3 F512 Acceleration T
273. int 2 Setting F203 the input analog signal level that corresponds to the frequency setting at V I Input Point 2 Frequency Provide a Run command F and or R Once set as the V I input voltage or current changes the output frequency of the ASD will vary in accordance with the above settings This parameter value is entered as 0 to 100 of the V I input signal range The V I input is commonly used for a 4 20 mA current loop signal where 4 mA equals 20 of a 20 mA signal Set this parameter to 20 for 4 20 mA current loop signal applications Note When using the isolated V I input terminal the TICC terminal must be used as the return negative connection Note If using P24 to power a transducer that is to be used to supply the V I input signal it may be necessary to connect IICC to CCA G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 105 F202 F204 VI II V I Input Point 1 Frequency Program gt Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the V I input terminal when the V I terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode This parameter sets V I Input Point 1 Frequency and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of V I Input Point 1 Setting when operating in the Speed Control mode See V I Input Point 1 Setting F201 for more information on this setting F202 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0
274. ion and Operation Manual 53 Program Mode Menu Navigation Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name nanan FREQUENCY Analog Filter Analog Input Filter F209 Aabe as rse Forward Reverse Disable F311 Jog Frequency F260 Jog Settings Jog Stop Pattern F261 Panel Operation Jog Mode F262 UP DOWN Up Response Time F264 UP DOWN Up Frequency Step F265 UP DOWN Frequency UP DOWN Down Response Time F266 Functions UP DOWN Down Frequency Step F267 Initial UP DOWN Frequency F268 Initial UP DOWN Frequency Rewriting F269 VII Settings ee ae Voltage Current Selection AI2 F109 Preset Speed 1 F018 Preset Speed 2 F019 Preset Speed 3 F020 Preset Speed 4 F021 Preset Speed 5 F022 Preset Speed 6 F023 Preset Speed 7 F024 Preset Speeds Preset Speed 8 F287 Preset Speed 9 F288 Preset Speed 10 F289 Preset Speed 11 F290 Preset Speed 12 F291 Preset Speed 13 F292 Preset Speed 14 F293 Preset Speed 15 F294 54 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Program Mode Menu Navigation Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name acta FREQUENCY VIAI V I Input Point 1 Setting F201 VI I V D Input Point 1 Frequency F202 VIAI V I Input Point 2 Setting F203 VI I V D Input Point 2 Frequency F204 RR Input Point 1 Setting F210 RR Input Po
275. ion on the G9 ASD system Settings 0 Unlocked 1 Locked Direct Access Number F736 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Locked Changeable During Run Yes Lockout All Keys Program gt Utilities Prohibition This parameter is model specific and has no function on the G9 ASD system Settings 0 Unlocked 1 Locked 200 Direct Access Number F737 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Unlocked Changeable During Run Yes G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F740 F743 Trace Selection Program gt Utilities gt Trace In conjunction with parameter F741 F745 this parameter is used to monitor and store 4 ASD output waveform data points The data may be read and stored as a function of a trip At Trip or it may be initiated by the activation ofa discrete terminal activation At Trigger Set a discrete input terminal to Trace Back Trigger Signal and activate the terminal to initiate the At Trigger read store function Table 10 on pg 241 lists the items that may be selected for the data read store function along with the associated communication number for each selection The duration of the read store cycle for the selected items is set at parameter F741 To acquire and store the data a communications device and a PC are required The G9 ASD supports the following communications protocols RS485 MODBUS RTU Toshiba Protocol USB Toshiba
276. ip Record at Monitor Screen The at trip condition of the last four incurred trips may be viewed on the Monitor Screen The Monitor Screen displays the records of up to four trips and catalogs each trip as Past Trip 1 through Past Trip 4 see pg 44 Once reset Type Reset the trip records are erased If no trips have occurred since being powered up or since the last reset None is displayed for each trip record The Monitor Screen at trip record is erased when the ASD is reset Note An improper ASD setup may cause some trips reset the ASD to the Factory Default settings before pursuing a systemic malfunction Program gt Utilities gt Type Reset gt Reset to Factory Settings Trip History The Trip History screen records the system parameters for up to 20 trips The recorded trips are numbered from zero to 19 Once the Trip History record reaches trip number 19 the oldest recorded trip will be deleted with each new record stored first in first out The Trip field may be selected and scrolled through to view the recorded trip information for a given trip number The monitored parameters are listed in Table 15 as At Trip Recorded Parameters parameter readings at the time that the trip occurred Table 15 Trip History Record Parameters At Trip Recorded Parameters 1 Trip Number 8 Frequency Reference 15 Feedback 1 sec 22 ASD Overload 2 Trip Type 9 Bus Voltage 16 Torque 23 DBR Overload
277. ip is a safety feature that disables the ASD system in the event that a subsystem of the ASD is malfunctioning or a parameter setting has been exceeded Listed in Table 14 are the Faults that may result in a Trip and the possible causes When a Trip is incurred the LCD shows the Fault screen and the LED Screen displays the active Fault code Table 14 G9 ASD Fault Listing LED Screen LCD Screen Possible Causes E Emergency Off Emergency Off command received via EOI or remotely E 10 Sink Source Setting Error Improperly positioned Sink Source jumper on the Terminal board or on an option device see J100 at the Terminal PCB of the ASD Sink Source configuration is incorrect E 11 Brake Sequence Response F630 is set to a non zero value Eror Braking sequence discrete input and output terminals are not setup properly E 12 Encoder Signal Loss Error ASD is configured to receive a signal from a shaft mounted encoder and no signal is being received while running Disconnection at the Encoder circuit e Motor is stopped and is generating torque via torque limit control e ASD is not configured properly E 13 Speed Error Result of a motor speed that is greater than the commanded speed when using an encoder for speed control Improper encoder connection or setup information e Defective encoder E 17 Key Failure Same key input for 20 seconds or more E 18 Analog Terminal In
278. irection is disabled commands received for the disabled direction will not be recognized If both directions are disabled the received direction command will determine the direction of the motor rotation Settings 0 Disabled 1 Enabled F435 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled Direct Access Number Changeable During Run No Power Running Torque Limit 1 Program gt Torque gt Torque Limit Settings This parameter determines the source of the control signal for the positive torque limit setting If Setting is selected the value set at F441 is used as the Power Running Torque Limit 1 input Settings 1 VII V D 2 RR 3 RX 4 F441 Setting Direct Access Number F440 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default F441 Setting Changeable During Run Yes Power Running Torque Limit 1 Level Program gt Torque gt Torque Limit Settings This parameter provides a value for the Power Running Torque Limit 1 setting if F441 Setting is selected at parameter F440 This value provides the positive torque Upper Limit for the 1 motor G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F441 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 250 0 Disabled Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 250 0 Disabled Units 157 F442 F446 Regenerative Braking Torque Limit 1 Program gt Torque
279. ishing the type of data to be written to the ASD of the communications link The communications network includes other ASDs and Host Control computers that monitor the status of the ASD s transfers commands and loads or modifies the parameter settings of the ASD Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled off then on for the changes to take effect Settings 0 None 1 FA00 Command 1 2 FA20 Command 2 3 FAO Frequency 4 FASO TB output 5 FAS1 Analog Output Block Write Data 2 Program gt Communications gt Communication Settings This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by establishing the type of data to be written to the ASD of the communications link The communications network includes other ASDs and Host Control computers that monitor the status of the ASD s transfers commands and loads or modifies the parameter settings of the ASD Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled off then on for the changes to take effect Settings 0 None 1 FA00 Command 1 2 FA20 Command 2 3 FAO Frequency 4 FA50 TB output 5 FAS1 Analog Output G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F870 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default None Changeable During Run Yes F871 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number
280. istic F685 AM Bias Adjustment F686 MON 1 Terminal Meter Selection F672 MON 1 Terminal Meter Adjustment F673 Analog Output MON 1 Output Gradient Characteristic F689 Terminals MON 1 Bias Adjustment F690 MON 1 Voltage Current Output Switching F688 MON 2 Terminal Meter Selection F674 MON 2 Terminal Meter Adjustment F675 MON 2 Output Gradient Characteristic F692 MON 2 Bias Adjustment F693 MON 2 Voltage Current Output Switching F691 Selection of OUT Terminal F669 Pulse Output Function F676 Pulse Output Frequency F677 Forward Reverse Run Priority When Both Are Activated F105 Input Special Input Terminal Priority F106 Functions 16 Bit Binary BCD Input F107 VI II V I Analog Input Broken Wire Detection Level F633 Input Terminal 1 F Response Time F140 Input Terminal 2 R Response Time F141 Input Terminal 3 ST Response Time F142 Input Terminal Delays Input Terminal 4 RES Response Time F143 Input Terminal 5 12 Response Time F144 Input Terminal 13 20 Response Time F145 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 47 Program Mode Menu Navigation Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name hand TERMINAL Always ON Terminal Function F110 Input Terminal 1 F Function F111 Input Terminal 2 R Function F112 Input Terminal 3 ST Function F113 Input Terminal 4 RES Function F114 Input Terminal 5 S1 Function F115 Input Terminal 6 S2
281. l The applied discrete input signal must be present at the input terminal of the G9 ASD for the time setting here for a system response Discrete terminal input activation that does not equal or exceed this setting will be ignored F932 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 01 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 01 Maximum 600 00 Units Seconds My Function Count Data 1 Program My Function gt My Function Data This parameter is used to set the pulse count threshold value used to trigger the discrete output COUNT1 ON Timer COUNT1 ON Timer outputs a 1 upon reaching the threshold setting of this parameter F933 Parameter Type Numerical Direct Access Number Factory Default 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 9999 Units Pulses My Function Count Data 2 Program gt My Function gt My Function Data This parameter is used to set the pulse count threshold value used to trigger the discrete output COUNT2 ON Timer COUNT ON Timer outputs a 1 upon reaching the threshold setting at this parameter F934 Parameter Type Numerical Direct Access Number Factory Default 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 9999 Units Pulses Input Function Target 1 Program gt My Function gt My Function Unit 4 This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My
282. le 19 460 Volt UL Type 1 IP 20 Chassis Standard Ratings Table Output Current ee onto cr ota nae nese ee oR te VT130G9U Decent Seconds Seconds 2Hz Frequency Boren Be gt 125 HP 4015 2 7 3 1 A 41A 1 0 4025 3 6 4 1 A 54A 2 0 4035 5 0 5 8 A TSA 3 0 4055 9 1 10 5 A 13 7A 5 0 4080 12 4 143 A 18 6A 75 4110 15 3 17 6 A 23 0A 10 4160 24 0 27 6 A 36 0A 15 4220 28 6 32 9 A N A 42 9A 20 4270 35 7 41 1 A 53 6 A 25 4330 42 0 48 3 A 63 0 A 30 4400 57 2 65 8 A 85 8 A 380 n a ae eae 40 4500 68 5 78 8 A 102 8 A 50 4600 81 5 93 7 A 122 3A 60 4750 100 8 115 9 A 151 2 A 75 410K 138 7 159 5 A 208 1 A 100 412K 179 196 9 A 268 5 A 125 415K 215 236 5 A 322 5 A 150 420K 259 284 9 A 388 5 A 200 N A 425K 314 345 4 A 471 0 A 250 430K 387 425 7 A 580 5 A 300 435K 427 469 7 A 640 5 A 350 264 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Cable Terminal Torque Specifications Installation should conform to the 2008 National Electrical Code Article 110 NEC Requirements for Electrical Installations all regulations of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration and any other applicable national regional or industry codes and standards Note The following ratings are guidelines and shall not be the sole determining factor of the lug or wire size used with the ASD App
283. le 3 Table 3 on pg 38 shows the hierarchy of the control sources managed by the Override function The level of the control item of the hierarchy is listed from left to right most to least respectively As indicated in the table the Override setting may supersede the F003 setting Selection Placing the EOI in the Local mode selects the RS485 2 wire as the Command Mode control source Local mode operation may be superseded by other Override settings Example With the EOI set to Local Communication Board input or RS485 4 wire input will supersede EOI control input The remaining control sources may be placed into the Override mode using communications The source of the Command control signal may be selected by e The F003 setting e Placing an item from the Command signal source selections in the Override mode via communications or e Placing the EOI in the Local mode places only the RS485 2 wire or the RS485 4 wire in the Override mode Possible Command signal source selections include the following Terminal Block default EOI Keypad e RS485 e Communication Option Board or e F003 setting is used if no signal sources are in the Override mode Note The Terminal Board is placed in the Override mode for Command functions by assigning a discrete terminal to Command Terminal Board Priority and connecting the terminal to CC Once activated Run command required the Terminal Board settings will be use
284. leration rate of the UP DOWN Frequency Functions Note An acceleration time shorter than that which the load will allow may cause nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads Automatic Accel Decel Stall and Ridethrough settings may lengthen the acceleration times Direct Access Number F500 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD Dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum 6000 0 Units Seconds Deceleration Time 2 Program gt Fundamental Accel Decel 1 Settings This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the output of the ASD to go from the Maximum Frequency to 0 0 Hz for the 2 Deceleration profile The Accel Decel pattern may be set using F502 The minimum Accel Decel time may be set using F508 This setting is also used to determine the deceleration rate of the UP DOWN Frequency Functions Note A deceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads Automatic Accel Decel Stall and Ridethrough settings may lengthen the deceleration times 164 Direct Access Number F501 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD Dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum 6000 Units Seconds G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F502 F502 Acc Dec Pattern 1 Program gt Special gt Accel Decel 1 4 Settings Direct Access Number F502 Parame
285. lication specific applicables wire insulation type conductor material and local and regional regulations are but a few of the considerations when selecting the actual lug and wire type to be used with the ASD Note Cable Terminal specifications are based on the rated current of the ASD The specifications DO NOT include the 10 Service Factor Note Use only 75 C copper wire cable for motor and power connections For further installation information see the section titled Installation and Connections on pg 14 Table 20 230 Volt G9 ASD Cable Terminal Torque Specifications Typical Wire Cable Terminal YP Lug Size Range Size Board T orque Model MCP Rating AWG or kemil Number Amps VT130G9U Wire Size Lug Capaci g Capacity for TB1 4 g Input Output Power Input Output Power Terminals 3 Input 30 Output Recommended Maximum 3 Input 3 Output In Lbs Nm 2010 2015 15 14 2025 10 14 to 8 11 5 1 3 2035 12 30 2055 10 2080 8 8 12 to 8 17 7 2 0 50 2110 4 10 to 4 2160 75 a 21 2 4 3 8 to3 3 core shield 2220 100 4 Torque to 5 3 0 6 2270 125 2 2 12 to 1 0 4 to 1 0 50 5 7 53 6 2330 150 1 2400 175 1 0 4 0 6 to 250 2 to 300 275 31 168 19 2500 200 3 0 2600 250 4 0 2750 300 3 0 4 0 6 to 250 275 31 210K 400 250 250 Note Indicates that the item is one of a set of two parallel cables
286. listed motor voltages Table 1 Lead Length Recommendations rth PWM Carrier NEMA MG 1 1998 Section IV Part 31 Frequency Compliant Motors 230 Volt All 1000 feet lt 5 kHz 600 feet 460 Volt gt 5 kHz 300 feet Note Contact the Toshiba Customer Support Center for application assistance when using lead lengths in excess of those listed Exceeding the peak voltage rating or the allowable thermal rise time of the motor insulation will reduce the life expectancy of the motor When operating in the Vector Control mode the carrier frequency should be set to 2 2 kHz or above G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual I O and Control The ASD can be controlled by several input types and combinations thereof as well as operate within a wide range of output frequency and voltage levels This section discusses the ASD control methods and supported I O functions The Terminal Board supports discrete and analog I O functions and is shown in Figure 9 on pg 24 Table 2 lists the names descriptions and default settings of programmable terminals of the input and output terminals of the Terminal Board Note Mode setting must be set to Terminal Block Figure 20 on pg 26 shows the basic connection diagram for the G9 ASD system Table 2 Terminal Board Default Assignment Terminal Names And Functions To use the input lines of the Terminal Board to provide Run commands the Command
287. ll below 50Q because of an over temperature condition or exceed 3000Q because of an open circuit an External Thermal Fault OH2 will be incurred Note While this parameter is Enabled the system cannot be restarted until the thermistor value recovers to the level of 1 8kQ from an over temperature condition An Auto Restart will not be initiated subsequent to an External Thermal Trip OH2 A manual restart will be required in the event of an OH2 trip Settings 0 Disabled 1 Detect Disconnect Braking Resistance Overload Time 10x rated torque Program gt Protection gt Dynamic Braking This parameter sets the time that the braking resistor is allowed to sustain and overload condition before a trip is incurred This feature is useful for applications that have a fluctuating load or for loads that require a long deceleration time F638 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled Direct Access Number Changeable During Run No F639 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 5 0 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 1 Maximum 600 0 Units Seconds Step Out Current Detection Level Program gt Motor PM Motor This parameter is used with synchronous motor applications only Contact the Toshiba Customer Support Center for information on this parameter F640 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 Direct Acces
288. lt ASD Dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 10 Maximum 10 00 Units Seconds Commercial Power Switching Wait Time Program gt Terminal gt Line Power Switching This parameter determines the amount of time that the drive will wait before allowing commercial power to be applied to the motor once the switch to commercial power criteria has been met See parameter F354 for more information on this setting Direct Access Number F357 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 62 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum ASD Dependent Maximum 10 00 Units Seconds Commercial Power Switching Freq Hold Time Program gt Terminal gt Line Power Switching This parameter determines the amount of time that the connection to commercial power is maintained once the switch to drive output criteria has been met See parameter F354 for more information on this setting Direct Access Number F358 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 2 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 10 Maximum 10 00 Units Seconds PID Control Switching Program gt Feedback gt Feedback Settings This parameter is used to set the PID control mode Selecting Process PID uses the upper and Lower Limit settings of parameters F367 and F368 Selecting Speed PID uses the upper and Lower Limit settings of parameters F370 and F371 Settings 0 PID Off
289. lue of several samples G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F209 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default None Changeable During Run Yes 109 F210 F211 RR Input Point 1 Setting Program gt Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RR input terminal when the RR terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode or the Torque Control mode This parameter sets the RR input level that is associated with the RR Input Point 1 Frequency setting when operating in the Speed control mode or is associated with the RR Input Point 1 Rate setting when operating in the Torque Control mode Speed Control Perform the following setup to allow the system to perform Speed control from the RR input terminal Set RR Input Point 1 Frequency F211 Set RR Input Point 1 Setting F210 the input analog signal level that corresponds to the frequency setting at RR Input Point 1 Frequency Set RR Input Point 2 Frequency F213 e Set RR Input Point 2 Setting F212 the input analog signal level that corresponds to the frequency setting at RR Input Point 2 Frequency RR Input Speed Control Setup Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Speed control input at the RR input terminal e Program Fundamental Standard Mode Selection gt Frequency Mode 1 gt RR Program gt
290. m 0 1 Maximum 6000 0 Units F520 Setting G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F552 F560 Speed 13 Operation Time Program gt Pattern Run gt Operation Time This parameter sets the run time for Preset Speed 13 This time is effective when used with Group Speeds and non Group Speeds If the Auto Restart function is activated the search time required for the Auto Restart function will be subtracted from the Operation Time setting resulting in a shorter run time F552 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 5 0 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum 6000 0 Units F520 Setting Speed 14 Operation Time Program gt Pattern Run gt Operation Time This parameter sets the run time for Preset Speed 14 This time is effective when used with Group Speeds and non Group Speeds If the Auto Restart function is activated the search time required for the Auto Restart function will be subtracted from the Operation Time setting resulting in a shorter run time F553 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 5 0 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum 6000 0 Units F520 Setting Speed 15 Operation Time Program gt Pattern Run gt Operation Time This parameter sets the run time for Preset Speed 15 This time is effective when used with Group Speeds and non Group Spe
291. m gt Pattern Run gt Operation Mode Same as Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode see F561 F574 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default Forward Run Changeable During Run No Preset Speed 15 Operation Mode Program gt Pattern Run gt Operation Mode Same as Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode see F561 F575 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default Forward Run Changeable During Run No Motor Overload Protection Level 1 Program gt Fundamental gt Motor Set 1 This parameter specifies the motor overload current level for Motor Set 1 This value is entered as either a percentage of the full load rating of the ASD or as a percentage of the FLA of the motor The unit of measurement for this parameter may be set to A V Amps or it may be set as a percentage of the ASD rating The nameplated FLA of the motor may be entered directly when Amps is selected as the unit of measurement see F701 to change the display unit Motor Overload Protection Level 1 settings will be displayed in Amps if the EOI display units are set to A V rather than F600 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 10 Maximum 100 0 Units Stall Prevention Level Program gt Protection gt Stall This parameter specifies the output current level a
292. m should be inspected periodically for damaged or improperly functioning parts cleanliness and to ensure that the connectors are tightened securely G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 9 Motor Characteristics Listed below are some variable speed AC motor control concepts with which the user of the ASD should become familiar Motor Autotuning Motor production methods may cause minor differences in motor operation The negative effects of these differences may be minimized by using the Autotune feature of the ASD Autotuning is a function of the ASD that measures several parameters of the connected motor and places these readings in a stored table The software uses the information in the table to help optimize the response of the ASD to application specific load and operational requirements The Autotuning function may be enabled for automatic tuning configured manually at F400 or disabled The measured parameters include the rotor resistance the stator resistance the required excitation inductance rotational inertia values and leakage inductance values Pulse Width Modulation Operation The ASD uses sinusoidal Pulse Width Modulation PWM control The output current waveform generated by the ASD approaches that of a perfect sine wave however the output waveform is slightly distorted For this reason the motor may produce more heat noise and vibration when operated by an ASD rather than directly from commercial power Lo
293. made to this parameter require that the power be cycled off then on for the changes to take effect 206 F820 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 19200 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes F825 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 2 00 Units Seconds G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F826 F830 RS485 ASD to ASD Communications Program Communications Communication Settings The function of this parameter is 2 fold 1 In a Master Follower configuration and while communicating via RS485 4 Wire this parameter sets the ASD as the Master or the Follower 2 This parameter determines the function of the ASD while operating as the Master or the Follower If operating as the Master ASD an output parameter of the Master ASD is used to control the Follower ASDs and is set here If operating as a Follower ASD the ASD response if an error is incurred is set here Note Selecta Follower function here if F806 is configured as a Master Output controller for any other ASD in the system Otherwise an EOI failure will result Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled off then on for the changes to take effect Settings 0 Follower Decel Stop If Error Detected 1 Follower Continues Operation If Error Detected 2 Follower E
294. mergency Off If Error Detected 3 Master Frequency Command 4 Master Output Frequency 5 Master Torque Reference 6 Master Output Torque Direct Access Number F826 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Follower Decel Stop Changeable During Run Yes RS485 Protocol Selection TSB ModBus Program gt Communications Communication Settings This parameter sets the communications protocol for ASD to ASD communications Settings 0 Toshiba 1 Modbus Direct Access Number F829 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Toshiba Changeable During Run Yes Communications Option DeviceNet Profibus Setting 1 Program gt Communications Communication Settings While using the DeviceNet Profibus communications protocol this parameter allows the user to select the read and write information communicated between the ASD and the Host Read information may include the ASD fault status ASD speed ASD MAC ID etc Write information may include Enable Disable DeviceNet commands Forward run ACC DEC command etc See the DeviceNet Option Instruction Manual P N 58683 for more information on this parameter Settings 0 7 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F830 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 Changeable During Run Yes 207 F831 F836 Communications Option DeviceNet Profibus
295. minal Board connections See the section titled Terminal Descriptions on pg 22 for terminal descriptions See the section titled Cable Terminal Torque Specifications on pg 265 for information on the proper cable terminal sizes and torque specifications when making Terminal Board connections 24 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual V O Circuit Configurations Figure 10 Discrete Input Figure 11 RR Input fan 5 ntrol Boarol P op ach i Th om Fi _ 30k NQ Por nput mpedance A 1Sk OL RR gt 5ka 004727 A uf CCA o V V V Use the CCA terminal as the RR signal return Figure 12 RX Input V I Input TICC Figure 13 V I Isolated Input 256 7 k O Input Impedance P15C I Current PISA y S V Voltage SW301 Setting HH Board 297 kQ To Cont 30k Q PIS Input Impedance A RX G T EE 15k Q A 72 CCA Use the CCA terminal as the RX signal return Input Impedance Ales Use the IICC terminal as the V I signal return Figure 14 P24 Output Output Current Figure 15 PP Output Limiter Figure 16 OUT1 OUT2 Output gt grammats 1 Ng
296. mode Note When operating in the Vector Control mode the carrier frequency should be set to 2 2 kHz or above If the motor that is coupled to a load that has a large backlash or a reciprocating load use one of the following procedures to stabilize its operation e Adjust the S pattern acceleration deceleration setting If operating in the Vector control mode adjust the response time or e Switch to the Constant Torque control mode G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 11 Load Produced Negative Torque When the ASD is used with a load that produces negative torque an overhauling load the over voltage or over current protective functions of the ASD may cause nuisance tripping To minimize the undesirable effects of negative torque the dynamic braking system may be used The dynamic braking system converts the regenerated energy into heat that is dissipated using a braking resistor The braking resistor must be suitably matched to the load Dynamic braking is also effective in reducing the DC bus voltage during a momentary over voltage condition CAUTION If under extreme conditions the dynamic braking system or a component of this system were to fail the dynamic braking resistor may experience an extended over current condition The DBR circuit was designed to dissipate excessive amounts of heat and if the extended over current condition were allowed to exceed the circuit parameters this condition could result in a fire ha
297. mum 10 0 Maximum 100 0 Units AM Output Gradient Characteristic Program gt Terminal gt Analog Output Terminals This parameter sets the output response polarity of the AM output terminal The AM output terminal response may be set to respond inversely or directly to the input signal See F670 for more information on this setting Settings 0 Minus Negative Gradient 1 Plus Positive Gradient AM Bias Adjustment Program gt Terminal gt Analog Output Terminals This parameter setting is used to ensure that a zero level input signal produces a zero level output at the AM terminal Set the function set at F670 to zero and then set this parameter to zero for proper operation See F670 for more information on this setting F685 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default Plus Changeable During Run Yes F686 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 10 0 Maximum 100 0 Units MON 1 Voltage Current Output Switching Program gt Terminal gt Analog Output Terminals This parameter is used to set the output signal type of the MONI output terminal Settings 0 10 V 10 V 1 0 10 V 2 0 20 mA F688 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 10V Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Ye
298. n required IGBT7 is a standard item on the 25 HP and below G9 ASD 230 volt systems and is standard on the 400 HP and below for the for the 460 volt systems IGBT7 is optional for all remaining systems Dynamic Braking Dynamic Braking is used to prevent over voltage faults during rapid deceleration or constant speed run on cyclic overhauling applications Dynamic Braking dissipates regenerated energy in the form of heat When using a DBR use thermal protection The resistive load is connected across terminals PA and PB non polarized Using a low value high wattage resistance as a load for the generated current the resistive load dissipates the induced energy Dynamic Braking helps to slow the load quickly it cannot act as a holding brake The Dynamic Braking function may be setup and enabled by connecting a braking resistor from terminal PA to PB of the drive and providing the proper information at F304 F308 and F309 See the section titled Dynamic Braking Resistor Wire Cable Specifications on pg 267 for more information on using the DBR system and for assistance in selecting the appropriate resistor for a given application Over Voltage Limit Operation Direct Access Number F305 Program Protection Stall Parameter Type Selection List This parameter enables the Over Voltage Limit function This feature is used Factory Default ASD Dependent to set the upper DC bus voltage threshold that once exceeded will c
299. n Data This parameter is used to set the trigger threshold level of the analog signal of the My Function Frequency Data 5 The analog signal is selected using the Input Setting number from Table 8 on pe 239 Direct Access Number F927 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 200 00 Units My Function Time Data 1 Program My Function gt My Function Data This parameter is used to set the response delay of the My Function Time Data 1 terminal The applied discrete input signal must be present at the input terminal of the G9 ASD for the time setting here for a system response Discrete terminal input activation that does not equal or exceed this setting will be ignored Direct Access Number F928 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 01 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 01 Maximum 600 00 Units Seconds My Function Time Data 2 Program gt My Function gt My Function Data This parameter is used to set the response delay of the My Function Time Data 2 terminal The applied discrete input signal must be present at the input terminal of the G9 ASD for the time setting here for a system response Discrete terminal input activation that does not equal or exceed this setting will be ignored Direct Access Number F929 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 01 Changeable Durin
300. n and Operation Manual LED Screen LCD Screen Possible Causes OC2 Over Current During Phase to phase short U V or W een anon e Deceleration time is too short e Motor machine jammed e Mechanical brake engaged while the ASD is running e ASD current exceeds 340 of the rated FLA on ASDs that are 100 HP or less during deceleration On ASDs that are greater than 100 HP it occurs when the ASD current exceeds 320 of the rated FLA during deceleration OC2P Over Heat During e Cooling fan inoperative Deceleration e Ventilation openings are obstructed Internal thermistor is disconnected e Deceleration time is too short DC Injection current is too high ASD or the motor is improperly matched to the application OCc3 Over Current During Run Load fluctuations e ASD is operating at an elevated temperature e ASD current exceeds 340 of the rated FLA on ASDs that are 100 HP or less during a fixed speed run or if during a fixed speed run the ASD overheats On ASDs that are greater than 100 HP it occurs when the ASD current exceeds 320 of the rated FLA on a fixed speed run OC3P Over Heat During Run e Cooling fan inoperative e Ventilation openings are obstructed Internal thermistor is disconnected Improper V f setting e ASD or the motor is improperly matched to the application OCA1 or OCL U Phase Over Current Low impedance at the U lead of the ASD output OCA2 or OCL V P
301. n operating in the Torque Control mode RX2 Al1 Input Speed Control Setup Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Speed control input at the RX2 AI1 input terminal Program gt Fundamental Standard Mode Selection gt Frequency Mode 1 gt RX2 Program gt Fundamental gt Standard Mode Selection gt Command Mode Selection gt Terminal Block Speed Control Perform the following setup to allow the system to perform Speed control from the RX2 AI1 input terminal Set RX2 AIl Input Point 1 Frequency F223 Set RX2 AIl Input Point 1 Setting F222 the input analog signal level that corresponds to the speed setting at RX2 AI1 Input Point 1 Frequency Set RX2 AIl Input Point 2 Frequency F225 Set RX2 AIl Input Point 2 Setting F224 the input analog signal level that corresponds to the speed setting at RX Input Point 2 Frequency Provide a Run command F and or R Once set as the RX2 AI1 input voltage changes the ASD output speed and or torque will vary in accordance with the above settings This parameter value is entered as 100 to 100 of the RX2 AI1 input signal range See the Expansion IO Card Option 1 Instruction Manual P N 58685 for more information on the function of this terminal See parameter F476 and F477 for information on fine tuning this terminal response 116 Direct Access Number F222 Parameter Type Numerical Facto
302. n to be included in the Group 2 Selection Skip may be selected to ignore this Selection Setting 0 Skip 1 15 Preset Speed Number See F523 for more information on this parameter Direct Access Number F533 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Skip Changeable During Run No Pattern Group 2 Selection 3 Program gt Pattern Run gt Speeds This parameter allows the user to select 1 of 15 configured Preset Speeds as the number 3 selection to be included in the Group 2 Selection Skip may be selected to ignore this Selection Setting 0 Skip 1 15 Preset Speed Number See F523 for more information on this parameter Direct Access Number F534 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Skip Changeable During Run No Pattern Group 2 Selection 4 Program gt Pattern Run gt Speeds This parameter allows the user to select 1 of 15 configured Preset Speeds as the number 4 selection to be included in the Group 2 Selection Skip may be selected to ignore this Selection Setting 0 Skip 1 15 Preset Speed Number See F523 for more information on this parameter G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F535 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Skip Changeable During Run No 175 F536 F539 Pattern Group 2 Selection 5 Program gt Pattern Run gt Speeds This parameter allows the user to select 1
303. nabled this parameter writes the running frequency into the F268 location and upon a system restart uses this setting as the startup frequency Provide a Run command F or R The motor will run at the F268 setting 128 F264 Parameter Type Numerical Direct Access Number Factory Default 0 1 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 10 0 Units Seconds Up Down Frequency up Mode DOWN Frequer Colown Terminal Activation G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F265 F269 UP DOWN Frequency up Frequency Step No Path Direct Access Only This parameter sets the frequency increase amount for each activation of the UP DOWN Frequency up terminal activation The rate of the frequency increase is set at Acceleration Time 1 F009 See F264 for more information on this parameter F265 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 10 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz UP DOWN Frequency down Response Time No Path Direct Access Only This parameter sets the system response delay to the initial activation of the discrete input terminal UP DOWN Frequency down Also sets the activation delay of subsequent terminal activations of the UP DOWN Frequency down terminal during an activate and hold See F264 for more information
304. nal Board 21 24 279 Terminal Descriptions 22 Time Limit For Lower Limit Frequency Operation 125 Torque 44 59 Torque Bias Input Selection 143 Torque Command Selection 154 Torque Control 59 60 Torque Current 44 Torque Limit Settings 60 Torque Reference 44 Torque Speed Limiting 60 Trace 49 50 Trace Cycle 201 Trace Data 1 201 Trace Data 2 201 Trace Data 3 202 Trace Data 4 202 Trace Selection 201 Traverse 58 Traverse Acceleration Time 233 Traverse Deceleration Time 233 Traverse Jump Step 233 Traverse Selection 233 Traverse Step 233 Trip Code 44 Trip History 253 Trip History read only 50 51 Trip Record at Monitor Screen 253 Trip Settings 53 Trouble Shooting 244 Type Error 250 Type Reset 50 79 U J T1 16 17 JC 247 JL 1995 254 Jnder Voltage Trip 187 nder Voltage Trip Detection Time 188 Jnder Voltage Ridethrough 53 JP DOWN Frequency down Frequency Step 129 P DOWN Frequency down Response Time 129 Gea EG GGG cea UP DOWN Frequency up Frequency Step 129 UP DOWN Frequency up Response Time 128 UP DOWN Frequency Functions 54 Up Down Frequency Operation 130 UPI 252 UP2 252 U Phase Over Current 251 Ge Jpper Limit Frequency 81 pper Limit Frequency 71 Jser Notification Codes 245 C O 280 User Notification codes 244 Utilities 49 V V f 5 Point Setting Frequency 1 101 V f 5 Point Setting Frequency 2 102 V f
305. nal Selections Input Function Function Name Function Description Command 0 NOP No Operation Disables the My Function feature 1 ST Execute data read transfer 2 STN Execute inverted data read transfer 3 AND Logical product of A AND B 4 ANDN Logical product of A AND B 2 OR Logical sum of A OR B 6 ORN Logical sum of A OR B T EQ Compares data Outputs 1 if Equal 0 if not Equal 8 NE Compares data Outputs 0 if Equal 1 if not Equal 9 GT Compares data Outputs 1 if A gt B 0 if A lt B 10 GE Compares data Outputs 1 if A gt B 0 if A lt B 11 LT Compares data Outputs 1 if A lt B 0 if AB 12 LE Compares data Outputs 1 if ASB 0 if A gt B 13 ASUB Outputs absolute difference between A and B A B 14 ON Timer a ni oa seed ia of My Function Time Data 1 5 15 OFF Timer ai eae eae a of My Function Time Data 1 5 16 COUNT Timer Outputs a 1 upon reaching the pulse count setting of F933 17 COUNT2 Timer Outputs a 1 upon reaching the pulse count setting of F934 18 HOLD Outputs the peak output value since powering up or since the last reset 19 SET Sets data 20 RESET Resets data G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 243 Alarms Trips and Troubleshooting 244 Alarms and Trips This section lists the available user notification codes of the EOI display and provides information that assists the user in the event that a
306. nal may be configured to increase or decrease the speed of the motor by momentarily connecting the assigned discrete input terminal to CC See F264 on pg 128 for further information on this feature 11 Pulse Input Option Used to allow the system to use a pulsed input for frequency control See PG Input Point 1 Setting on pg 122 for further information on this feature 12 Pulse Input motor CPU Used to allow the system to use a pulsed input for frequency control See PG Input Point 1 Setting on pg 122 for further information on this feature 13 Binary BCD Input Option Allows for discrete terminal to be used for frequency control input G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual System Configuration and Menu Options Root Menus The Mode key accesses the three primary modes of the ASD the Frequency Command mode the Monitor mode and the Program mode From either mode press the Mode key to loop through to the other two modes see Figure 27 While in the Frequency Command mode pressing the ESC key toggles the menu to and from the EOI Command mode and the Frequency Command mode The Alarm or Fault information will be displayed in the event of an active Alarm or Fault Alarm text will be displayed on the Frequency Command screen and on the LED Screen when active Fault information will be displayed via the Fault screen See Alarms and Trips on pg 244 for more information on Alarms and Trips Note EOI Command mode changes are effe
307. ncy gt V I Settings This parameter is used to set the AI2 input terminal to receive either current or voltage as a control signal Note The Expansion IO Card Option 2 option board P N ETB004Z is required to use this terminal See the Expansion IO Card Option 2 Instruction Manual P N 58686 for more information on the function of this terminal Settings 0 Voltage Input 1 Current Input Direct Access Number F109 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Voltage Input Changeable During Run No Always ON 1 Terminal 1 Program gt Terminal gt Input Terminals gt ON This parameter is used to set the functionality of the virtual discrete input terminal ON As a virtual terminal the ON control terminal exists only in memory and is considered to always be in its True connected to CC state It is often practical to assign a function to this terminal that the user desires to be maintained regardless of external conditions or operations This parameter sets the programmable ON terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 5 on pg 234 Direct Access Number F110 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Unassigned Changeable During Run No Input Terminal 1 F Function Program gt Terminal gt Input Terminals This parameter is used to set the functionality of the F discrete input terminal In addition this input terminal must be spe
308. nd OUT2 to Commercial Power ASD Switching 1 and 2 respectively Note Ensure that the switching directions are the same and that F311 is set to Permit All Note The OUTI and OUT2 outputs assigned to Commercial Power ASD Switching Output are used to actuate the re routing contactors 146 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F355 F359 Commercial Power ASD Switching Frequency Program gt Terminal gt Line Power Switching When enabled at F354 and with a properly configured discrete output terminal this parameter sets the frequency at which the At Frequency Powerline Switching function engages The At Frequency Powerline Switching function commands the system to discontinue using the output of the drive and to switch to commercial power once reaching the frequency set here See parameter F354 for more information on this setting Direct Access Number F355 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 60 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz ASD Side Switching Wait Time Program gt Terminal gt Line Power Switching This parameter determines the amount of time that the drive will wait before outputting a signal to the motor once the switch to drive output criteria has been met See parameter F354 for more information on this setting Direct Access Number F356 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Defau
309. nd described below Note The Monitor mode is a read only mode The settings cannot be changed from the Monitor mode For information on how to change the values see the section titled Default Setting Changes on pg 74 Note Any two of the Underlined monitored items may be selected for display at the Frequency Command screen while running via Program gt Utilities gt Main Monitor Selections see pg 45 for information on using the Main Monitor Selections feature Note The F701 setting will determine if the Current and Voltage values displayed appear as A Amps and V Voltage or if the value is shown as a percentage of the ASD rating Frequency at Trip Displays the at trip frequency Frequency Reference Displays the Frequency Setpoint Output Current Displays the Output Current as a percentage of the rated capacity of the ASD DC Bus Voltage Displays the Bus Voltage as a percentage of the rated capacity of the ASD Output Voltage Displays the Output Voltage as a percentage of the rated capacity of the ASD AM Output Displays the AM output terminal value for the function assigned to the AM terminal FM Output Displays the FM output terminal value for the function assigned to the FM terminal Motor OL Overload Real Displays the real time Motor Overload value as a percentage of the rated capacity of the motor Motor OL Overload Trip Displays the Motor Overload Trip value as a percentage of th
310. nd select EOI Keypad to use the EOI for control G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F040 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run No 85 F100 F105 Low Speed Signal Output Frequency Direct Access Number F100 Program gt Terminal gt Reach Settings Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 The Low Speed Signal Output Frequency parameter sets a frequency threshold that activates the assigned output terminal for the duration that the Changeable During Run Yes ASD output is equal to or above this setting see Table 8 on pg 239 for the Minimum 0 00 available output assignments Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz Speed Reach Frequency Direct Access Number F101 Program Terminal gt Reach Settings Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 The Speed Reach Frequency sets a frequency threshold that when reached or is within the bandwidth specified by parameter F102 activates the assigned Changeable During Run Yes output terminal for the duration that the ASD output is within the bandwidth Minimum 0 00 specified see Table 8 on pg 239 for the available output assignments Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz Speed Reach Detection Band Direct Access Number F102 Program gt Terminal gt Reach Settings Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 2 50 This paramet
311. nerative Braking Torque Limit 2 Level F445 Manual Torque Limit Power Running Torque Limit 3 Level F446 Settings Regenerative Braking Torque Limit 3 Level F447 Power Running Torque Limit 4 Level F448 Regenerative Braking Torque Limit 4 Level F449 VII V D Input Point 1 Rate F205 VI I V I Input Point 2 Rate F206 RR Input Point 1 Rate F214 RR Input Point 2 Rate F215 Setpoints RX Input Point 1 Rate F220 RX Input Point 2 Rate F221 RX2 Option AI1 Input Point 1 Rate F226 RX2 Option AI1 Input Point 2 Rate F227 Braking Mode F341 Torque Bias Input F342 Torque Control Panel Torque Bias F343 Panel Torque Gain F344 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 59 Program Mode Menu Navigation Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name raha TORQUE Release Time F345 Creeping Frequency F346 Creeping Time F347 Braking Time Learning Function F348 Torque Command F420 Torque Control Tension Torque Bias Input Torque Control F423 Load Sharing Gain Input F424 Forward Speed Limit Input F425 Forward Speed Limit Input Level F426 Reverse Speed Limit Input F427 Reverse Speed Limit Input Level F428 Power Running Torque Limit 1 F440 Power Running Torque Limit 1 Level F441 Torque Limit Settings Regenerative Braking Torque Limit 1 F442 Regenerative Braking Torque Limit 1 Level F443 Acceleration Deceleration Operation After Torque Limit F451 Speed Limit To
312. nfigured Preset Speeds as the number 8 selection to be included in the Group 2 Selection Skip may be selected to ignore this Selection Setting 0 Skip 1 15 Preset Speed Number See F523 for more information on this parameter 176 Direct Access Number F539 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Skip Changeable During Run No G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F540 F545 Speed 1 Operation Time Program gt Pattern Run gt Operation Time This parameter sets the run time for Preset Speed 1 This time is effective when used with Group Speeds and non Group Speeds If the Auto Restart function is activated the search time required for the Auto Restart function will be subtracted from the Operation Time setting resulting in a shorter run time F540 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 5 0 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum 6000 0 Units F520 Setting Speed 2 Operation Time Program gt Pattern Run gt Operation Time This parameter sets the run time for Preset Speed 2 This time is effective when used with Group Speeds and non Group Speeds If the Auto Restart function is activated the search time required for the Auto Restart function will be subtracted from the Operation Time setting resulting in a shorter run time F541 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 5 0 Direct Acce
313. ng Hardware e EOI Remote Mount Housing P N 58333 included with 230 volt 40 HP and above and with the 460 volt 75 HP and above e 6 32 x 5 16 Pan Head Screw P N 50595 4 ea 6 Split Lock Washer P N 01884 4 ea 6 Flat Washer P N 01885 4 ea Bezel Plate Mounting Hardware e Bezel Plate P N 52291 e 10 32 Hex Nut P N 01922 4 ea 10 Split Lock Washer P N 01923 4 ea e 10 Flat Washer P N 01924 4 ea e Dust Cover P N ASD BPC Optional Extender Cable ASD CABIOF Cable 9 ft Keypad Installation Precautions Install the unit securely in a well ventilated area that is out of direct sunlight using the four mounting holes at the rear of the keypad The ambient temperature rating for the keypad is 14 to 104 F 10 to 40 C e Select a mounting location that is easily accessible by the user e Avoid installation in areas where vibration heat humidity dust metal particles or high levels of electrical noise EMI are present e Do not install the keypad where it may be exposed to flammable chemicals or gases water solvents or other fluids Turn on the power only after securing the front cover of the ASD G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 33 34 Keypad Remote Mounting w o the ASD MTG KIT Note See Figure 25 for the dimensions and the item locations referenced in steps 1 through 5 At the keypad mounting location mark the 3 80 by 3 56 hole
314. ngage the Light Load High Speed function F332 Parameter Type Numerical Direct Access Number Factory Default 0 5 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 10 0 Units Seconds Light Load High Speed Operation Detection Time Program gt Special gt Crane Hoist Settings After the time setting of F332 times out this parameter determines the length of time that the Light Load High Speed criteria must be met until the Light Load High Speed function engages F333 Parameter Type Numerical Direct Access Number Factory Default 1 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 10 0 Units Seconds Light Load High Speed Operation Heavy Load Detection Time Program gt Special gt Crane Hoist Settings While operating in the Light Load High Speed mode this parameter determines the length of time that a load exceeding the Light Load High Speed operation criteria may exist before the Light Load High Speed mode is terminated and normal operation resumes G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F334 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 5 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 10 0 Units Seconds 141 F335 F341 Switching Load Torque During Power Running Program gt Special Crane Hoist Settings During power running this parameter establishes the threshold t
315. nimum 0 Maximum 255 Direct Access Number F475 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 127 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 255 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F476 F479 RX2 Al1 Input Bias Program gt Frequency gt Speed Reference Setpoints This parameter is used to fine tune the bias of the RX2 AI1 input terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode or the Torque Control mode This setting may be used to ensure that the zero level of the input source pot pressure transducer flow meter etc is also the zero level setting of the ASD system This is accomplished by setting the input source to zero and adjusting this setting to provide a zero output from the ASD Direct Access Number F476 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 128 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 255 RX2 Al1 Input Gain Program gt Frequency gt Speed Reference Setpoints This parameter is used to fine tune the gain of the RX2 AIl input terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode or the Torque Control mode This setting may be used to ensure that the 100 level of the input source pot pressure transducer flow meter etc is also the 100 level setting of the ASD system This is accomplished by setting the input source to
316. nnected to a node of the communications system The MAC Address is set via DIP switches of the optional device See the DeviceNet Option Instruction Manual P N 58683 for more information on this parameter 210 F853 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 Disabled Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 255 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F854 F871 Communications Option Speed Switch Monitor DeviceNet CC Link Program gt Communications Communication Settings This parameter is used in the setup of the communications network by reading the hardware specific settings of the option card being used with the ASD If using the DEV002Z Devicenet card this parameter reads the hardware switch SW300 setting of the Devicenet card SW300 sets the baud rate and the MAC address of the option card that is connected to a node of the communications system See the DeviceNet Option Instruction Manual P N 58683 for more information on this parameter or see the Instruction manual for the option being used with the G9 ASD F854 Parameter Type Hardware Selectable Direct Access Number Factory Default Option Specific Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 Maximum 255 Block Write Data 1 Program gt Communications Communication Settings This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by establ
317. nstallation and Operation Manual F916 F919 Input Function Target 3 Program My Function gt My Function Unit 3 This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 3 terminal This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target 3 terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 7 on pg 238 Table 8 on pg 239 or Table 10 on pg 241 See F977 for more information on this parameter Direct Access Number F916 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 Disabled Changeable During Run Yes Output Function Assigned Program gt My Function gt My Function Unit 3 This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the Output Function Assigned terminal This setting assigns the function of the programmable Output Function Assigned data location to one of the functions listed in the Input Setting field of Table 8 on pg 239 Settings 0 3099 See the My Function Instruction Manual P N E6581335 and F977 for more information on this parameter Direct Access Number F917 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 Disabled Changeable During Run Yes My Function Percent Data 1 Program gt My Function gt My Function Data This parameter is used to set the trigger threshold level
318. nto a spinning motor Motor machine jammed Mechanical brake engaged while the ASD is starting or while running Accel Decel time is too short Voltage Boost setting is too high Load fluctuations ASD operating at an elevated temperature OH Over Heat ASD ambient temperature ASD is operating at an elevated temperature CNN ASD is too close to heat generating equipment Cooling fan vent is obstructed see Mounting the ASD on pg 15 Cooling fan is inoperative Internal thermistor is disconnected OJ Timer Run time counter exceeded Type Reset required select Clear Run Timer Reset ignored if active 246 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual LED LCD Description Possibl Screen Sereen escriptio ossible Causes OLI ASD Overload Load requirement in excess of The carrier frequency is too high the capability of the ASD An excessive load Acceleration time is too short DC damping rate is set too high The motor is starting into a spinning load after a momentary power failure The ASD is improperly matched to the application OLM Motor Overload Load requirement in excess of V f parameter improperly set the capability of the motor Motor is locked Continuous operation at low speed The load is in excess of what the motor can deliver OLR Resistor Excessive current at the Deceleration time is too short Overload Dynamic Braking Resistor DBR configuration improperly set OP
319. nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads Automatic Accel Decel Stall and Ridethrough settings may lengthen the deceleration times Direct Access Number F010 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD Dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum 6000 Units Seconds Maximum Frequency Program gt Fundamental gt Frequency Settings This setting determines the absolute maximum frequency that the ASD can output Accel Decel times are calculated based on the Maximum Frequency setting The Maximum Frequency is not limited by this setting while operating in the Drooping Control mode see F320 for more information on this setting Note This setting may not be lower than the Upper Limit Frequency F012 Direct Access Number F011 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 80 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 30 0 Maximum 299 0 Units Hz G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F012 F015 Upper Limit Frequency Program gt Fundamental gt Frequency Settings This parameter sets the highest frequency that the ASD will accept as a frequency command or frequency setpoint The ASD may output frequencies higher than the Upper Limit Frequency but lower than the Maximum Frequency when operating in the PID Control mode Torque Control mode or the Vector Control modes sensorless or feedback Note This setting may not be high
320. o change states when an EOFF condition occurs by setting the FL terminal to Fault FL all see F132 Note A supplemental emergency stopping system should be used with the ASD Emergency stopping should not be a task of the ASD alone Settings 0 Coast Stop 1 Deceleration Stop 2 DC Injection Braking Stop 3 Deceleration Stop Decel 4 setting F515 F603 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default Coast Stop Changeable During Run No Emergency Off DC Injection Application Time Program gt Protection gt Emergency Off Settings When DC Injection is selected at F603 this parameter determines the time that the DC Injection Braking is applied to the motor F604 Parameter Type Numerical Direct Access Number Factory Default 1 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 20 0 Units Seconds ASD Output Phase Failure Detection Program gt Protection gt Phase Loss This parameter Enables Disables the monitoring of each phase of the 3 phase output signal U V or W of the ASD If either line is missing inactive or not of the specified level for one second or more the ASD incurs a trip Note Autotune checks for phase failures regardless of this setting Settings 0 Disabled No Detection 1 Enabled Run at Startup and Retry 2 Enabled Every Run Command and Retry 3 Enabled During Run
321. o close the Startup Wizard when done 1 The Voltage and Frequency Rating of the Motor Must make a selection to continue or select Finish 2 The Upper Limit Frequency 3 The Lower Limit Frequency 4 The Automatic Acceleration Deceleration Setting 5 The Acceleration Time 6 The Deceleration Time 7 The Volts per Hertz Setting 8 The Motor Current Rating 9 The Motor RPM 10 The Command Source 11 The Frequency Reference Source 12 The Display Unit 13 Wizard Finish 70 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Startup Wizard Parameter Requirements The Startup Wizard queries the user for information on the I O signal parameters control and the EOI display settings of the ASD The ASD may also be setup by directly accessing each of the startup settings via the Program menu or the associated Direct Access Numbers see the section titled Direct Access Parameter Information on pg 76 Upon initial system power up the Startup Wizard starts automatically It may also be run from the Program menu after startup if required The user is queried to either 1 Run Now 2 Run Next Time or 3 Manually Configure the ASD Select Run Now to start the Startup Wizard The wizard will assist the user with the configuration of the ASD using the user input screens below Select Run Next Time to return to the Program menu The system will default to the Startup Wizard on the next power up Select Manually Configure to go to
322. ode 2 default SW301 setting Multifunctional Figure 13 on pg 25 programmable isolated analog current input 4 0 to 20 mADC input 0 Hz to Maximum Frequency Output Current Current output that is proportional to the output current of the AM ASD or to the magnitude of the function assigned to this terminal see Table 6 on 237 fe i nt listing Analog Output Pe sii ta 8 Figure 18 on pg 25 Output Frequency Current or Voltage output that is proportional to the output FM frequency of the ASD or to the magnitude of the function assigned to this terminal see Table 6 on pg 237 Select Current or Voltage at F681 SU DC Input Externally supplied 24 VDC backup control power 1 1 A min P24 24 VDC output 200 mA max Figure 14 on pg 25 DC Output PP 10 0 VDC 10 mA voltage source for the external potentiometer Figure 15 on pg 25 Frequency Pulse Multifunctional programmable output pulse train of a i F 1 ae ee Pulsed Oitp t frequency based on the output frequency of the ASD see Table 6 on pg 237 uee irena 2a IICC Return for the V I input terminal see IICC Note on pg 105 DO NOT CCA Return for the RR RX P24 and the PP terminals connect to Earth Gnd or to each CC Return for the AM FM SU and the discrete input terminal other G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 21 22 Terminal Descriptions Note The programmable terminal assignments may be accessed and changed from their default s
323. ogrammable Input Function Target 2 terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 7 on pg 238 Table 8 on pg 239 or Table 10 on pg 241 See F977 for more information on this parameter Direct Access Number F908 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 Disabled Changeable During Run Yes Input Function Command 2 Program gt My Function gt My Function Unit 2 This parameter is used to assign a user selected logical operator to two user selected Input Function Target variables enable a counter timer function or perform a hold reset function Table 11 on pg 243 lists the available selections Their use and selection requirements are described in an example at F977 Direct Access Number F909 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 NOP Input Function Target 3 Program gt My Function gt My Function Unit 2 This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 3 terminal This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target 3 terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 7 on pg 238 Table 8 on pg 239 or Table 10 on pg 241 See F977 for more information on this parameter G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F910 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 Disabl
324. oint 2 Setting when operating in the Speed Control mode See V I Input Point 1 Setting F201 for more information on this setting 106 F204 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 60 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F205 F205 VI II V I Input Point 1 Rate Direct Access Number F205 Program gt Torque gt Setpoints Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the isolated V I input terminal when the V I terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Torque Control mode Minimum 0 00 Maximum 250 00 Changeable During Run Yes V I Input Torque Control Setup Units Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Torque Control i Torque Settings input at the V I input terminal vit Point P 100 a Set SW301 of the Terminal Board to Voltage or Current see Figure 9 on pa pg 24 e Program gt Fundamental gt Standard Mode Selection gt Frequency Mode 1 gt VIL e Program gt Fundamental gt Standard Mode Selection gt Command Mode Selection gt Terminal Block Input Sign Torque Control vi Point 1 Rate F205 Perform the following setup to allow the system to pe
325. on Level setting will be displayed in Amps if the EOI display units are set to A V rather than F172 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD Dependent Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 30 0 Units F173 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 10 Maximum 100 Units G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F174 F177 Base Frequency 3 Program gt Motor gt Motor Set 3 The Base Frequency 3 setting is the frequency at which the output voltage of the ASD reaches its maximum setting The Base Frequency Voltage 3 parameter is set at F175 This parameter is used only when the parameters for Motor Set 3 are configured and selected Motor Set 3 may be selected by a properly configured input terminal see Table 5 on pg 234 For proper motor operation the Base Frequency should be set for the nameplated frequency of the motor F174 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 60 0 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 25 0 Maximum 299 0 Units Hz Base Frequency Voltage 3 Program gt Motor gt Motor Set 3 The Base Frequency Voltage 3 setting is the Motor Set 3 output voltage at the Base Frequency F174 Regardless of the programmed value the output voltage cannot be higher than the input
326. on of motor rotation in the Bypass mode if applicable Turn the power on only after attaching and or securing the front cover Protection Ensure that primary protection exists for the input wiring to the equipment This protection must be able to interrupt the available fault current from the power line The equipment may or may not be equipped with an input disconnect option e All cable entry openings must be sealed to reduce the risk of entry by vermin and to allow for maximum cooling efficiency e External dynamic braking resistors must be thermally protected e It is the responsibility of the ASD Installer Maintenance personnel to setup the Emergency Off braking system of the ASD The function of the Emergency Off braking function is to remove output power from the drive in the event of an emergency A supplemental braking system may also be engaged in the event of an emergency For further information on braking systems see parameters F250 and F304 Note A supplemental emergency stopping system should be used with the ASD Emergency stopping should not be a task of the ASD alone e Follow all warnings and precautions and do not exceed equipment ratings G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual System Integration Precautions The following precautions are provided as general guidelines for the setup of the ASD within the system The Toshiba ASD is a general purpose product It is a system component only and
327. on pg 239 Note The Expansion IO Card Option 1 option board P N ETB003Z is required to use this terminal See the Expansion IO Card Option 1 Instruction Manual P N 58685 for more information on the function of this terminal G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F134 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Always OFF Changeable During Run No 93 F135 F137 Output Terminal 6 R1 Function Program gt Terminal gt Output Terminals This parameter is used to set the functionality of the R1 discrete output terminal In addition this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This setting assigns the function of the programmable R1 terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 8 on pg 239 Note The Expansion IO Card Option 1 option board P N ETB003Z is required to use this terminal See the Expansion IO Card Option 1 Instruction Manual P N 58685 for more information on the function of this terminal Direct Access Number F135 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Always OFF Changeable During Run No Output Terminal 7 OUT5 Function Program gt Terminal gt Output Terminals This parameter is used to set the functionality of the OUTS discrete output terminal In addition this output terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This setting assigns
328. on this parameter UP DOWN Frequency down Frequency Step No Path Direct Access Only This parameter sets the frequency decrease amount for each activation of the UP DOWN Frequency down terminal activation The rate of the frequency decrease is set at Deceleration Time 1 F010 See F264 for more information on this parameter F266 Parameter Type Numerical Direct Access Number Factory Default 0 1 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 10 0 Units Seconds F267 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 10 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz Initial UP DOWN Frequency No Path Direct Access Only At power up or after a reset this parameter setting is used to provide a starting frequency for the UP DOWN Frequency function See F269 for more information on this parameter setting F268 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum Lower Limit F013 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz Initial UP DOWN Frequency Rewriting No Path Direct Access Only At power down and when enabled this parameter writes the running frequency into the F268 location and upon a system restart uses this setting as the startup frequency Disable this parameter and set parameter F268 to the desired s
329. operating in the Speed Control mode or the Torque Control mode This parameter sets the RX2 AI1 input level that is associated with RX2 AI1 Input Point 2 Frequency when operating in the Speed control mode or is associated with the RX2 AI1 Input Point 2 Rate when operating in the Torque Control mode This value is entered as 100 to 100 of the RX2 AI1 input signal range See RX2 AI1 Input Point 1 Setting F222 for more information on this setting when used for Speed control See RX2 AI1 Input Point 1 Rate F226 for more information on this setting when used for Torque Control Direct Access Number F224 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 100 Maximum 100 Units RX2 Al1 Input Point 2 Frequency Program gt Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX2 AI1 input terminal when the RX2 AI1 terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode This parameter sets RX2 AI1 Input Point 2 Frequency and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of RX2 AI1 Input Point 2 Setting when operating in the Speed Control mode See RX2 AIl Input Point 1 Setting F226 for more information on this setting G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F225 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 60 00 Direct Access Number Changeable D
330. option for further information on each item 270 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Index Numerics 0 Hz Command Output 125 0 Hz Dead Band Signal 124 16 Bit Binary BCD Input 87 A Abnormal Speed Detection Time 187 Abnormal Speed Settings 52 Acc Dec 1 4 Settings 56 Acc Dec Pattern 1 165 Acc Dec Pattern 1 4 167 Acc Dec Pattern 2 166 Acc Dec Special 56 Accel Decel 1 Settings 46 Accel Decel Operation After Torque Limit 159 Accel Decel Suspend 144 Accel Decel Switching Frequency 1 167 Acceleration 80 Acceleration Suspend Frequency 145 Acceleration Suspend Time 145 Acceleration Time 1 80 Acceleration Time 2 164 Acceleration Time 3 168 Acceleration Time 4 169 Acceleration Deceleration Pattern 3 169 Acceleration Deceleration Pattern 4 170 Acceleration Deceleration Switching Frequency 2 169 Acceleration Deceleration Switching Frequency 3 170 Adding Input Selection 191 Add On Option 1 Error 248 AI2 88 AI2 Option V I Input Bias 163 AI2 Option V I Input Gain 163 Alarm Prohibition 50 Alarms 244 246 Always ON 1 Terminal 1 88 AM 21 23 AM Bias Adjustment 195 AM Output 43 AM Output Gradient Characteristic 195 AM Output Terminal Adjustment 192 AM Output Terminal Function 192 AM FM Output 25 Analog Filter 54 Analog Function Assigned Object 11 226 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Analog Function Assigned Object 21 227 Analo
331. or Jump Frequency 2 F272 F273 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 30 0 Units Hz Jump Frequency 3 Program gt Special Jump Frequencies Same as Jump Frequency 1 F270 and is used when multiple frequencies are to be jumped see the plus or minus value setting at F275 When multiple jump frequencies overlap the system will recognize the lowest and the highest frequencies as one jump range F274 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz Jump Frequency 3 Bandwidth Program gt Special Jump Frequencies This parameter establishes a plus or minus value for Jump Frequency 3 F274 F275 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 30 0 Units Hz Preset Speed 8 Program gt Frequency Preset Speeds This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 1000 and is identified as Preset Speed 8 The binary number is applied to S1 S4 of the Terminal Board to output the Preset Speed see F018 for more information on this parameter G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F287 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Direct
332. orque level that is used to determine if the Light Load High Speed F328 operation may engage or remain engaged if active If the Light Load High Speed operation is terminated normal operation resumes Note Power running may be during forward reverse acceleration or deceleration but not during regeneration F335 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 50 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run No Minimum 250 00 Maximum 250 00 Units Heavy Load Torque During Power Running Program gt Special gt Crane Hoist Settings During power running this parameter establishes the threshold torque level that is used to determine if the Light Load High Speed F328 operation may engage or remain engaged if active If the Light Load High Speed operation is terminated normal operation resumes F336 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 250 00 Maximum 250 00 Units Direct Access Number Heavy Load Torque During Constant Power Running Program gt Special Crane Hoist Settings During constant power running this parameter establishes the threshold torque level that is used to determine if the Light Load High Speed F328 operation may engage or remain engaged if active If the Light Load High Speed operation is terminated normal operation resumes F337 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default
333. osed 230 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F977 F977 My Function Selection Program gt My Function This parameter Enables Disables the configured My Function feature of the G9 ASD Settings 0 None Disabled 1 My Function with Terminal Board Signal discrete terminal activation 2 My Function Always On My Function The My Function feature is configured using the settings of F900 to F977 and is used to enhance the programmability of the G9 ASD by performing two programmable functions 1 the Combined Terminal Function and 2 Logic Operations Combined Terminal Function Assigning more than one function to a discrete input terminal provides two advantages it effectively expands the number of input terminals and reduces the number of cables required to support the input output functions e g assigning ST and F to one terminal Using Virtual Terminals 1 4 F973 F976 are required to use this function In the example below the ST terminal assignment and the F terminal assignment will be combined as one terminal to illustrate this feature However any two of the discrete input terminal assignments listed in Table 5 on pg 234 may be combined in this manner Setup example 1 Disable the My Function parameter at F977 to prevent the system from starting upon completion of the setup 2 Assign the ST function to the S1 terminal F115 Assign the F function to Virtual Input Terminal 1
334. osed This setting assigns the function of the programmable LI5 terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 5 on pg 234 Note The Expansion IO Card Option 2 option board P N ETB004Z is required to use this terminal See the Expansion IO Card Option 2 Instruction Manual P N 58686 for more information on the function of this terminal F123 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default Unassigned Changeable During Run No Input Terminal 14 LI6 Function Program gt Terminal gt Input Terminals This parameter is used to set the functionality of the LI6 discrete input terminal In addition this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This setting assigns the function of the programmable LI6 terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 5 on pg 234 Note The Expansion IO Card Option 2 option board P N ETB004Z is required to use this terminal See the Expansion IO Card Option 2 Instruction Manual P N 58686 for more information on the function of this terminal G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F124 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Unassigned Changeable During Run No 91 F125 F131 Input Terminal 15 LI7 Function Program gt Terminal gt Input Terminals This parameter is used to set the functionality of the L
335. oted with the carrier prior to accepting the shipment if possible File a claim with the carrier if necessary and immediately notify your Toshiba Sales Representative DO NOT install or energize equipment that has been damaged Damaged equipment may fail during operation resulting in equipment damage or injury to personnel Ensure that the rated capacity and the model number specified on the nameplate conform to the order specifications Modification of this equipment is dangerous and is to be performed by factory trained representatives When modifications are required contact your Toshiba Sales Representative Inspections may be required before and after moving installed equipment Contact your Toshiba Sales Representative to report discrepancies or for assistance if required Handling and Storage Use proper lifting techniques when moving the ASD including properly sizing up the load getting assistance and using a forklift if required Store in a well ventilated covered location and preferably in the original carton if the equipment will not be used upon receipt Store in a cool clean and dry location Avoid storage locations with extreme temperatures rapid temperature changes high humidity moisture dust corrosive gases or metal particles The storage temperature range of the G9 ASD is 13 to 149 F 25 to 65 C DO NOT store the unit in places that are exposed to outside weather conditions i e wind rain sno
336. ow will not initiate the automatic Retry Restart function Input Phase Loss Input Phase Failure e Output Phase Loss Output Phase Failure Output Current Protection Fault Output Current Detector error e Load Side Over Current at Start Earth Fault Ground Fault e Over Current During Acceleration e Arm Over Current at start up DBR Resistor Over Current e Low Current e Voltage Drop In Main Circuit e EEPROM Data Fault EEPROM Fault e Flash Memory Gate Array RAM ROM Fault e CPU Fault e Emergency Off EMG e Communication Error Option Fault e Sink Source Setting Error e Over Speed Error e Over Torque Key Error e External Thermal Error e Externally Controlled Interrupt See the section titled System Setup Requirements on pg 8 for more information on this setting G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F303 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 00 Maximum 10 135 F304 F305 Dynamic Braking Direct Access Number F304 Program Protection Dynamic Braking Parameter Type Selection List This parameter Enables Disables the Dynamic Braking system Factory Default Off Settings Changeable During Run No 0 Off 1 On with Overload Detection 2 On without Overload Detection Dynamic Braking uses the transistor IGBT7 to dissipate the bus voltage whe
337. pe Selection List Factory Default Pulse Train Output Changeable During Run No AM Output Terminal Function Program gt Terminal gt Analog Output Terminals This parameter is used to set the output function of the AM analog output terminal The AM analog output terminal produces an output current that is proportional to the magnitude of the function assigned to this terminal The available assignments for this output terminal are listed in Table 6 on pg 237 To read current at this terminal connect a 100 500Q resistor from the AM terminal through the series Ammeter to the CC terminal Note AM Terminal Setup Parameters F670 Set AM Function F671 Calibrate AM Terminal F685 Output Response Polarity Selection F686 Set Zero Level Direct Access Number F670 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Output Current Changeable During Run Yes AM Output Terminal Adjustment Program gt Terminal gt Analog Output Terminals This parameter is used to calibrate the AM analog output To calibrate the AM analog output connect an ammeter as described at parameter F670 With the drive is running at a known value e g output frequency adjust this parameter until the associated function of parameter F670 produces the desired DC level output at the AM output terminal See F670 for more information on this setting 192 Direct Access Number F671 Parameter Type
338. peed see F018 for more information on this parameter 132 F293 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum Lower Limit F013 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F294 F301 Preset Speed 15 Program gt Frequency Preset Speeds This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 1111 and is identified as Preset Speed 15 The binary number is applied to S1 S4 of the Terminal Board to output the Preset Speed see F018 for more information on this parameter Direct Access Number F294 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum Lower Limit F013 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz PWM Carrier Frequency Program gt Special gt Carrier Frequency This parameter sets the frequency of the pulse width modulation signal applied to the motor Note When operating in the Vector Control mode the carrier frequency should be set to 2 2 kHz or above Note Ifthe PWM carrier frequency is set at 2 0 kHz or above it cannot be decreased below 2 0 kHz while running If the PWM carrier frequency is set at 1 9 kHz or below it cannot be increased above 2 0 kHz while running Either change requires that the ASD be stopped and restarted for the changes to take effect F300 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Defa
339. perty damage CAUTION G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Special Symbols To identify special hazards other symbols may appear in conjunction with the DANGER WARNING and CAUTION signal words These symbols indicate areas that require special and or strict adherence to the procedures to prevent serious injury to personnel or loss of life Electrical Hazard Symbol A symbol that is comprised of an equilateral triangle enclosing AN a lightning bolt indicates a hazard of injury from electrical shock or burn Explosion Hazard Symbol A symbol that is comprised of an equilateral triangle enclosing LA an explosion indicates a hazard of injury from exploding parts Equipment Warning Labels DO NOT attempt to install operate perform maintenance or dispose of this equipment until you have read and understood all of the user directions contained in this manual Warning labels that are attached to the equipment will include the exclamation mark within a triangle DO NOT remove or cover any of these labels If the labels are damaged or if additional labels are required contact your Toshiba Sales Representative Labels attached to the equipment are there to provide useful information or to indicate an imminently hazardous situation that may result in serious injury severe property and equipment damage or loss of life if safe procedures or methods are not followed as outlined in this manual Qualified Personnel Installation ope
340. provement correction capacitors or surge absorbers MUST NOT be installed on the output of the ASD e Use of the built in system protective features is highly recommended i e E Off Overload Protection etc e The operating controls and system status indicators should be clearly readable and positioned where the operator can see them without obstruction e Additional warnings and notifications shall be posted at the equipment installation location as deemed required by Qualified Personnel CAUTION e There may be thermal or physical properties or ancillary devices integrated into the overall system that may allow for the ASD to start the motor without warning Signs to this effect must be posted at the equipment installation location e Ifa secondary magnetic contactor MC or an ASD output disconnect is used between the ASD and the load it should be interlocked to halt the ASD before the secondary contact opens If the output contactor is used for bypass operation it must be interlocked such that commercial power is never applied to the ASD output terminals U V or W e When using an ASD output disconnect the ASD and the motor must be stopped before the disconnect is either opened or closed Closing the output disconnect while the 3 phase output of the ASD is active may result in equipment damage or injury to personnel G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Operational and Maintenance Precautions A WARNING A e Turn
341. put V I signal loss a Terminal Board failure P24 over current condition e F633 setting is too high E 19 CPU Communication CPU data Transmit Receive error Error E 20 V f Control Error Torque processing error e Make service call E 21 CPU Processing Error Software processed incorrectly e Make service call E 22 Logic Input Voltage Error Incorrect voltage applied to the discrete input terminals E 23 Optional Expansion Input Optional Expansion Input Terminal Board 1 is defective Terminal Board 1 Error E 24 Optional Expansion Input Optional Expansion Input Terminal Board 2 is defective Terminal Board 2 Error 248 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual LED Screen LCD Screen Possible Causes E 25 Stop Position Retaining Load movement while stopped Bor F381 setting is too low Encoder malfunction Creep speed is too high E 26 CPU2 Fault CPU malfunction Control board malfunction E 50 E 51 Sink Source Setting Error Improperly positioned Sink Source jumper on the Terminal board or on an option device see J100 at the Terminal PCB of the ASD Sink Source configuration is incorrect EEP1 EEPROM Fault EEPROM write malfunction Make a service call EEP2 EEP3 EEPROM Read Error EEPROM read malfunction Make a service call EF1 EF2 Earth Ground Fault Ground fault at the motor Ground fault at the output of the ASD Current leakage to Earth Ground
342. put Function Command 1 Program My Function gt My Function Unit 1 This parameter is used to assign a user selected logical operator to two user selected Input Function Target variables enable a counter timer function or perform a hold reset function Table 11 on pg 243 lists the available selections Their use and selection requirements are described in an example at F977 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F901 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 NOP 213 F902 F905 Input Function Target 2 Program My Function My Function Unit 1 This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 2 terminal This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target 2 terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 7 on pg 238 Table 8 on pg 239 or Table 10 on pg 241 See F977 for more information on this parameter Direct Access Number F902 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 Disabled Changeable During Run Yes Input Function Command 2 Program gt My Function gt My Function Unit 1 This parameter is used to assign a user selected logical operator to two user selected Input Function Target variables enable a counter timer function or perform a hold reset function Table 11 on pg 243 lists
343. put Gain 162 RX Input Point 1 Frequency 113 RX Input Point 1 Rate 115 RX Input Point 1 Setting 113 RX Input Point 2 Frequency 114 RX Input Point 2 Rate 115 RX Input Point 2 Setting 114 RX2 44 RX2 AI1 Input Bias 163 RX2 AI1 Input Gain 163 RX2 AI1 Input Point 1 Frequency 117 RX2 AI1 Input Point 1 Rate 118 RX2 AI1 Input Point 1 Setting 116 RX2 AI1 Input Point 2 Frequency 117 RX2 AI1 Input Point 2 Rate 119 RX2 AIl Input Point 2 Setting 117 S S L2 16 17 S1 21 22 S2 21 22 S3 21 22 S4 21 22 Save User Settings 75 Second Speed Loop Proportional Gain 160 Second Speed Loop Stabilization Coefficient 161 Setpoints 59 Short Circuit Detection At Start 185 Short Circuit Protection 269 Simple Positioning Completion Range 151 Sink 24 Sink Source Setting Error 248 249 Slip Frequency Gain 151 Source 24 SOUT 252 S Pattern 1 165 S Pattern 2 165 S Pattern Acceleration Lower Limit Adjustment 168 S Pattern Acceleration Upper Limit Adjustment 168 S Pattern Deceleration Lower Limit Adjustment 168 S Pattern Deceleration Upper Limit Adjustment 168 Special 56 Special Parameters 57 Special Protection Parameters 53 Speed 1 Operation Time 177 Speed 10 Operation Time 178 Speed 11 Operation Time 178 Speed 12 Operation Time 178 Speed 13 Operation Time 179 Speed 14 Operation Time 179 Speed 15 Operation Time 179 Speed 2 Operation Time 177 G9 ASD In
344. r Current Alarm Over Torque Alarm Braking Resistor Overload Alarm Cumulative Run Timer Alarm N A DeviceNet Profibus CC Link Alarm RS485 Communication Main Power Under Voltage Alarm Stop After Instantaneous Power off Alarm Stop After Lower Limit Continuous Time Light Load Alarm Heavy Load Alarm Maintenance Timer Alarm Over Torque Alarm Soft Stall Alarm Type Reset Reset F007 Real time Clock Setup Set Real time Clock N A Trip History read only Trip Number Trip Type N A 50 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Program Mode Menu Navigation Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name Parameter Number UTILITIES Trip History read only Frequency at Trip Output Current Output Voltage Direction Frequency Reference DC Voltage Discrete Input Terminals Discrete Output Terminals Run Timer Post Compensation Frequency Speed Feedback Real Time Speed Feedback 1 Second Torque Feedback Torque Reference Torque Current Excitation Current PID Feedback Motor Overload Ratio ASD Overload Ratio DBR Overload Ratio Motor Load ASD Load DBR Load Input Power Output Power N A Changed From Default Changed Parameters N A Contrast Contrast Adjustment N A
345. r F302 this parameter sets the source of the input signal that will set the torque level used to provide the Braking Mode Selection function of parameter F302 Settings 0 Disabled 1 VII V D 2 RR 3 RX 4 Panel Keypad 5 RS485 2 Wire 6 RS485 4 Wire 7 Communication Option Board 8 RX2 AIl Panel Torque Bias Program gt Torque gt Torque Control Once enabled at parameter F302 this parameter establishes the torque bias setting to which the setting of F302 will either add to or subtract from to produce the final torque value used to carry out the Braking Mode Selection function of parameter F302 F342 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes F343 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 250 00 Maximum 250 00 Units Panel Torque Gain Program gt Torque gt Torque Control Once enabled at parameter F302 this parameter sets the sensitivity of the torque control source selected at F302 for the Braking Mode Selection function of parameter F302 Release Time Program gt Torque gt Torque Control Once enabled at parameter F302 this parameter sets the time that the brake will hold after the requirements of the Braking Mode Selection function of parameter F302 have been met F344 Parameter Type
346. r to quickly brake the motor Accel Decel Switching 1 Accel Decel Switching 2 Activating combinations of discrete input terminals Accel Decel Switching 1 and 2 allow for the selection of Accel Decel profiles 1 4 as shown below 24 25 See F504 for more information on this terminal setting A D SW Terminal A D Profile Selection The settings of the A D selections 1 4 are 1 2 performed at F009 F010 F500 F501 F510 0 0 1 F511 and F514 F515 respectively 0 i 7 Accel Decel profiles are comprised of the Accel Decel settings Pattern and Switching 1 0 3 Frequency 26 27 1 1 4 1 Terminal Activated Vif Switching 1 V f Switching 2 Activating combinations of discrete input terminals V f Switching 1 and 2 allow for the selection of a V f switching profile as listed below V f Switching Terminal V f Selection 28 29 1 2 0 0 I The 1 4 settings of the V f Switching selections are performed at parameters F170 F181 0 1 2 1 0 3 30 31 1 1 4 1 Terminal Activated Note NO NC Normally Open Normally Closed 234 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Table 5 Continued Discrete Input Terminal Assignment Selections And Descriptions Sel No NO ING Terminal Selection Descriptions Torque Limit Switching 1 Torque Limit Switching 2 Activating combinations of discrete input terminals Torque Limit Switching 1 and 2 allow for the selection of a torque limit switching profile as listed below
347. r to select the item from the Primary Menu repeat the press to select function for submenu items See the section titled Default Setting Changes on pg 74 for more information on changing parameter settings Upon reaching the desired parameter selection the current setting may be viewed or selected and changed by pressing the Rotary Encoder the setting will take on the reverse video format dark background light text Turn the Rotary Encoder to change the parameter setting Press the ESC key while the new parameter setting is in the reverse video mode to exit the selection without saving the change or press the Rotary Encoder while the parameter setting is in the reverse video mode to accept the new change Repeated ESC key entries at any time takes the menu back one level each time the ESC key is pressed until the Frequency Command screen is reached Further ESC entries will toggle the system to and from the Frequency Command screen and the EOI Command menu Note Changes carried out from the EOI Command screen will be effective for EOI controlled ASD operation only See the section titled EOI Command Mode on pg 42 for further information on EOI Command Mode operations Primary Menus of the LCD Screen The three primary screens of the LCD Screen are displayed while accessing the associated operating mode the Frequency Command Monitor and Program Menu screens Figure 22 Frequency Command Screen Not Ready to Run Indicator
348. radually adjust them from there one at a time until the desired results are produced Adjustments to this parameter may increase the load current of the motor and subsequently warrant an adjustment at the Motor Overload Protection Level setting Direct Access Number F416 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 Changeable During Run No Minimum 10 Maximum 250 Torque Command Selection Program gt Torque gt Torque Control When operating in the Torque Control mode this parameter allows the user to select the source of the torque command signal Settings 1 VII V D 2 RR 3 RX 4 Panel Keypad F725 Setting 5 RS485 2 Wire 6 RS485 4 Wire 7 Communication Option Board 8 RX2 Option AI1 Direct Access Number F420 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default RX Changeable During Run Yes Tension Torque Bias Input Program gt Torque gt Torque Control This parameter Enables Disables the Tension Torque Bias input function This feature is enabled by selecting a Tension Torque Bias input signal source Settings 0 Disabled 1 VII V D 2 RR 3 RX 4 Panel Keypad Not Used 5 RS485 2 Wire 6 RS485 4 Wire 7 Communication Option Board 8 RX2 Option AIl 154 F423 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes G9 ASD Inst
349. rating of the ASD or as the FLA of the motor The unit of measurement for this parameter may be set to Amps A V or it may be set as a percentage of the ASD rating The nameplated FLA of the motor may be entered directly when Amps is selected as the unit of measurement see F701 to change the display unit The Motor 4 Overload Protection Level setting will be displayed in Amps if the EOI display units are set to A V rather than 100 F180 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD Dependent Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 30 0 Units F181 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 0 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 10 Maximum 100 Units G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F190 F190 Vif 5 Point Setting Frequency 1 Direct Access Number F190 Program Special gt V f 5 Point Setting Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 The V f 5 Point Setting Frequency 1 setting establishes the frequency that is to be associated with the voltage setting of F191 V f 5 Point Setting Voltage Changeable During Run No 1 Minimum 0 00 The V f 5 Point settings define a volts per hertz relationship for the startup Maximum Max Freq F011 output of the ASD Units Hz To enable this function set the V f Pattern F015 selection to the V f 5 Point Curve setting
350. ration and maintenance shall be performed by Qualified Personnel Only A Qualified Person is one that has the skills and knowledge relating to the construction installation operation and maintenance of the electrical equipment and has received safety training on the hazards involved Refer to the latest edition of NFPA 70E for additional safety requirements Qualified Personnel shall e Have carefully read the entire operation manual e Be familiar with the construction and function of the G9 ASD the equipment being driven and the hazards involved e Be able to recognize and properly address hazards associated with the application of motor driven equipment e Be trained and authorized to safely energize de energize ground lockout tagout circuits and equipment and clear faults in accordance with established safety practices Be trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment such as safety shoes rubber gloves hard hats safety glasses face shields flash clothing etc in accordance with established safety practices For further information on workplace safety visit www osha gov G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Equipment Inspection Upon receipt of the equipment inspect the packaging and equipment for shipping damage Carefully unpack the equipment and check for damaged parts missing parts or concealed damage that may have occurred during shipping If any discrepancies are discovered it should be n
351. re are no shorts and all grounds are secured All personnel are at a safe distance from the motor and the motor driven equipment G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 27 Electronic Operator Interface The G9 ASD Electronic Operator Interface EOI is comprised of an LED Screen an LCD Screen two LEDs a rotary encoder and five keys These items are shown and described on pg 29 EOI Operation The EOI is the primary input output device for the user The EOI may be used to monitor system functions input data into the system perform diagnostics and view performance data e g motor frequency bus voltage torque etc The software used with the ASD is menu driven thus making it a select and click environment The operating parameters of a motor may be selected and viewed or changed using the EOI or via communications EOI Remote Mounting The EOI may be mounted remotely using the optional ASD MTG KIT9 The kit contains all of the hardware required to mount the EOI of the 9 Series ASD remotely System operation and EOI operation while using the remotely mounted EOI are the same as with the ASD mounted configuration 28 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Figure 21 The G9 ASD Electronic Operator Interface Features LED Screen Rotary Encoder LCD Screen Local Remote Key LED Escape Key Run Key a Selected Tocat ee AED item 01 ie Key Number of items 14 Mode Stop Reset Key TOSHIB
352. requency Hysteresis Program gt Special Frequency Control This parameter provides a plus or minus value for the Run Frequency F241 setting Direct Access Number F242 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 30 0 Units Hz End Frequency Program gt Special Frequency Control This parameter sets the lowest frequency that the drive will recognize during deceleration before the drive goes to 0 00 Hz F243 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 30 0 Units Hz 0 Hz Dead Band Signal Program gt Special gt Special Parameters This parameter sets an output frequency threshold that until the commanded frequency surpasses this setting the ASD will output 0 00 Hz to the motor This setting will override the Start Frequency F240 setting if this setting has a higher value Direct Access Number F244 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 5 00 Units Hz DC Injection Braking Start Frequency Program gt Protection DC Braking During deceleration this is the frequency at which DC Injection Braking will start DC Injection Braking DC Injection Braking is a braking system used with 3 phase motors Unlike conventional brakes t
353. reshold speed setting that is used to determine if PID control may engage or remain engaged if active F466 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz VI II V I Input Bias Program gt Frequency gt Speed Reference Setpoints This parameter is used to fine tune the bias of the V I input terminals Note See note on pg 44 for more information on the V I terminal This setting may be used to ensure that the zero level of the input source pot pressure transducer flow meter etc is also the zero level setting of the ASD system This is accomplished by setting the input source to zero and adjusting this setting to provide an output of zero from the ASD F470 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 127 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 255 VIII V I Input Gain Program gt Frequency gt Speed Reference Setpoints This parameter is used to fine tune the gain of the V I input terminals Note See note on pg 44 for more information on the V I terminal This setting may be used to ensure that the 100 level of the input source pot pressure transducer flow meter etc is also the 100 level setting of the ASD system This is accomplished by setting the input source to 100 and adjusting this setting to provide an
354. rform Torque Control from the V I input terminal Set V I Input Point 1 Rate F205 Set V I Input Point 1 Setting F201 the input analog signal level that corresponds to the torque setting at V I Input Point 1 Rate Set V I Input Point 2 Rate F206 Set V I Input Point 2 Setting F203 the input analog signal level that corresponds to the torque setting at V I Input Point 2 Rate e Provide a Run command F and or R Torque Control is accomplished by establishing an associated V f output pattern for a given V I input level Once set as the V I input voltage changes or the V I current changes the output torque of the ASD will vary in accordance with the above settings This parameter sets V I Input Point 1 Rate and is the output torque value that is associated with the setting of V I Input Point 1 Setting when operating in the Torque Control mode This value is entered as 0 to 250 of the rated torque Note When using the isolated V I input terminal the TICC terminal must be used as the return negative connection G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 107 F206 F208 VI II V I Input Point 2 Rate Program gt Torque gt Setpoints This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the V I input terminal when the V I terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Torque Control mode Torque Control is accomplished by establishing an associated V f output pattern for a
355. ring Run Yes G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F701 F705 Display Units for Voltage and Current Program gt Utilities gt Display Parameters This parameter sets the unit of measurement for current and voltage values displayed on the EOI Settings 0 1 A V F701 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default Changeable During Run Yes Display Unit Multiplication Factor Program gt Utilities gt Display Parameters This parameter provides a multiplier for the displayed speed value shown on the front panel display of the ASD This parameter may be used to display the rate that a commodity is being processed by the driven load in process units 1 e units time Example An output frequency of 100 Hz would be displayed as 50 Hz if using a multiplier of 0 5 for this parameter Note PID frequency limiting parameters are not affected by this setting i e F364 F365 F367 and F368 F702 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 OFF Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 200 00 Direct Access Number Display Unit Selection Program gt Utilities gt Display Parameters This parameter is used in conjunction with F702 to set the method in which the frequency is displayed on the front panel The multiplier setting of F702 will be applied to the display of all frequencies if All Frequencies are s
356. rip will be incurred This parameter is enabled at F305 Note This parameter setting may increase deceleration times Direct Access Number F626 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD Dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 100 Maximum 150 Units Under Voltage Trip Program gt Protection Under Voltage Ridethrough This parameter Enables Disables the Under Voltage Trip function With this parameter Enabled the ASD will trip if the under voltage condition persists for a time greater than the F628 setting A user selected contact may be actuated if so configured If Disabled the ASD will stop and not trip the FL contact is not activated Settings 0 Disabled 1 Enabled G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F627 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run No 187 F628 F631 Under Voltage Trip Detection Time Program gt Protection Under Voltage Ridethrough This parameter sets the time that the under voltage condition must exist to cause an Under Voltage Trip This parameter is enabled at F627 F628 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 03 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 01 Maximum 10 00 Units Seconds Regenerative Power Ridethrough Control Level Program gt Protection Under Voltage Ridethrough Thi
357. rminals to one of the functions listed in Table 8 on pg 239 In addition the output terminals must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed Fit EEAS Not Faulted Direct Access Number F132 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Fault All Changeable During Run No Output Terminal 4 OUT3 Function Program gt Terminal gt Output Terminals This parameter is used to set the functionality of the OUT3 discrete output terminal In addition this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This setting assigns the function of the programmable OUT3 terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 8 on pg 239 Note The Expansion IO Card Option 1 option board P N ETB003Z is required to use this terminal See the Expansion IO Card Option 1 Instruction Manual P N 58685 for more information on the function of this terminal Direct Access Number F133 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Always OFF Changeable During Run No Output Terminal 5 OUT4 Function Program gt Terminal gt Output Terminals This parameter is used to set the functionality of the OUT4 discrete output terminal In addition this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This setting assigns the function of the programmable OUT4 terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 8
358. rogram gt Communications Communication Settings Same as F831 See F831 for information on this parameter Direct Access Number F833 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0000h Changeable During Run Yes Communications Option DeviceNet Profibus Setting 5 Program Communications Communication Settings Same as F831 See F831 for information on this parameter Direct Access Number F834 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0000h Changeable During Run Yes Communications Option DeviceNet Profibus Setting 6 Program Communications Communication Settings Same as F831 See F831 for information on this parameter Direct Access Number F835 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0000h Changeable During Run Yes Communications Option DeviceNet Profibus Setting 7 Program gt Communications Communication Settings Same as F831 See F831 for information on this parameter 208 Direct Access Number F836 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0000h Changeable During Run Yes G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F841 F844 Communications Option DeviceNet Profibus Setting 8 Program gt Communications Communication Settings While using the DeviceNet Profibus communications protocol parameters F841 F846 allow the user to select the ASD memory location that holds the Command Frequency Moni
359. rque 0 Center Value Reference F430 Torque Speed Speed Limit Torque 0 Center Value F431 Limiting Speed Limit Torque 0 Band F432 Allow Specified Direction ONLY F435 FEEDBACK Drooping Gain F320 Speed at 0 Drooping Gain F321 Drooping Control Speed at F320 Drooping Gain F322 Drooping Insensitive Torque H323 Drooping Output Filter F324 PID Control Switching E359 PID Feedback Signal F360 Feedback Settings PID Feedback Delay Filter F361 PID Feedback Proportional Gain F362 PID Feedback Integral Gain F363 60 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Program Mode Menu Navigation Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name ee FEEDBACK PID Deviation Upper Limit F364 PID Deviation Lower Limit F365 PID Feedback Differential Gain F366 Process Upper Limit F367 Process Lower Limit F368 Feedback Settings PID Control Wait Time F369 PID Output Upper Limit F370 PID Output Lower Limit FEST Process Increasing Rate F372 Process Decreasing Rate F375 Speed PI Switching Frequency F466 Adding Input Selection F660 Override Control Multiplying Input Selection F661 Number of PG Input Pulses F375 Number of PG Input Phases F376 PG Disconnection Detection E377 Simple Positioning Completion Range F381 Current Control Proportional Gain F458 PG Settings Speed Loop Proportional Gain F460 Speed Loop Stabilization Coefficient F461 Load Moment of Inertia 1
360. ry Default 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 100 Maximum 100 Units Frequency Settings RX2 Point 2 r Setting 100 F224 RX2 Input Signal l l I I l i l L L o l l l l RX2 Point 1 x Setting Sees A Se 4 coed Max Freq e Jutput Mox Freq Frequency RX2 Point 2 Frequency F225 int 1 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F223 F225 RX2 Al1 Input Point 1 Frequency Program gt Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX2 AI1 input terminal when the RX2 AI1 terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode This parameter sets RX2 AI1 Input Point 1 Frequency and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of RX2 AI1 Input Point 1 Setting when operating in the Speed Control mode See RX2 AI1 Input Point 1 Setting F222 for more information on this setting F223 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz RX2 Al1 Input Point 2 Setting Program gt Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX2 AI1 input terminal when the RX2 AI1 terminal is used as the control input while
361. s MON 1 Output Gradient Characteristic Program gt Terminal gt Analog Output Terminals This parameter sets the output response polarity of the MON1 output terminal The MONI output terminal response may be set to respond inversely or directly to the input signal See parameter F672 for more information on this setting Settings 0 Minus Negative Gradient 1 Plus Positive Gradient G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F689 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default Plus Changeable During Run Yes 195 F690 F700 MON 1 Bias Adjustment Program gt Terminal gt Analog Output Terminals This parameter setting is used to ensure that a zero level input signal produces a zero level output at the MON terminal Set the assigned function of parameter F672 to zero and then set this parameter to a zero output See parameter F672 for more information on this setting Direct Access Number F690 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 10 0 Maximum 100 0 Units MON 2 Voltage Current Output Switching Program gt Terminal gt Analog Output Terminals This parameter is used to set the output signal type of the MON2 output terminal See parameter F674 for more information on this setting Settings 0 10 V 10 V 1 0 10V 2 0 20mA Direct Access Number F691
362. s This parameter sets the Communications Reference input value that represents Communications Reference Speed Setpoint 1 frequency This value is entered as 0 to 100 of the Communications Reference input value range Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled off then on for the changes to take effect F811 Parameter Type Numerical Direct Access Number Factory Default 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Units Point 1 Frequency Program gt Communications Communication Reference Adjust This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the Communications Reference speed control input See F811 for more information on this setting This parameter sets Communications Reference Speed Setpoint 1 Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled off then on for the changes to take effect G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F812 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz 205 F813 F825 Point 2 Setting Program Communications Communication Reference Adjust This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the Communications Reference speed control input See F811 for more information on this setting This parameter sets the Communications Reference input val
363. s Automatic Accel Decel Stall and Ridethrough settings may lengthen the acceleration times Note G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F514 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD Dependent Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum 6000 Units Seconds 169 F515 F521 Deceleration Time 4 Program gt Special Accel Decel 1 4 Settings This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the output of the ASD to go from the Maximum Frequency to 0 0 Hz for the 4 Deceleration profile The Accel Decel pattern may be set using F502 The minimum Accel Decel time may be set using F508 Note A deceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads Automatic Accel Decel Stall and Ridethrough settings may lengthen the deceleration times F515 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD Dependent Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum 6000 Units Seconds Acceleration Deceleration Pattern 4 Program gt Special gt Accel Decel 1 4 Settings This parameter enables a user selected preprogrammed output profile that controls the acceleration and deceleration pattern for the 4 Accel Decel parameter Settings 0 Linear 1 S Pattern 1 2 S Pattern 2 F516 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number
364. s a Brake Fault E 11 is incurred Otherwise the brake releases and normal motor operations resume F630 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Disabled Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Disabled Maximum 10 0 Units Seconds ASD Overload Program gt Protection gt Overload This parameter is used to protect the ASD from an over current condition The standard overload rating of the G9 ASD is 150 operation for 60 seconds This setting allows for the overload protection to be switched from the standard overload detection means Thermal Detection and Overload to thermal detection only Settings 0 Thermal Detection Overload 1 Thermal Detection Only The Thermal Detection Only selection is used when multiple devices are installed horizontally as described on pg 15 188 F631 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default Thermal Detection Overload Changeable During Run No G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F633 F637 VI II V I Analog Input Broken Wire Detection Level Program gt Terminal gt Input Special Functions This parameter is enabled by providing a non zero value here This function monitors the V I input signal and if the V I input signal falls below the level specified here and remains there for a period of 0 3 seconds or more a trip will be incurred E 18
365. s leakage current relays ground relays fire alarms and other sensors and it may cause superimposed noise on CRT screens The Grounding Capacitor Switch allows the user to quickly change the value of the leakage reduction capacitance of the 3 phase input circuit See figures 4 5 6 and 7 on pg 19 for an electrical depiction of the leakage reduction functionality and the methods used to change the capacitance value The method used is typeform specific If using a 460 volt 5 HP ASD or a 460 volt ASD that is in the range of 7 5 HP to 25 HP and the U T1 V T2 and W T3 connections to the motor are 100 meters or more in length the ASD Carrier Frequency must be set to 4 kHz or less when activating or deactivating the Grounding Capacitor Switch ASD overheating may occur if the Carrier Frequency is set above 4 kHz when activating or deactivating the Grounding Capacitor Switch See pg 5 for more information on the Grounding Capacitor Switch and pg 16 for the location of the switch G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Figure 4 The Grounding Capacitor Switch is used on typeforms 230 volt 0 5 HP to 10 HP and the 25 and 30 HP 460 volt 1 0 HP to250 HP The value may be set to Maximum default setting or to Zero by pushing or pulling the switch actuator respectively Figure 5 The Grounding Capacitor Switch is used on typeforms 230 volt 15 HP to 20 HP
366. s Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 10 Maximum 150 Units Step Out Current Detection Time Program gt Motor gt PM Motor This parameter is used with synchronous motor applications only Contact the Toshiba Customer Support Center for information on this parameter 190 Direct Access Number F641 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum 25 0 Units Seconds G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F660 F661 Adding Input Selection Program gt Feedback gt Override Control This parameter Enables Disables the feature that allows for the external adjustment of the Output Frequency Selecting either of the input methods listed enables this feature The selected input is used as a modifier of the programmed Output Frequency Settings 0 Disabled 1 VII V D 2 RR 3 RX 4 Panel Keypad 5 RS485 2 Wire 6 RS485 4 Wire 7 Communication Option Board 8 RX2 Option AIl 9 Option V I 10 UP DOWN Frequency Terminal Board 11 Pulse Input Option 12 Pulse Input Motor CPU 13 Binary BCD Input Option Direct Access Number F660 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run Yes Multiplying Input Selection Program gt Feedback gt Override Control This parameter Enables Disables the fea
367. s applied to S1 S4 of the Terminal Board to output the Preset Speed see F018 for more information on this parameter G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F019 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum Lower Limit F013 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz 83 F020 F024 Preset Speed 3 Program gt Frequency gt Preset Speeds This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 0011 and is identified as Preset Speed 3 The binary number is applied to S1 S4 of the Terminal Board to output the Preset Speed see F018 for more information on this parameter Direct Access Number F020 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum Lower Limit F013 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz Preset Speed 4 Program gt Frequency gt Preset Speeds This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 0100 and is identified as Preset Speed 4 The binary number is applied to S1 S4 of the Terminal Board to output the Preset Speed see F018 for more information on this parameter Direct Access Number F021 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum Lower Limit F013 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz Preset Speed 5 Program gt Frequency Preset Speeds Thi
368. s opened DO NOT open and then close a secondary magnetic contactor between the ASD and the motor unless the ASD is off and the motor is not rotating Note Re application of power via a secondary contact while the G9 ASD is on or while the motor is still turning may cause ASD damage The ASD input voltage should remain within 10 of the specified input voltage range Input voltages approaching the upper or lower limit settings may require that the over voltage and under voltage stall protection level parameters be adjusted Voltages outside of the permissible tolerance should be avoided The frequency of the input power should be 2 Hz of the specified input frequency DO NOT use an ASD with a motor that has a power rating higher than the rated output of the ASD The G9 ASD is designed to operate NEMA B motors Consult with your Toshiba Sales Representative before using the ASD for special applications such as with an explosion proof motor or applications with a piston load Disconnect the ASD from the motor before megging or applying a bypass voltage to the motor Interface problems may occur when an ASD is used in conjunction with some types of process controllers Signal isolation may be required to prevent controller and or ASD malfunction contact your Toshiba Sales Representative or the process controller manufacturer for additional information about compatibility and signal isolation Use caution when setting the output frequency
369. s parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 0101 and is identified as Preset Speed 5 The binary number is applied to S1 S4 of the Terminal Board to output the Preset Speed see F018 for more information on this parameter Direct Access Number F022 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum Lower Limit F013 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz Preset Speed 6 Program gt Frequency gt Preset Speeds This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 0110 and is identified as Preset Speed 6 The binary number is applied to S1 S4 of the Terminal Board to output the Preset Speed see F018 for more information on this parameter F023 Parameter Type Numerical Direct Access Number Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum Lower Limit F013 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz Preset Speed 7 Program gt Frequency Preset Speeds This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 0111 and is identified as Preset Speed 7 The binary number is applied to S1 S4 of the Terminal Board to output the Preset Speed see F018 for more information on this parameter Direct Access Number F024 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum Lower Limit F013 Maximum Upper Limit F012 Units Hz G9 ASD Installation
370. s parameter is activated during regeneration It is used to set the low end of the DC bus voltage threshold that once the bus voltage drops below this setting activates the setting of F302 Ridethrough Mode Activation may be the result of a momentary power loss or an excessive load on the bus voltage During a Ridethrough regenerative energy is used to maintain the control circuitry settings for the duration of the Ridethrough it is not used to drive the motor The motor s of the system are stopped and then restarted automatically or may continue seamlessly if so configured See F302 for more information on this parameter Note This parameter setting may increase deceleration times Direct Access Number F629 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD Dependent Changeable During Run No Minimum 55 Maximum 100 Units Brake Answer Wait Time Program gt Protection Special Protection Parameters This parameter is used in conjunction with the discrete input terminal setting Brake Answerback Input see Table 5 on pg 234 for more information on this feature After activating the discrete input terminal Braking Request the setting of this parameter starts a count down timer in which 1 a Brake Answerback Input response must be received or 2 the brake must release before the timer expires Should this timer setting expire before the Brake Answerback Input is returned or the brake release
371. s the control input This parameter sets the PG input signal that is associated with PG Point 2 Frequency This value is entered as 0 to 100 of the PG input signal range See PG Point 1 Setting F234 for further information on this setting F236 Parameter Type Numerical Direct Access Number Factory Default 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Units PG Input Point 2 Frequency Program gt Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints This parameter is used to set the direction and speed of the PG input terminals when the PG terminal are used as the control input This parameter sets PG Point 2 Frequency and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of PG Point 2 Setting See PG Point 1 Setting F234 for further information on this setting F237 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 60 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz Start Frequency Program gt Special Frequency Control The output of the drive will remain at 0 0 Hz until the programmed speed value exceeds this setting during startup Once exceeded during startup the output frequency of the drive will accelerate to the programmed setting Output frequencies below the Start Frequency will not be output from the drive during startup However once reaching the Start Frequency speed values below the St
372. sable Terminates the Light Load High Speed operation Note NO NC Normally Open Normally Closed G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 235 Table 5 Continued Discrete Input Terminal Assignment Selections And Descriptions Sel No SE ee hea Pe NO INC erminal Selection Descriptions 86 387 Binary Write Writes the status of the discrete input terminals to the control board during binary input speed control gg 89 UP DOWN Frequency up Increases the speed of the motor for the duration of activation until reaching the Upper Limit setting or increases the speed of the motor in steps see F264 for more information on this feature 90 91 UP DOWN Frequency down Decreases the speed of the motor for the duration of activation until reaching the Lower Limit setting or decreases the speed of the motor in steps see F264 for more information on this feature UP DOWN Frequency clear While operating in the Up Down Frequency speed control mode this terminal 92 93 initiates a 0 Hz output command If operating with an activated UP DOWN Frequency up or down terminal the output goes to the Lower Limit F013 setting Forward Reverse This setting operates in conjunction with another terminal being set to the Run Stop function 98 99 When configured to Run Run Stop to CC the make or break of this connection to CC changes the direction of the motor 100 101 Run S
373. se function is initiated the Trouble Internal Timer begins to count down Trouble Internal 126 127 Timer value is set at F630 Should the count down timer expire before the brake releases or before the Brake Answerback Input is returned fault E 11 will occur Otherwise the brake releases the motor and normal motor operations resume The Braking Release function is primarily used at startup but may be used when the brake is applied while the motor is running Brake Answerback Input This setting is required when the Braking Request function is used The function of this input terminal is to receive the returned status of the braking system The returned status is either Released or Not Released 130 131 If Released is returned within the time setting of F630 normal system function resumes If Not Released is returned or if the F630 time setting times out before either signal is returned then fault E 11 occurs The returned signal may also be used to notify the user or control a dependent subsystem Traverse Permission Signal Enables Disables the Traverse function See parameter F980 for more information idl faa on this feature Note NO NC Normally Open Normally Closed 236 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Table 6 Output Terminal Assignments For The FP AM FM MON1 and MON2 Output Terminals Output Meter Terminal Assignments and Display Item Selections Selection Term
374. see F117 S4 The default setting for this terminal is Preset Speed 4 see Preset Speed 4 on pg 84 The S4 terminal is activated by connecting CC to this terminal Sink mode This input terminal may be programmed to any of the functions listed in Table 5 on pg 234 see F118 RR The default function assigned to this terminal is the Frequency Mode 1 setting The RR terminal accepts a 0 10 VDC input signal that is used to control the function assigned to this terminal This input terminal may be programmed to control the speed or torque of the motor via an amplitude setting or regulate by setting a limit The gain and bias of this terminal may be adjusted for application specific suitability see F210 F215 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual RX The default function assigned to this terminal is the Torque Command setting The RX terminal accepts a 10 VDC input signal that is used to carry out the function assigned to this terminal This input terminal may be programmed to raise or lower the speed or torque of the motor via an amplitude setting This terminal may also be used to regulate the speed or torque of a motor by setting a limit The gain and bias of this terminal may be adjusted for application specific suitability see F216 F221 See Figure 20 on pg 26 for an electrical depiction of the RX terminal This terminal references CCA V I The V I terminal has the dual function of being able to receive an
375. setting is used to set the on time duration of the DC Injection Braking F252 Parameter Type Numerical Direct Access Number Factory Default 1 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 20 0 Units Seconds Forward Reverse DC Injection Braking Priority Program gt Protection gt DC Braking This parameter setting determines if DC Injection Braking is to be used during a change in the direction of the motor Settings 0 Disabled 1 Enabled F253 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Motor Shaft Fixing Control Program gt Protection gt DC Braking This parameter Enables Disables a continuous DC injection at half of the amperage setting of F251 into a stopped motor This feature is useful in preheating the motor or to keep the rotor from spinning freely Motor Shaft Stationary Control starts after the DC injection brake stops the motor and continues until ST CC is opened power is turned off an Emergency Off command is received or this parameter is changed Enabling this feature will also require a non zero entry at F250 Settings 0 Disabled 1 Enabled F254 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes 0 Hz Command Output Program gt Special gt Special Parameters This paramet
376. ss Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum 6000 0 Units F520 Setting Speed 3 Operation Time Program gt Pattern Run gt Operation Time This parameter sets the run time for Preset Speed 3 This time is effective when used with Group Speeds and non Group Speeds If the Auto Restart function is activated the search time required for the Auto Restart function will be subtracted from the Operation Time setting resulting in a shorter run time F542 Parameter Type Numerical Direct Access Number Factory Default 5 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum 6000 0 Units F520 Setting Speed 4 Operation Time Program gt Pattern Run gt Operation Time This parameter sets the run time for Preset Speed 4 This time is effective when used with Group Speeds and non Group Speeds If the Auto Restart function is activated the search time required for the Auto Restart function will be subtracted from the Operation Time setting resulting in a shorter run time F543 Parameter Type Numerical Direct Access Number Factory Default 5 0 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 1 Maximum 6000 0 Units F520 Setting Speed 5 Operation Time Program gt Pattern Run gt Operation Time This parameter sets the run time for Preset Speed 5 This time is effective when used with Group Speeds and non Group Speeds If t
377. stallation and Operation Manual Speed 3 Operation Time 177 Speed 4 Operation Time 177 Speed 5 Operation Time 177 Speed 6 Operation Time 177 Speed 7 Operation Time 178 Speed 8 Operation Time 178 Speed 9 Operation Time 178 Speed at 0 Drooping Gain 139 Speed at F320 Drooping Gain 139 Speed Error 248 Speed Limit Torque 0 Band 157 Speed Limit Torque 0 Center Value 156 Speed Limit Torque 0 Center Value Reference 156 Speed Loop Proportional Gain 160 Speed Loop Stabilization Coefficient 160 Speed PID Switching Frequency 161 Speed Reach Detection Band 86 Speed Reach Frequency 86 Speed Reference Setpoints 55 56 ST 21 22 Stall 53 Stall Prevention During Regeneration 160 Stall Prevention Factor 1 154 Stall Prevention Level 182 Standard Mode Selection 46 Start Frequency 123 Startup and Test 21 Startup Wizard Parameter Requirements 71 Step Out 252 Stepout Current Detection Level 190 Stepout Current Detection Time 190 Stop Reset Key 30 SU 21 23 Supply Voltage Correction 137 Switching Load Torque During Power Running 142 Switching Load Torque During Regenerative Braking 142 Synchronized Acceleration Time 139 Synchronized Deceleration Time 138 System Configuration and Menu Options 41 System Grounding 18 System Integration Precautions 7 System Operation 70 T T L3 16 17 T1 17 T2 17 T3 17 Tension Torque Bias Input 154 Terminal 47 Termi
378. t Factory Default Unassigned This parameter is used to set the functionality of the Virtual Input Terminal 1 As a virtual terminal it exists only in memory and is considered to always be in its True connected to CC state Changeable During Run No It is often practical to assign a function to this terminal that the user desires to be maintained regardless of external conditions or operations This parameter sets the programmable Virtual Input Terminal 1 terminal to one of the functions listed in Table 5 on pg 234 In addition the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed Virtual Input Terminal 2 Selection Direct Access Number F974 Program gt Terminal gt Input Terminals Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Unassigned This parameter is used to set the functionality of the Virtual Input Terminal 2 As a virtual terminal it exists only in memory and is considered to always be in its True connected to CC state Changeable During Run No It is often practical to assign a function to this terminal that the user desires to be maintained regardless of external conditions or operations This parameter sets the programmable Virtual Input Terminal 2 terminal to one of the functions listed in Table 5 on pg 234 In addition the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed Virtual Input Terminal 3 Selection Direct Access Number F975
379. t Pattern Operation Mode set the end of pattern command to Reset or Continue 7 From the Remote mode Local Remote light is off initiate a Run command i e F and or R terminal On 8 Connect the Pattern Operation Group 1 input terminal to CC 9 Connect the Pattern Operation Trigger Signal input terminal to CC and the Pattern Run will start and continue as programmed 10 Open the Pattern Operation Trigger Signal connection to CC to stop the Pattern Run before its conclusion if required 172 Direct Access Number F523 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Skip Changeable During Run No Minimum Skip Maximum 15 Units Preset Speed Number Pattern Group 1 Selection F523 F524 F525 F526 F527 F528 F529 F530 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Skip Skip Skip Skip Skip Skip Skip Skip 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 24 2 2 31 3 3 3 3 1 343 43 D F 4 4 4 4 4 4 41 4 Besisisilsisfisls 5 Zi6 6 6 6 16 6 6 6 S 7 7 7 7 7 7 74 7 o O2is s s s8 s s8 s8 s8 9 9 9 919 9 T 9 9 2 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 b OQ fir iu afar a ar a a 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 13 13 13 13 13 3 13 13 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 1S 15 15 15 15 5 15 15 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F524 F527 Pattern Group 1 Selection 2 Program
380. t the threshold frequency setting for the time setting of F351 for acceleration or F353 for deceleration Settings 0 Off 1 F350 F353 Settings 2 Terminal Board Input 144 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F350 F353 Acceleration Suspend Frequency Program gt Fundamental Accel Decel 1 Settings When Enabled at F349 this parameter is used to set the frequency at which the Acceleration Suspend function will activate During acceleration this parameter sets the frequency at which acceleration will stop and the motor will run at the setting of this parameter for the time setting of F351 F350 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz Acceleration Suspend Time Program gt Fundamental gt Accel Decel 1 Settings When Enabled at F349 this parameter is used to set the duration of activation of the Acceleration Suspend function when initiated by reaching the Acceleration Suspend Frequency setting F350 Once this parameter times out the acceleration rate will resume from the point of suspension F351 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 10 0 Units Seconds Deceleration Suspend Frequency Program gt Fundamental gt Accel Decel 1 Sett
381. t which the output frequency is reduced in an attempt to prevent a trip The over current level is entered as a percentage of the maximum rating of the drive Note The Motor Overload Protection parameter must enabled at F017 to use this feature F601 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD Dependent Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 10 Maximum 165 Units Retain Trip Record at Power Down Program gt Protection gt Trip Settings This parameter Enables Disables the Trip Record Retention setting When enabled this feature logs the trip event and retains the trip information when the system powers down The trip information may be viewed from the Program gt Utilities gt Trip History screen or the Monitor screen When disabled the trip information will be cleared when the system powers down Settings 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 182 F602 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F603 F605 Emergency Off Mode Settings Program gt Protection gt Emergency Off Settings This parameter determines the method used to stop the motor in the event that an Emergency Off command is received and the system is configured to use this feature This setting may also be associated with the FL terminals to allow the FL relay t
382. tartup frequency if the same starting frequency is required at each startup Note This parameter setting may be different at each startup when enabled Settings 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Overwrite F268 at Power Off or Reset G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F269 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Enabled Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes 129 F270 F270 Figure 29 Up Down Frequency Operation Control Timing Diagram Jump Frequency 1 Program gt Special Jump Frequencies In conjunction with parameter F271 this parameter establishes a user defined frequency range the Jump Frequency and a plus or minus value During acceleration the output frequency of the drive will hold at the lower level of the Jump Frequency range until the programmed acceleration ramp reaches the upper level of the Jump Frequency range At which time the output frequency of the drive will accelerate to the upper level of the Jump Frequency range and continue upward as programmed During deceleration the output frequency of the drive will hold at the upper level of the Jump Frequency range until the programmed deceleration ramp reaches the lower level of the Jump Frequency range At which time the output frequency of the drive w
383. tation Current Displays the current value required to produce the excitation field PID Feedback Provides a status of the PID Real Time Feedback in Hz Input Power Displays the Input Power in Kilowatts kW Output Power Displays the Output Power in Kilowatts kW Pattern Group Number Displays the active Pattern Run Group Number Pattern Group Cycle Displays the cycle number of the active Pattern Run Group Pattern Group Preset Displays the active Preset Speed being run of the active Pattern Run Group Pattern Time Displays the remaining time for the active Pattern Run Group RR Displays the RR input value as a percentage of the full range of the RR value potentiometer input V I Displays the V I input setting as a percentage of the full range of the V I value Note The isolated V I input terminal may receive Current or Voltage to control the output speed or the output torque The input signal type must be selected at SW301 on the Terminal Board The V input setting of SW301 is used for the 0 10 VDC analog input signal and the I input setting of SW301 is used for the 0 20 mA analog input signal Either may be used as a frequency or torque command source See parameter F201 for more information on the setup of this terminal The LCD Screen shows the V I terminal as VIH the additional character I is used to indicate Input RX Displays the RX input setting as a percentage of
384. ted by the purposeful or inadvertent actions of workers Insulators machine guards and electrical safeguards are to be inspected and tested where possible at installation and periodically after installation for potential hazardous conditions DO NOT allow personnel near rotating machinery Warning signs to this effect shall be posted at or near the machinery DO NOT allow personnel near electrical conductors Contact with electrical conductors can be fatal Warning signs to this effect shall be posted at or near the hazard Personal protection equipment shall be provided and used to protect employees from any hazards inherent to system operation System Setup Requirements e When using the ASD as an integral part of a larger system it is the responsibility of the ASD Installer Maintenance personnel to ensure that there is a fail safe in place i e an arrangement designed to switch the system to a safe condition if there is a fault or failure e System safety features should be employed and designed into the integrated system in a manner such that system operation even in the event of system failure will not cause harm or result in system damage or injury to personnel i e E Off Auto Restart settings System Interlocks etc e The programming setup and system configuration of the ASD may allow it to start the motor unexpectedly A familiarity with the Auto Restart settings are a requirement to use this product e Power factor im
385. ter Type Selection List Factory Default Linear This parameter enables a user selected preprogrammed output profile that controls the acceleration and deceleration pattern for the 1 Accel Decel parameter Settings 0 Linear 1 S Pattern 1 2 S Pattern 2 The figures below provide a profile of the available accel decel patterns Linear acceleration and deceleration is the default pattern and is used on most applications S pattern 1 is used for applications that require quick acceleration and deceleration This setting is also popular for applications that require shock absorption at the start of acceleration or deceleration S pattern 2 decreases the rate of change above the base frequency for acceleration and deceleration G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Max Freq Freq Setting Changeable During Run Yes Freq lt Hz gt F506 F009 Setting F009 Setting Time sec Effective Acceleration Time F507 F009 Setting S Pattern Acceleration Deceleration 1 165 F503 F503 Acc Dec Pattern 2 Direct Access Number F503 Program Special Accel Decel 1 4 Settings Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Linear This parameter enables a user selected preprogrammed output profile that controls the acceleration and deceleration pattern for the 2 Accel Decel parameter Change
386. ter is used to select the type of output signal provided at the FM terminal i e voltage or current The output voltage and current range is 0 10 VDC and 0 20 mA respectively See F005 for more information on this setting Settings 0 0 10V 1 0 20mA F681 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 10V Direct Access Number Changeable During Run No FM Output Gradient Characteristic Program gt Terminal gt Analog Output Terminals This parameter sets the output response polarity of the FM output terminal The FM output terminal response may be set to respond inversely or directly to the input signal See F005 for more information on this setting Settings 0 Minus Negative Gradient 1 Plus Positive Gradient 194 F682 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default Plus Changeable During Run Yes G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F683 F689 FM Bias Adjustment Program gt Terminal gt Analog Output Terminals This parameter setting is used to ensure that a zero level input signal produces a zero level output at the FM terminal Set the function of F005 to zero and then set this parameter to zero for proper operation See F005 for more information on this setting F683 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Mini
387. the ASD from responding to contact bounce or chatter Direct Access Number F141 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 8 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 2 0 Maximum 200 0 Units mS Input Terminal 3 ST Response Time Program gt Terminal gt Input Terminal Delays This parameter delays the response of the drive to any change in the ST terminal input by the programmed value see waveforms at F140 The delay may be increased to provide additional electrical noise immunity or to prevent the ASD from responding to contact bounce or chatter G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F142 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 8 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 2 0 Maximum 200 0 Units mS 95 F143 F165 Input Terminal 4 RES Response Time Direct Access Number F143 Program gt Terminal gt Input Terminal Delays Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 8 0 This parameter delays the response of the drive to any change in the RES terminal input by the programmed value see waveforms at F140 Changeable D ring R n No The delay may be increased to provide additional electrical noise immunity or Miriama to prevent the ASD from responding to contact bounce or chatter Maximum 200 0 Units mS Input Terminal 5 12 Response Time Direct Access Number F144 Program gt Terminal gt Input Terminal
388. the My Function setup G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F980 F984 Traverse Selection Program gt Special gt Traverse This parameter setting is used in the setup of the Traverse control mode of operation and is used in conjunction with the discrete terminal activation of the Traverse Permission Signal This parameter is used to enable the Traverse function The Traverse function is activated via the discrete input terminal see Table 5 on pg 234 See the Traverse Control Instruction Manual P N 58693 for more information on this feature Settings 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Direct Access Number F980 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run No Traverse Acceleration Time Program gt Special gt Traverse This parameter setting is used in the setup of the Traverse control mode of operation This setting establishes the acceleration rate used during the Traverse function See the Traverse Control Instruction Manual P N 58693 for more information on this feature Direct Access Number F981 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 25 0 Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 1 Maximum 120 0 Units Seconds Traverse Deceleration Time Program gt Special gt Traverse This parameter setting is used in the setup of the Traverse control mode of operation This setting establishes the deceleration rate used during t
389. the Torque Control mode This parameter sets the RX input level that is associated with RX Input Point 1 Frequency when operating in the Speed Control mode or is associated with the RX Input Point 1 Rate when operating in the Torque Control mode RX Input Speed Control Setup Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Speed control input at the RX input terminal Program gt Fundamental gt Standard Mode Selection gt Frequency Mode 1 gt RX Program gt Fundamental Standard Mode Selection gt Command Mode Selection gt Terminal Block Speed Control Perform the following setup to allow the system to perform Speed control from the RX input terminal Set RX Input Point 1 Frequency F217 Set RX Input Point 1 Setting F216 the input analog signal level that corresponds to the speed setting at RX Input Point 1 Frequency Set RX Input Point 2 Frequency F219 Set RX Input Point 2 Setting F218 the input analog signal level that corresponds to the speed setting at RX Input Point 2 Frequency Provide a Run command F and or R Once set as the RX input voltage changes the ASD output speed and or torque will vary in accordance with the above settings This parameter value is entered as 100 to 100 of the RX input signal range See parameter F474 and F475 for information on fine tuning this terminal response Direct Access Number F216 Parameter Type Num
390. the available selections Their use and selection requirements are described in an example at F977 Direct Access Number F903 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 NOP Input Function Target 3 Program My Function gt My Function Unit 1 This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 3 terminal This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target 3 terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 7 on pg 238 Table 8 on pg 239 or Table 10 on pg 241 See F977 for more information on this parameter Direct Access Number F904 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 Disabled Changeable During Run Yes Output Function Assigned Program My Function gt My Function Unit 1 This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the Output Function Assigned terminal This setting assigns the function of the programmable Output Function Assigned data location to one of the functions listed in the Input Setting field of Table 7 on pg 238 Settings 0 3099 See the My Function Instruction Manual P N E6581335 and F977 for more information on this parameter 214 Direct Access Number F905 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 Disabled Changeable Durin
391. the control input while operating in the Speed Factory Default 0 Changeable During Run Yes Control mode or the Torque Control mode Minimum 0 This parameter sets the V I input level that is associated with the V I Input Maximum 100 Point 1 Frequency setting when operating in the Speed control mode or is Units associated with the V I Input Point 1 Rate setting when operating in the Torque Control mode Frequency Settings V I Point 2 100 Note See note on pg 44 for more information on the V I terminal Setting N F203 D V I Input Speed Control Setup Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Speed control input a at the V I input terminal T Set SW301 of the Terminal Board to Voltage or Current see Figure 90n ya pg 24 esas 00 Hz Jutput gt ox Freq Frequency Program gt Fundamental gt Standard Mode Selection gt Frequency Mode W L Fane a VAI Point 2 1 gt V I E202 EAM Program gt Fundamental gt Standard Mode Selection gt Command Mode Selection gt Terminal Block Speed Control Perform the following setup to allow the system to perform Speed control from the V I input terminal Set V I Input Point 1 Frequency F202 Set V I Input Point 1 Setting F201 the input analog signal level that corresponds to the frequency setting at V I Input Point 1 Frequency Set V I Input Point 2 Frequency F204 Set V I Input Po
392. the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode or the Torque Control mode This parameter sets the RR input level that is associated with RR Input Point 2 Frequency when operating in the Speed control mode or is associated with the RR Input Point 1 Rate when operating in the Torque Control mode This value is entered as 0 to 100 of the RR input signal range See RR Input Point 1 Setting F210 for more information on this setting when used for Speed control See RR Input Point 1 Rate F214 for more information on this setting when used for Torque Control Direct Access Number F212 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Units RR Input Point 2 Frequency Program gt Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RR input terminal when the RR terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode This parameter sets RR Input Point 2 Frequency and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of RR Input Point 2 Setting when operating in the Speed Control mode See RR Input Point 1 Setting F210 for more information on this setting G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F213 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 60 00 Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units
393. the system design should take this into consideration Please contact your Toshiba Sales Representative for application specific information or for training support The Toshiba ASD is part of a larger system and the safe operation of the ASD will depend upon observing certain precautions and performing proper system integration Improperly designed or improperly installed system interlocks may render the motor unable to start or stop on command The failure of external or ancillary components may cause intermittent system operation i e the system may start the motor without warning A detailed system analysis and job safety analysis should be performed by the systems designer and or systems integrator before the installation of the ASD component Contact your Toshiba Sales Representative for options availability and for application specific system integration information if required Personnel Protection G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Installation operation and maintenance shall be performed by Qualified Personnel Only A thorough understanding of the ASD will be required before the installation operation or maintenance of the ASD A WARNING A Rotating machinery and live conductors can be hazardous and shall not come into contact with personnel Personnel should be protected from all rotating machinery and electrical hazards at all times Insulators machine guards and electrical safeguards may fail or be defea
394. this parameter set the Base Frequency Base Frequency Voltage and the Motor Rated Revolutions to the nameplated values of the motor to achieve the best possible Autotune precision Settings 0 Autotune Disabled 1 Reset Motor Defaults 2 Enable Autotune on Run Command 3 Autotuning by Input Terminal Signal see Table 5 on pg 234 4 Motor Constant Auto Calculation F400 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default Autotune Disabled Changeable During Run No Slip Frequency Gain Program gt Motor gt Vector Motor Model This parameter provides a degree of slip compensation for a given load A higher setting here decreases the slip allowed for a given load ASD output ratio G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F401 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 70 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 150 Units 151 F402 F409 Autotuning 2 Program gt Motor gt Vector Motor Model This parameter introduces a thermal element into the autotuning equation and is used to automatically adjust the Autotune parameter values as a function of increases in the temperature of the motor Settings 0 Off 1 Self Cooled Motor Tuning 2 Forced Air Cooled Motor Tuning F402 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Off Direct Access Number Changeable Dur
395. tially by performing a few simple configuration settings To operate properly the ASD must be securely mounted and connected to a power source 3 phase AC input at the R L1 S L2 and T L3 terminals The control terminals of the ASD may be used by connecting the terminals of the Terminal Board P N 072314P903 to the proper sensors or signal input sources see the section titled I O and Control on pg 21 and Figure 9 on pg 24 System performance may be further enhanced by assigning a function to the output terminals of the Terminal Board and connecting the terminals to the proper indicators or actuators relays contactors LEDs etc Note The optional ASD interface boards may be used to expand the I O functionality of the ASD Installation Notes A CAUTION When a brake equipped motor is connected to the ASD it is possible that the brake may not release at startup because of insufficient voltage To avoid this DO NOT connect the brake or the brake contactor to the output of the ASD If an output contactor is used for bypass operation it must be interlocked such that commercial power is never applied to the output terminals of the ASD U T1 V T2 and W T3 DO NOT apply commercial power to the ASD output terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 If a secondary magnetic contactor MC is used between the output of the ASD and the motor it should be interlocked such that the ST CC connection is disconnected before the output contactor i
396. tings of the ASD Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled off then on for the changes to take effect Settings 0 9600 1 19200 2 38400 F800 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 19200 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Units bps RS485 2 and 4 Wire Parity Program Communications gt Communication Settings This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by establishing the Parity setting of the communications link The communications network includes other ASDs and Host Control computers that monitor the status of the ASD s transfers commands and loads or modifies the parameter settings of the ASD Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled off then on for the changes to take effect Settings 0 No Parity 1 Even Parity 2 Odd Parity 202 F801 Parameter Type Selection List Direct Access Number Factory Default Even Parity Changeable During Run Yes G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F802 F804 ASD Number Program Communications Communication Settings This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by assigning an identification ID number to each ASD in the communications network The communications network includes other ASDs and Host Control computers that monitor the status of the ASD s transfers comman
397. tion Table 11 on pg 243 lists the available selections Their use and selection requirements are described in an example at F977 Direct Access Number F942 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 NOP Input Function Target 2 Program gt My Function gt My Function Unit 5 This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 2 terminal This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target 2 terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 7 on pg 238 Table 8 on pg 239 or Table 10 on pg 241 See F977 for more information on this parameter Direct Access Number F943 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 Disabled Changeable During Run Yes Input Function Command 2 Program gt My Function gt My Function Unit 5 This parameter is used to assign a user selected logical operator to two user selected Input Function Target variables enable a counter timer function or perform a hold reset function Table 11 on pg 243 lists the available selections Their use and selection requirements are described in an example at F977 Direct Access Number F944 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 NOP Input Function Target 3 Program gt My Function gt My Function Unit 5 This parameter plays a role in the set
398. tion Do not obstruct the ventilation openings Refer to the section titled Installation and Connections on pg 14 for further information on ventilation requirements The ambient operating temperature range of the G9 ASD is 14 to 104 F 10 to 40 C See the section titled Installation and Connections on pg 14 for additional information on installing the drive Mounting Requirements Only Qualified Personnel should install this equipment Install the unit in a secure and upright position in a well ventilated area As a minimum the installation of the equipment should conform to the 2008 National Electrical Code Article 110 NEC OSHA as well as any other applicable national regional or industry codes and standards Installation practices shall conform to the latest revision of NFPA 70E Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces It is the responsibility of the ASD Installer Maintenance personnel to ensure that the unit is installed into an enclosure that will protect personnel against electric shock G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Conductor Routing and Grounding A WARNING A e Use separate metal conduits for routing the input power output power and control circuits e A separate ground cable shall be run inside of the conduit of the input power output power and the control circuits e A separate ground cable should be run inside the conduit with the input power output power and and
399. top This terminal enables the motor to run when activated and disables the motor when deactivated pene Commercial Power ASD Switching Initiates the ASD to Commercial Power switching function See parameter F354 for more information on this feature Frequency Reference Priority Switching Toggles frequency control to and from the settings of F004 and 104 105 F207 106 107 VIII V I Terminal Priority Assigns Speed control to the V I Terminal and overrides the F004 setting Command Terminal Board Priority Assigns Command control to the Terminal Board and overrides the F003 1981103 setting 110 111 Edit Enable Allows for the override of the lockout parameter setting F700 allowing for parameter editing 112 113 Control Switching Toggles the system to and from the speed control and the torque control modes Fast Deceleration Using dynamic braking if enabled and supported stops the motor at the fastest rate allowed by the load Preliminary Excitation Applies an excitation current to the motor holds shaft stationary for the duration of the activation 122 123 124 125 Brake Request Initiates the brake release command This setting requires that another discrete input terminal be set to Brake Answerback Input to complete the brake release command and to convey the status of the braking system to the user or to a dependent subsystem Once the braking relea
400. tor Overload Protection Level 3 99 Motor Overload Protection Level 4 100 Motor Overload Real 43 Motor Rated Capacity 152 Motor Rated Current 152 Motor Rated RPM 152 Motor Set 1 46 Motor Set 2 58 Motor Set 3 58 Motor Set 4 58 Motor Shaft Fixing Control 125 Motor Load Combinations 11 Mounting the ASD 15 275 Multiplying Input Selection 191 My Function Count Data 1 220 My Function Count Data 2 220 My Function Frequency Data 1 218 My Function Frequency Data 2 218 My Function Frequency Data 4 219 My Function Frequency Data 5 219 My Function Percent Data 1 217 My Function Percent Data 3 218 My Function Percent Data 4 218 My Function Percent Data 5 218 My Function Selection 231 My Function Time Data 1 219 My Function Time Data 2 219 My Function Time Data 3 219 My Function Time Data 4 220 My Function Time Data 5 220 N Network Option Reset Settings 213 NONE 250 Number of PG Input Phases 150 Number of PG Input Pulses 150 O O1A B 21 O2A B 21 23 OC 246 OC1 250 OCIP 250 OC2 251 OC2P 251 0C3 251 OC3P 251 OCA 251 OCA2 251 OCA3 251 OCL 251 OCR 251 OH 246 251 OH2 251 OJ 246 OLI 252 OL2 252 OLI 247 OLM 247 OLR 247 252 OP 247 OP1 252 OP2 252 276 OP3 252 Operation Local 73 Operation Above 60 Hz 10 Operation Command Clear Selection When ST Off 198 Operation Mode 65 Operation Panel Parameters 58 Operational and
401. toring instructions to be applied to the ASD for Communications Option Settings 8 13 respectively See the DeviceNet Option Instruction Manual P N 58683 for more information on this parameter Settings 0 Disabled 1 FD01 ASD Status 1 2 FD00 Output Frequency 0 01 Hz 3 FD03 Output Current 0 01 4 FD05 Output Voltage 0 01 5 FC91 ASD Alarm 6 FD22 PID Feedback Value 0 01 Hz 7 FD06 Input Terminal Status 8 FD07 Output Terminal Status 9 FE36 VIII V T 10 FE35 RR Input 11 FE37 RX Input 12 FD04 Input Voltage DC Detection 0 01 13 FD16 Real time Speed Feedback 14 FD18 Torque 0 01 15 FE60 My Monitor 16 FE61 My Monitor 17 FE62 My Monitor 18 FE63 My Monitor 19 F880 Free Notes 20 FD29 Input Power 0 01 kW 21 FD30 Output Power 0 01 kW 22 FE14 Cumulative Operation Time 0 01 1 Hour 23 FE40 FM Terminal Output Monitor 24 FE41 AM Terminal Output Monitor Direct Access Number F841 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0000h Changeable During Run Yes Communications Option DeviceNet Profibus Setting 9 Program gt Communications Communication Settings Same as F841 See F841 for information on this parameter Direct Access Number F842 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0000h Changeable During Run Yes
402. trol Power Under Voltage 252 Cooling Fan Control 186 CPU Fault 249 Crane Hoist Settings 56 Creeping Frequency 143 Creeping Time 144 Cumulative Operation Time Alarm 186 Current Control Proportional Gain 160 Current Voltage Specifications 263 D dbOn 245 DBR Load 43 DBR OL Overload Trip 43 DBR Over Current 268 DBR Overload 43 DC Bus Voltage 43 DC Injection Braking 52 DC Injection Braking Current 124 DC Injection Braking Start Frequency 124 DC Injection Braking Time 125 DC Input 21 DC Output 21 Deceleration Suspend Frequency 145 Deceleration Suspend Time 145 Deceleration Time 1 80 Deceleration Time 2 164 Deceleration Time 3 169 Deceleration Time 4 170 Default Setting Changes 74 Direct Access 49 Disconnection Detection Extended Time 210 Discrete Input 21 25 Discrete Input Terminal Assignment 234 Discrete Input Terminals 45 Discrete Output 21 Display Bias 198 Display Gradient Characteristic 197 Display Parameters 49 Display Unit Multiplication Factor 197 Display Unit Selection 197 Display Units for Voltage and Current 197 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Disposal 3 Drive Characteristics 13 Drooping 139 Drooping Control 60 Drooping Gain 139 Drooping Insensitive Torque 140 Drooping Output Filter 140 Dynamic Braking 52 136 Dynamic Braking Resistance 137 Dynamic Braking Resistor Over Current 251 Dynamic Braking Resistor Overload 252
403. ttern Group Number 44 Preset Speed 13 132 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 277 Preset Speed 13 Operation Mode 181 Preset Speed 14 132 Preset Speed 14 Operation Mode 182 Preset Speed 15 133 Preset Speed 15 Operation Mode 182 Preset Speed 2 83 Preset Speed 2 Operation Mode 180 Preset Speed 3 84 Preset Speed 3 Operation Mode 180 Preset Speed 4 84 Preset Speed 4 Operation Mode 181 Preset Speed 5 84 Preset Speed 5 Operation Mode 181 Preset Speed 6 84 Preset Speed 6 Operation Mode 181 Preset Speed 7 84 Preset Speed 7 Operation Mode 181 Preset Speed 8 131 Preset Speed 8 Operation Mode 181 Preset Speed 9 132 Preset Speed 9 Operation Mode 181 Preset Speed Operation Mode 179 Preset Speed Operation Selection 210 Preset Speeds 54 Primary Menus 31 Process Decreasing Rate 150 Process Increasing Rate 150 Process Lower Limit 149 Process Upper Limit 149 Program Menu 31 Program Mode Menu Navigation 46 Prohibition 49 Protection 52 PTC1 Thermal Selection 189 PTC2 Thermal Selection 190 PtSt 247 Pulse Output Frequency FP 194 Pulse Output Function FP 194 Pulse Width Modulation 10 Pulsed Output 21 PWM Carrier Frequency 133 Q Qualified Personnel 2 R R 21 22 R L1 16 17 RAM Fault 249 Random Mode 138 278 Reach Settings 49 Read Error 249 Real Time Clock Setup 50 Regenerative Braking Torque Limit 1 158 Regenerative Braking Torque Limit 1 Level
404. ture that allows for the external adjustment of the commanded frequency Selecting either of the input methods listed enables this feature The selected input is used as a multiplier of the commanded frequency If Setting F729 is selected the value entered at parameter F729 is used as the multiplier of the commanded frequency Settings 0 Disabled 1 VII V D 2 RR 3 RX 4 Setting F729 5 RX2 Option AIl G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F661 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run No 191 F669 F671 Selection of OUT Terminal Program gt Terminal gt Analog Output Terminals This parameter is used to enable the OUT1 and OUT2 output terminals or the FP output terminal by selecting Logic Output or Pulse Train Output respectively Note The Logic output and the Pulse Train output may not be used simultaneously If Logic Output is selected the OUT1 and OUT2 O1A 01B and O2A O2B output contacts of the Terminal Board are enabled to function as described in parameter F130 The OUT1 and OUT2 terminals may be used simultaneously and they may be assigned different functions If Pulse Train Output is selected the FP output terminal of the Terminal Board is enabled to function as configured in F676 and F677 Settings 0 Logic Output 1 Pulse Train Output Direct Access Number F669 Parameter Ty
405. ue that represents Communications Reference Speed Setpoint 2 frequency This value is entered as 0 to 100 of the Communications Reference input value range Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled off then on for the changes to take effect F813 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Units Point 2 Frequency Program Communications gt Communication Reference Adjust This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the Communications Reference speed control input See F811 for more information on this setting This parameter sets the Communications Reference Speed Setpoint 2 Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled off then on for the changes to take effect F814 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 60 00 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz RS485 Baud Rate Program Communications gt Communication Settings This parameter sets the RS485 baud rate Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled off then on for the changes to take effect Settings 0 9600 bps 1 19200 bps 2 38400 bps RS485 Send Wait Time Program Communications Communication Settings This parameter sets the RS485 response delay time Changes
406. ult 2 200 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run No Minimum 1 0 Maximum ASD Dependent Units kHz Auto Restart Selection Program gt Protection gt Retry Restart This parameter Enables Disables the ability of the drive to start into a spinning motor when the ST CC connection opens momentarily and is then closed Break Make ST or after a power interruption momentary power failure Settings 0 Off 1 Enabled At Power Failure 2 Enabled At Make Break ST CC 3 Enabled At Make Break ST CC or Power Failure 4 Enabled At Run G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F301 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Off Direct Access Number Changeable During Run No 133 F302 F302 Regenerative Power Ridethrough Mode Direct Access Number F302 Program Protection Under Voltage Ridethrough Parameter Type Selection List This parameter determines the motor control response of the drive in the event Factory Default Off of a momentary power outage or under voltage condition Changeable During Run Yes During a Ridethrough regenerative energy is used to maintain the control circuitry settings for the duration of the Ridethrough it is not used to drive the motor The motor s of the system are stopped and then restarted automatically if so configured In a multiple motor application there will be a requirement to syn
407. umerical Factory Default 0 0 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 0 Maximum 100 0 Units V or F701 Vif 5 Point Setting Frequency 3 Program gt Special gt V f 5 Point Setting The V f 5 Point Setting Frequency 3 sets the frequency to be associated with the voltage setting of parameter F195 V f 5 Point Setting Voltage 3 See F190 and F191 for additional information on this setting Direct Access Number F194 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz Vif 5 Point Setting Voltage 3 Program gt Special gt V f 5 Point Setting The V f 5 Point Setting Voltage 3 establishes the output voltage level that is to be associated with the frequency setting of F194 V f 5 Point Setting Frequency 3 The F701 parameter setting will determine if the selection for this parameter appears in the form of a Voltage V or as a Percentage of the ASD rating The default setting is See F190 and F191 for additional information on this setting F195 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 0 Direct Access Number Changeable During Run No Minimum 0 0 Maximum 100 0 Units V or F701 Vif 5 Point Setting Frequency 4 Program gt Special gt V f 5 Point Setting The V f 5 Point Setting Frequency 4 sets the frequency to be asso
408. ump Frequency Bandwidth 131 Jump Frequency 2 131 Jump Frequency 2 Bandwidth 131 Jump Frequency 3 131 Jump Frequency 3 Bandwidth 131 K Key Failure 248 Keypad ASD MTG KIT Dimensions mounting 35 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Keypad Installation Precautions 33 Keypad Remote Mounting 33 Keypad Remote Mounting using the ASD MTG KIT 35 Keypad Remote Mounting w o the ASD MTG KIT 34 L L1 17 L2 17 L3 17 Lead Length Specifications 20 LED Character Font Information 30 LED Screen 29 30 LED LCD Screen Information 30 Light Load Conditions 11 Light Load High Speed Learning Function 140 Light Load High Speed Operation 140 Light Load High Speed Operation Detection Time 141 Light Load High Speed Operation Heavy Load Detection Time 141 Light Load High Speed Operation Load Wait Time 141 Light Load High Speed Operation Switching Lower Limit Frequency 141 Line Power Switching 48 Linear Acceleration 165 Load Moment of Inertia 1 160 Load Moment of Inertia 2 161 Load Sharing Gain Input 155 Load Produced Negative Torque 12 Local Mode 29 Local Remote Key 29 Lockout 69 Low Current Detection Current Hysteresis Width 184 Low Current 249 Low Current Detection Threshold 185 Low Current Settings 52 Low Current Trip 184 Low Current Trip Threshold Time 185 Lower Limit Frequency 81 Lower Limit Frequency 71 Low Speed Operation 10 Low Speed Signal Output Frequenc
409. unction Settings 0 Every Start Standard Pulse 1 Power On or Reset Standard Pulse 2 Every Start Short Pulse 3 Power On or Reset Short Pulse Direct Access Number F613 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Every Start standard pulse Changeable During Run No Over Torque Trip Program gt Protection gt Over Torque Parameters This parameter Enables Disables the Over Torque Tripping function When enabled the ASD trips if an output torque value greater than the setting of F616 or F617 exists for a time longer than the setting of F618 When disabled the ASD does not trip due to over torque conditions Note A discrete output terminal may be activated when an over torque alarm occurs if so configured see F130 Settings 0 Disabled 1 Enabled G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F615 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Disabled Changeable During Run No 185 F616 F621 Over Torque Detection Level Positive Torque Program gt Protection gt Over Torque Parameters This parameter sets the torque threshold level that is used as a setpoint for over torque tripping during positive torque This setting is a percentage of the maximum rated torque of the drive This function is enabled at F615 Direct Access Number F616 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 200 00 Changeable
410. unction Program gt Terminal gt Input Terminals This parameter is used to set the functionality of the S3 discrete input terminal In addition this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This parameter sets the programmable S3 terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 5 on pg 234 Direct Access Number F117 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Preset Speed 3 Changeable During Run No Input Terminal 8 S4 Function Program gt Terminal gt Input Terminals This parameter is used to set the functionality of the S4 discrete input terminal In addition this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This parameter sets the programmable S4 terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 5 on pg 234 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F118 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default Preset Speed 4 Changeable During Run No 89 F119 F121 Input Terminal 9 LI1 Function Program gt Terminal gt Input Terminals This parameter is used to set the functionality of the LI1 discrete input terminal In addition this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or Normally Closed This setting assigns the function of the programmable LI terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 5 on pg 234 Not
411. up of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 3 terminal This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target 3 terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 7 on pg 238 Table 8 on pg 239 or Table 10 on pg 241 See F977 for more information on this parameter 222 Direct Access Number F945 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 Disabled Changeable During Run Yes G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F946 F950 Output Function Assigned Direct Access Number F946 Program gt My Function gt My Function Unit 5 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 Disabled This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the Output Function Assigned terminal Changeable During Run Yes This setting assigns the function of the programmable Output Function Assigned data location to one of the functions listed in the Input Setting field of Table 8 on pg 239 Settings 0 3099 See the My Function Instruction Manual P N E6581335 and F977 for more information on this parameter Input Function Target 1 Direct Access Number F947 Program My Function gt My Function Unit 6 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 Disabled This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by sel
412. ure by selecting the functionality of the Output Function Assigned terminal This setting assigns the function of the programmable Output Function Assigned data location to one of the functions listed in the Input Setting field of Table 8 on pg 239 Settings 0 3099 See the My Function Instruction Manual P N E6581335 and F977 for more information on this parameter G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Direct Access Number F940 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 Disabled Changeable During Run Yes 221 F941 F945 Input Function Target 1 Program gt My Function gt My Function Unit 5 This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 1 terminal This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target 1 terminal to any one of the user selectable functions listed in Table 7 on pg 238 Table 8 on pg 239 or Table 10 on pg 241 See F977 for more information on this parameter Direct Access Number F941 Parameter Type Selection List Factory Default 0 Disabled Changeable During Run Yes Input Function Command 1 Program gt My Function gt My Function Unit 5 This parameter is used to assign a user selected logical operator to two user selected Input Function Target variables enable a counter timer function or perform a hold reset func
413. uring Run Yes Minimum 0 00 Maximum Max Freq F011 Units Hz 117 F226 F226 RX2 Al1 Input Point 1 Rate Direct Access Number F226 Program gt Torque gt Setpoints Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 0 00 This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX2 AI1 input terminal when the RX2 AI1 terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Torque Control mode Minimum 250 00 Maximum 250 00 Units Changeable During Run Yes Note The Expansion IO Card Option 1 option board P N ETB003Z is required to use this terminal RX2 Al1 Input Torque Control Setup Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Torque Control input at the RX2 AI1 input terminal Torque Settings Program gt Fundamental Standard Mode Selection gt Frequency Mode gt RX2 Program gt Fundamental gt Standard Mode Selection Command Mode Selection gt Terminal Block Provide a Run command F and or R Torque Control Perform the following setup to allow the system to perform Torque Control RX2 Point 1 ek2 Point from the RX2 AI1 input terminal F226 pee Set RX2 AI1 Input Point 1 Rate F226 Set RX2 AIl Input Point 1 Setting F222 the input analog signal level that corresponds to the speed setting at RX2 AI1 Input Point 1 Rate Set RX2 AI1 Input Point 2 Rate F227 Set RX2 AIl Inp
414. ut Point 2 Setting F224 the input analog signal level that corresponds to the speed setting at RX Input Point 2 Rate Provide a Run command F and or R Torque Control is accomplished by establishing an associated V f output pattern for a given RX2 AI1 input level Once set as the RX2 AI1 input voltage changes the ASD output speed and or torque will vary in accordance with the above settings This parameter sets RX2 AI1 Input Point 1 Rate and is the output torque value that is associated with the setting of RX2 AI1 Input Point 1 Setting when operating in the Torque Control mode This value is entered as 250 to 250 of the rated torque See the Expansion IO Card Option 1 Instruction Manual P N 58685 for more information on the function of this terminal 118 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual F227 F227 RX2 Al1 Input Point 2 Rate Direct Access Number F227 Program gt Torque gt Setpoints Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default 100 00 This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX2 AI1 input terminal when the RX2 AI1 terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Changeable During Run Yes Torque Control mode Minimum 250 00 Torque Control is accomplished by establishing an associated V f output Maximum 250 00 pattern for a given RX2 AI1 input level Units This parameter sets RX2 AI1 Input Point 2 Rate and is the output torque
415. utput of the drive and to switch to the commercial power in the event that 1 a trip is incurred 2 a user set frequency is reached or 3 if initiated by a discrete input terminal Once set up with the proper switching frequency and hold times the system will switch to commercial power upon reaching the F355 frequency criterion Switching may also be accomplished manually by activating the discrete input terminal Commercial Power ASD Switching Terminal activation forces the ASD output speed to accelerate to the F355 switching frequency resulting in the ASD to commercial power switching Deactivation of the discrete input terminal starts the hold time counter setting F356 for ASD to commercial power switching Once timed out the motor resumes normal commercial power operation Settings 0 Off 1 Switch at Signal Input and Trip 2 Switch at Signal Input with Switching Frequency 3 Switch at Signal Input and Trip with Switching Frequency Switching Setup Requirements F354 Enable the switching function F355 Set the switching frequency F356 Speed Hold time before applying ASD output after the switching criteria has been met F357 Speed Hold time before applying commercial power after the switching criteria has been met F358 Speed Hold time of applying commercial power after the switching criteria has been met Set a discrete input terminal to Commercial Power ASD Switching Set OUT1 a
416. value that is associated with the setting of RX2 AI1 Input Point 2 Setting when operating in the Torque Control mode This value is entered as 250 to 250 of the rated torque See RX2 AIl Input Point 1 Rate F226 for more information on this setting G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 119 F228 F228 BIN Input Point 1 Setting Program gt Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the BIN input terminals when the BIN terminals are used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode The discrete input terminals of the Terminal Board are used as the BIN terminals BIN Input Speed Control Setup Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Speed control input at the BIN input terminals Program gt Fundamental gt Standard Mode Selection Frequency Mode 1 gt Binary BCD Program gt Fundamental gt Standard Mode Selection gt Command Mode Selection gt Terminal Block Program gt Terminal gt Input Terminals select and set the desired discrete input terminals to Binary Bit s 0 7 or 0 MSB The binary input byte will control the speed of the motor Program gt Terminal gt Input Terminals select and set a discrete input terminal to Binary Data Write Activation of the Binary Data Write terminal will transfer the status of the Binary Bit s 0 7 or 0 MSB to the control board for speed control
417. voltage The actual output voltage will be influenced by the input voltage of the ASD and the Supply Voltage Compensation setting F307 This parameter is used only when the parameters for Motor Set 3 are configured and selected Motor Set 3 may be selected by a properly configured input terminal see Table 5 on pg 234 F175 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD Dependent Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 50 0 Maximum 660 0 Units Volts Manual Torque Boost 3 Program gt Motor gt Motor Set 3 The Manual Torque Boost 3 function is used to increase the low frequency torque for high inertia loads by increasing the output voltage at frequencies below of the Base Frequency 3 setting F174 See parameter F016 Manual Torque Boost 1 for an explanation of torque boost This parameter is used only when the parameters for Motor Set 3 are configured and selected Motor Set 3 may be selected by a properly configured input terminal see Table 5 on pg 234 F176 Parameter Type Numerical Factory Default ASD Dependent Direct Access Number Changeable During Run Yes Minimum 0 0 Maximum 30 0 Units Motor Overload Protection Level 3 Program gt Motor gt Motor Set 3 The Motor 3 Overload Protection Level parameter specifies the motor overload current level for Motor Set 3 This value is entered as either a percentage o
418. w etc Store in an upright position Disposal Never dispose of electrical components via incineration Contact your state environmental agency for details on disposal of electrical components and packaging in your area G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Installation Precautions Location and Ambient Requirements The Toshiba ASD is intended for permanent installations only Installation should conform to the 2008 National Electrical Code Article 110 NEC Requirements For Electrical Installations all regulations of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration and any other applicable national regional or industry codes and standards Select a mounting location that is easily accessible has adequate personnel working space and adequate illumination for adjustment inspection and maintenance of the equipment refer to 2008 NEC Article 110 13 DO NOT mount the ASD in a location that would produce catastrophic results if it were to fall from its mounting location equipment damage or injury DO NOT mount the ASD in a location that would allow it to be exposed to flammable chemicals or gases water solvents or other fluids Avoid installation in areas where vibration heat humidity dust fibers metal particles explosive corrosive mists or gases or sources of electrical noise are present The installation location shall not be exposed to direct sunlight Allow proper clearance spaces for installa
419. w Speed Operation Operating a general purpose motor at lower speeds may cause a decrease in the cooling ability of the motor Reducing the torque requirement of the motor at lower speeds will decrease the generated heat at lower speeds When the motor is to be operated at low speed less than 50 of full speed and at the rated torque continuously a Toshiba VF motor designed for use in conjunction with an ASD is recommended Overload Protection Adjustment The ASD software monitors the output current of the system and determines when an overload condition occurs The overload current level is a percentage of the rating of the motor This function protects the motor from overload The default setting for the overload detection circuit is set to the maximum rated current of the ASD at the factory This setting will have to be adjusted to match the rating of the motor with which the ASD is to be used To change the overload reference level see Motor Overload Protection Level 1 on pg 182 Operation Above 60 Hz A motor produces more noise and vibration when it is operated at frequencies above 60 Hz Also when operating a motor above 60 Hz the rated limit of the motor or its bearings may be exceeded this may void the motor warranty Contact the motor manufacturer for additional information before operating the motor above 60 Hz G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Power Factor Correction DO NOT connect a power factor correction
420. y Preset Speeds Up to fifteen 15 output frequency values that fall within the Lower Limit and the Upper Limit range may be programmed into the drive and output as a Preset Speed This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 0001 and is identified as Preset Speed 1 The binary number is applied to S1 S4 of the Terminal Board to output the Preset Speed Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Preset Speed control input at the S1 S4 terminals l 3 6 Program gt Fundamental gt Standard Mode Selection gt Command Mode Selection gt Terminal Block Program gt Terminal gt Input Terminals gt S1 set to Preset Speed 1 LSB of 4 bit count Repeat for S2 S4 MSB of 4 bit count as Preset Speed 2 4 respectively all Normally Open Program gt Frequency gt Preset Speeds gt Preset Speed 1 set an output frequency as Preset Speed 1 repeat for Preset Speeds 2 15 as required Program gt Pattern Run gt Operation Mode gt Preset Speed Operation Mode gt Enabled Disabled Select Enable to use the direction accel decel and torque settings of the Preset Speed being run The torque settings used will be as defined in F170 F181 and as selected via the associated discrete input terminals V f Switching 1 and 2 in Table 5 on pg 234 Select Disabled to use the speed setting only of the Preset Speed being run Place the system in the Remote mode Local
421. y 86 Lug Size 265 Main Monitor Selections 45 Main Power Under Voltage 252 Manual Torque Boost 1 82 Manual Torque Boost 2 98 Manual Torque Boost 3 99 Manual Torque Boost 4 100 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual Manual Torque Limit Settings 59 Maximum Frequency 80 MCP Rating 265 Mode Key 29 MOFF 246 MON 1 Bias Adjustment 196 MON 1 Output Gradient Characteristic 195 MON 1 Voltage Current Output Switching 195 MON 2 Bias Adjustment 196 MON 2 Output Gradient Characteristic 196 MON 2 Voltage Current Output Switching 196 MONI Terminal Adjustment 193 MONI Terminal Meter Selection 193 MON2 Terminal Adjustment 194 MON2 Terminal Meter Selection 193 Monitor Mode 43 Monitor Output Function 11 227 Monitor Output Function 21 228 Monitor Output Function 31 228 Monitor Output Function 41 229 Monitor Output Function Command 11 227 Monitor Output Function Command 21 228 Monitor Output Function Command 31 229 Monitor Output Function Command 41 229 Monitor Screen 31 Motor 58 Motor 150 Overload Time Limit 184 Motor Braking 12 Motor Characteristics 10 Motor Connection Diagram 17 Motor Constant 1 153 Motor Constant 2 153 Motor Constant 3 153 Motor Constant 4 153 Motor Current Rating 72 Motor Load 43 Motor OL Overload Trip 43 Motor Overload 252 Motor Overload Protection Configuration 82 Motor Overload Protection Level 1 182 Motor Overload Protection Level 2 98 Mo
422. y be installed side by side with no space in between the adjacent units side by side installations require that the top cover be removed from each ASD For 150 HP ASDs and above a minimum of 50 cm of space is required above and below adjacent units and any obstruction This space is the recommended minimum space requirement for the G9 ASD and ensures that adequate ventilation is provided for each unit More space will provide a better environment for cooling see the section titled Enclosure Dimensions and Conduit Plate Information on pg 254 for additional information on mounting space requirements Note Ensure that the ventilation openings are not obstructed G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 15 Connecting the ASD DANGER A Refer to the section titled Installation Precautions on pg 4 and the section titled Lead Length Specifications on pg 20 before attempting to connect the ASD and the motor to electrical power Power Connections A DANGER A Contact With 3 phase Input Output Terminals May Cause An Electrical Shock Resulting In Injury Or Loss Of Life See Figure 20 on pg 26 for a system I O connectivity schematic An inductor DCL may be connected across the PO and PA terminals to provide additional filtering When not used a jumper must be connected across these terminals see Figure 20 on pg 26 PA and PB are used for the DBR connection if using a braking resistor PC is the negative terminal of the
423. z mode green Local LED illuminates DC Voltage 0 00 4 Turn the Rotary Encoder clockwise until the Output Current 0 00 desired Frequency Command value is F RST RES Si S2 SS S4 displayed in the SET field of the LCD Screen OUMROUIZAL 5 Press the Run key and the motor runs at the Frequency Command value Note The speed of the motor may be changed while the motor is running by using the Rotary Encoder to change the Frequency Command value 6 Press the Stop Reset key to stop the motor G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 73 74 Default Setting Changes To change a default parameter setting go to the root level of the Program menu Turn the Rotary Encoder until the desired parameter group is within the cursor block Press the Rotary Encoder to select an item or to access a subgroup repeat if required until reaching the parameter to be changed Press the Rotary Encoder to enter the Edit mode and the value setting takes on the reverse video format dark background light text Turn the Rotary Encoder to change the parameter value setting Press the Rotary Encoder while the parameter setting is in the reverse video mode to accept the new setting or press the ESC key while the new parameter setting is in the reverse video mode to exit the menu without saving the change For a complete listing of the Program mode menu selections see the section titled Program Mode Menu Navigation on pg 46 Program menu items are listed an
424. zard To combat this condition the 3 phase input may be connected using contactors that are configured to open in the event of an extended DBR over current condition or an internal circuit failure Using a thermal sensor and or overload protection as the 3 phase input contactor drive signal the contactors will open and remove the 3 phase input power in the event of an extended DBR over current or system over voltage condition See Dynamic Braking on pg 136 for more information using Dynamic Braking with the ASD Motor Braking The motor may continue to rotate and coast to a stop after being shut off due to the inertia of the load If an immediate stop is required a braking system should be used The two most common types of motor braking systems used with the ASD are DC Injection Braking and Dynamic Braking For further information on braking systems see DC Injection Braking on pg 124 and Dynamic Braking on pg 136 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual G9 ASD Characteristics Over Current Protection Each ASD model is designed for a specified operating power range The ASD will incur a trip if the design specifications are exceeded However the G9 ASD may be operated at 115 of the specified output current range continuously or 110 continuously if gt 60 HP for the 230 volt system or if 125 HP for the 460 volt system or at 150 for a limited amount of time as indicated in the section titled Current Voltage Specifications on pg

G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents